Recipes with Helpful How To Videos - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/recipes-with-video-tutorials/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Sat, 24 Jan 2026 22:57:35 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png Recipes with Helpful How To Videos - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/recipes-with-video-tutorials/ 32 32 Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/#comments Tue, 01 Jul 2025 16:52:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15923 What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce) You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would…]]>

What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce)

You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would be mine. 

At its core, tzatziki is a yogurt-based dip made with strained yogurt (also known as Greek yogurt), cucumber, garlic, lemon juice, and herbs (typically dill or mint).

Referred to by many names, such as Greek Tzatziki sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Cucumber Yogurt Sauce, it can be served as a dip, a sauce, or even as a dressing. 

It pairs well with just about anything, from meat to gyros, to Turkish kebabs, to grilled or roasted vegetables.

While many people in the U.S. know it as the white sauce that comes with a gyro, that version is often heavier, sometimes made with mayonnaise or sour cream, and doesn’t always include cucumber. 

My homemade tzatziki sauce recipe is different here. It’s the real thing. The kind of tzatziki you’ll find on tables in homes across Turkiye, Greece, and beyond.

Essential Ingredients for Authentic Tzatziki (And Why They Matter)

The good news is that this easy tzatziki recipe requires only a few simple ingredients and comes together in minutes. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful tips to keep in mind when shopping:

Tzatziki sauce ingredients from the top view with text on the image.

Full-fat Greek Yogurt (also known as Strained Yogurt): I think the best yogurt for tzatziki is a whole-milk, plain Greek yogurt. It yields a rich and creamy tzatziki dip, a main characteristic of this Mediterranean sauce.  If your container has any liquid sitting on top, be sure to strain that out before using.

You can also use plain, unsweetened yogurt or even low-fat or fat-free yogurt, but the texture will be a bit looser compared to Greek yogurt.

Fresh Cucumber: Either Persian or English cucumbers work well. I like to peel them first, as some cucumber skin can be bitter. Still, it is a personal preference.

I grate them using the large holes on a box grater and then drain them in a mesh sieve. It might seem like an extra step, but thoroughly draining the grated cucumber helps eliminate excess liquid, giving you the thick, creamy consistency that this cucumber tzatziki sauce is known for.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: The traditional version of this Mediterranean yogurt sauce calls for fresh, finely minced garlic. I usually add two cloves per 1 ½ cups of yogurt, but feel free to adjust the amount based on your preferences. 

If you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder is a fine substitute. Since it’s more concentrated, I recommend using about 1 teaspoon per 1 ½ cups of yogurt.

Fresh Herbs: I like using fresh dill, but fresh mint is another classic option. In Turkiye, it’s also common to use dried dill or mint if fresh isn’t available. That said, I think fresh herbs bring a brighter, more vibrant taste.

Fresh Lemon Juice: Just a squeeze is enough to brighten the flavors and balance the richness of the yogurt.

Kosher Salt and Black Pepper: You won’t need anything beyond basic seasoning here. Start with the amounts listed in the recipe and adjust to taste.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil (Optional): You won’t see olive oil listed in my recipe because my mom never used it. I find that thick, whole-milk yogurt gives the sauce all the richness it needs. However, if you’d like to add it, a tablespoon of olive oil per 1 ½ cups of yogurt is a good starting point.

How to Make Easy Homemade Tzatziki: A Step-by-Step Guide

Making a delicious tzatziki with yogurt, shredded cucumber, and lemon juice doesn’t require any special cooking techniques, so anyone can do it.

A collage of images showing how to strain grated cucumber and make the yogurt mixture.

Step 1 – Grate and drain the cucumber: Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the peeled cucumber and transfer it to a fine-mesh strainer. Press down with a spatula to release the excess moisture. I usually let it sit for a few minutes to help the juices drain completely.

Once drained, you should have about 1 cup of grated cucumber.

Alternatively, you can wrap the shredded cucumber in a clean tea towel and squeeze it by hand to remove as much liquid as possible.

Step 2 – Whisk the yogurt base: In a medium bowl, combine the Greek yogurt, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper.

Whisk until smooth and creamy. This is also a good time to give it a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

A collage of photos showing how to make tzatziki from scratch.

Step 3 – Add cucumber and herbs: Fold in the drained cucumber and fresh dill or mint. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

Step 4 – Cover and chill:
You can serve it right away, but if you have the time, cover and let it rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes. This allows the flavors to meld and deepen.

A bowl of tzatziki surrounded with vegetables.
Print

Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe

An easy tzatziki sauce recipe that you can make in minutes and serve with all your savory Mediterranean/Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 61kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 English Cucumber peeled (or 2 Persian cucumbers)
  • 1 ½ cups Whole Milk Greek Yogurt unsweetened and unflavored
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic peeled and minced finely
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup fresh dill or fresh mint

Instructions

  • Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the cucumber. Transfer it into a fine-mesh strainer and strain all of its juices, pressing it with a rubber spatula. Set aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  • In a medium-size mixing bowl, whisk together yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper.
  • Using a spatula, fold in the cucumber and dill. Transfer to a bowl.
    Person making the tzatziki in a bowl.
  • If you have time, cover with plastic, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ cups of tzatziki sauce which is ideal for 4 servings as a condiment. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 2 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. If you notice any liquid separation, just give your Tzatziki a good stir before serving.
  • A word on olive oil: My recipe relies on rich yogurt for creaminess and does not require adding any olive oil, unlike some other tzatziki recipes. However, for extra depth, drizzle 1 tbsp extra virgin olive oil on top before serving.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 381IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 1mg

Expert Tips from a Lifelong Tzatziki Maker

This recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a few things I want to point out so you can end up with the best tzatziki on your first try:

  • Don’t skip draining the shredded cucumber: This is the single most important step when it comes to achieving that creamy texture tzatziki is known for. Yes, it’s an extra step, but it makes all the difference.
  • DIY Greek Yogurt: If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can strain plain yogurt at home. Just place a fine-mesh sieve over a bowl and line it with cheesecloth (a paper towel will also work in a pinch). Add the yogurt, cover it, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours. The longer it sits, the thicker it becomes.
    Since plain yogurt has more liquid, I recommend using about half a cup more than the recipe calls for to account for the liquid that will drain.
  • Avoid overmixing: Once you have folded in the cucumber and herbs, mix only until the ingredients are just combined. Overmixing can cause the cucumber to release more liquid, which may water down the sauce.
  • Do not skip the chilling: To me, the secret to the best tzatziki sauce is letting it rest in the fridge. This time allows the flavors (especially the garlic and fresh herbs) to develop and deepen. Even just 30 minutes makes a difference, but planning for an hour or two can yield even better results.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Make Ahead: You can make this Greek tzatziki sauce recipe a day or two ahead. Just be sure to transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge.

Storage: Leftovers will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Give it a good stir before serving, and if any liquid has collected on top, simply pour it off or drain it before mixing.

Delicious Ways to Serve Tzatziki Sauce in Your Daily Cooking

Images showing food that uses tzatziki.

I may or may not have been caught eating this Mediterranean classic with a spoon. All jokes aside, tzatziki is a staple for a reason. It pairs beautifully with just about any meat or vegetable dish that could use a cooling, creamy contrast. Here are a few of my favorite ways to use it:

Kabobs and Gyros: Simply drizzle it right on top! If you want to try something different, try drizzling this sauce over my Karniyarik recipe (aka Turkish Stuffed Eggplant), Greek Yogurt Chicken, Shish Taouk, or Baked Chicken Kabobs, Chicken Shawarma, or serve it with Turkish Kofte

Sauce for Burgers and Sandwiches: I love using it as a spread for Greek Lamb Burgers (pictured above) or my Chicken Pita Wraps. It adds a creamy contrast and brings everything together.

Vegetables and Vegetable Dishes: A dollop of tzatziki can turn simple roasted eggplant into a delicious appetizer. It’s also a great match for baked zucchini fritters, crispy falafel, or just about any veggie-forward dish you’d serve at a gathering.

With Salads: Tzatziki isn’t just a dip; it makes a fantastic, creamy addition to various salads. I particularly love a dollop alongside or even mixed into my easy Greek salad for an extra layer of freshness.

Grain Bowls: Drizzle it over shawarma chicken bowls (pictured above) or make it part of a DIY Cava bowl. It adds creaminess and brightens the rest of the toppings.

Part of a Meze Platter: Serve it in a bowl as a dip on a large platter along with cheese and crackers, olives, hummus, muhammara, pita bread (or pita chips), and fresh raw vegetables.

Tzatziki Sauce Variations & Substitutions:

  • Dairy-Free/Vegan Options: To make this vegan or dairy-free, use a neutral-flavored plant-based yogurt. I prefer unflavored cashew yogurt, but coconut or almond milk yogurt can also work. Just make sure it’s unsweetened and as thick as possible for the best consistency.
  • Herb Variations: You can easily make this creamy tzatziki sauce your own by switching up the herbs. Fresh dill and mint are classic options, but parsley or chives are also great alternatives. No fresh herbs on hand? You can leave them out and still have a delicious dip.
  • Making it Thinner (like Turkish Cacık): If you have ever been to Turkiye, you’ve probably had cacik, a thinner version of tzatziki. To achieve that texture, simply use plain yogurt instead of Greek yogurt, or stir in about ½ cup of cold water (or more, depending on your preference) until you reach the desired consistency.

FAQs:

How Do You Spell Tzatziki?

The phonetic spelling is /tsaˈtsiːki/. The word for this Greek yogurt cucumber sauce is spelled T-Z-A-T-Z-I-K-I. It is a loanword from Modern Greek, which actually comes from the Turkish word cacık, of unknown origin.

How Do You Pronounce Tzatziki?

So, how do you say Tzatziki? The correct way to pronounce Tzatziki is “tsah-see-key.” Think of the tsah part as how you say “pizza,” without the first two letters.

Can Tzatziki sauce be frozen?

Technically, you can freeze yogurt, but after thawing, it loses its creamy consistency. This is generally true for most savory yogurt-based dressings or sauces. Therefore, I wouldn’t recommend freezing Tzatziki sauce.

Can I use non-fat yogurt?

Yes, you can use any plain yogurt you like. However, I recommend sticking to Greek Yogurt as it is thicker than other yogurt types. The higher the fat content, the more delicious and creamy it would be, but non-fat or low-fat plain yogurt would still do the job.

Do I have to strain the juice of the cucumber?

The correct answer is yes. Some people even go as far as straining yogurt and cucumber in a colander lined with cheesecloth overnight in the fridge. I guess it is because they prefer a thicker consistency. However, in my opinion, the thickness of Tzatziki is a personal preference. If you like yours runny then no need to strain the juices and vice versa.

Do I have to peel the cucumber?

It is a personal preference. I prefer to peel mine as some cucumber skin can be bitter.

Can I substitute sour cream for yogurt?

I don’t usually recommend it, as the flavor and texture are quite different. Sour cream is richer and tangier than yogurt, and it has a higher fat content, which can make the sauce feel heavier than intended.

What can i substitute for greek yogurt in tzatziki sauce?

If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can use plain (unsweetened) yogurt to make tzatziki. Since it is not as thick as Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), I recommend straining its liquid before use. Simply place it in a fine-mesh strainer lined with cheesecloth and set it in a bowl.

Other Yogurt Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

  • My Yogurt Dill Sauce is bright, herby, and perfect for serving with salmon, baked potatoes, or simple roasted vegetables.
  • A drizzle of my Greek yogurt salad dressing instantly turns any salad greens into a refreshing, creamy side that goes with just about any meal.
  • A spoonful of my Yogurt Tahini Sauce adds a creamy, nutty layer to grain bowls, roasted veggies, or just about anything that needs a little something extra.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/feed/ 25
Texas Caviar Recipe (Cowboy Caviar) https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/ https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/#comments Wed, 25 Jun 2025 18:24:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22788 For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re…]]>

For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re like me and didn’t grow up eating it, you might agree that some versions can be overly sweet.

Then I came across Dorie Greenspan’s version in her cookbook Everyday Dorie (affiliate link) and decided to give it another shot. To my surprise, it was nothing like what I had tasted before. Her cowboy caviar dressing was perfectly tangy with just a touch of sweetness, balancing out the earthy beans in the best way.

Cowboy caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.

This recipe, sometimes called Texas Caviar, Cowboy Caviar, Cowboy Salad, or even Cowboy Bean Dip, is my take on her version, with a few minor tweaks.

Whatever name you use, it’s one of the easiest dishes to throw together, and it works as a dip, a salad, or a chunky salsa perfect with a side of tortilla chips.

Texas Caviar Ingredients

For a quick overview, find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. But for truly foolproof results, here are my top tips as you shop and prep:

The Dressing Ingredients:

Some versions of this recipe use bottled Italian dressing, but I find those to be overly oily and lacking in depth. What makes this Cowboy Caviar dip different is the homemade lime and olive oil dressing. It’s just enough to coat the beans and veggies without weighing them down, adding brightness and balance in every bite.

Ingredients for cowboy caviar's dressing.

Here are a couple of helpful ingredient notes as you make the dressing:

Lime zest and lime juice: My version of the Texas Caviar dressing uses both lime zest and fresh lime juice to bring out a bright, tangy flavor. Four tablespoons of lime juice might sound like a lot, but trust me, it’s just the right amount.

If you prefer a milder taste, you can use 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar and reduce the lime juice to 2 tablespoons.

And just a quick tip: it’s always easier to zest the lime before squeezing it.

Spices: I use a small amount of ground cumin and sweet paprika, following Dorie’s recipe. I think they add a beautiful depth and a welcome punch. Still, if you’re not a fan of either spice, feel free to leave them out.

Sweetener: I almost always reach for natural sweeteners like honey or maple syrup, but granulated sugar works in a pinch if that’s what you have on hand.

Garlic: Whenever I make a salad dressing, I love using fresh garlic. I think the sharp bite and depth of flavor just can’t be replicated. But if you prefer something milder, you can substitute it with 1 teaspoon of garlic powder.

Salad Ingredients:

A photo showing what's in Texas caviar.

Beans: I use a combination of black beans and black-eyed peas in my version of this Cowboy Caviar salad. In my opinion, black-eyed peas are pretty much a must in any Texas Caviar dip recipe. You can swap red kidney beans or pinto beans in place of the black beans if you’d like, and you’ll still get the heart of the dish.

Canned beans help keep things quick and easy, but you can absolutely cook them from scratch if that’s your preference.

Just be sure to rinse and dry them well before assembling the salad to avoid extra liquid watering it down.

Corn: In the summer, I love using fresh shucked corn when it’s in season. But if you’re making this at another time of year, frozen (and thawed) or canned (rinsed and drained) corn works just as well.

Onion: I use a combination of finely chopped green onions and red onions because I love the distinct flavors each one adds. You get a mix of color, crunch, and both mild and sharp flavors. If you prefer a milder taste, you can leave out the red onion. Or if you want something with more bite, skip the green and just use red.

Peppers: Most Texas Caviar recipes use a combination of red bell peppers and jalapeño, and for good reason. Each one brings its own unique flavor. If you like a bit of heat, feel free to leave some of the jalapeño seeds in for a touch of spiciness.

Tomatoes: During the summer months, I love using colorful cherry tomatoes for this Texas Caviar dip. But really, any kind of tomato will work. Heirloom, beefsteak, or even regular Roma tomatoes are all good options. Just be sure to cut them into small, bite-sized pieces so they mix easily with the other ingredients.

Avocado: It is optional and not traditional, but I think a ripe avocado makes a great addition, especially if you’re planning to serve this as a dip with chips on the side. Just be sure to cut it into small cubes so it blends in nicely.

Fresh Herbs: I used a handful of finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves, but if you are not a fan, you can use fresh parsley instead.

How To Make Texas Caviar?

Making this recipe takes no more than 15-20 minutes and requires no special equipment. 

Step 1 – Make the Cowboy Caviar Dressing: 

Person making Texas caviar dressing.

In a mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, honey, and garlic until fully combined.

Or, if you prefer, add everything to a mason jar, put the lid on, and give it a good shake.

You can also make the dressing a day or two ahead of time to speed things up even more when you’re ready to assemble the dip.

Step 2 – Assemble the salad:

Cowboy caviar salad from the top view in a bowl.

In a large salad bowl, combine the drained and rinsed black beans and black-eyed peas with the corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeños, tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.

If you’re using avocado, I recommend adding it just before serving so it doesn’t brown.

Step 3 – Drizzle and Serve:

Images showing how to make Cowboy caviar.

Drizzle the dressing over the salad and gently toss to combine, being careful not to break up the beans too much.

This is also a good time to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

One of the best things about this Cowboy Salad recipe is that it can be made ahead of time (one or two days). In fact, I recommend it because the extra time allows the flavors to mingle and develop. Here’s how I do it:

  • To make ahead:
    Prepare the dressing and chop all the salad ingredients except the avocado. Toss everything together in a large bowl, drizzle with the dressing, cover tightly, and refrigerate. If you’re using avocado, add it just before serving to keep it from browning.
  • Storing leftovers:
    Transfer any leftover Cowboy Caviar to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Before serving, give it a good stir and freshen it up with a squeeze of lime juice and a sprinkle of salt if needed.

Expert Tips for The Best Texas Caviar

While this recipe is pretty straightforward, below are a few helpful tips for the best results.

  • Let it rest: This step is optional, but I recommend letting the salad rest in the fridge for about an hour before serving. It gives the tangy lime juice dressing time to soak into the beans and veggies, bringing everything together.
  • Evenly cut vegetables: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is chopping the vegetables, but it’s worth taking your time. Aim to cut everything into similar-sized pieces so each bite feels balanced. Try to slice the tomatoes thinly and cut the peppers into small, bite-sized pieces, ideally smaller than the black-eyed peas.
  • Be gentle as you toss: When mixing the salad, go slowly and gently to avoid breaking the beans. This helps keep the texture nice and prevents everything from turning into mush. 

Cowboy Caviar Variations and Substitutions

Making this Cowboy Caviar dip your own is easy because, let’s face it, this simple recipe is endlessly customizable. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Add more veggies: You can pack your Cowboy Caviar with even more fresh vegetables. Try thinly sliced cucumbers, chopped celery, or even finely diced radishes for extra crunch and color.
  • Add fruit: I’ve seen versions of this recipe made with sweet fruit like mango or pineapple. It might sound unexpected, but the sweetness pairs nicely with the tangy dressing, adding a refreshing twist, especially when served as a dip with chips.
  • Switch up the dressing: While my favorite part of this recipe is the tangy lime dressing, I sometimes change things up with my chili lime vinaigrette, which incorporates chili powder and adds a more Mexican-inspired twist.
  • Toss in grains: I love adding a cup of cooked quinoa, wild rice or farro to make it a filling salad especially if I am making this recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.
  • Make it vegan: If you prefer a vegan version, just swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.

What To Serve with Texas Caviar?

It’s no secret that this recipe makes a great side dish or appetizer, whether you’re heading to a summer BBQ, a potluck, or packing lunch for work. But if you’d like to turn it into a full meal, you have plenty of options. Here are a few ideas:

  • Grilled Meats and seafood: Serve it alongside grilled chicken, shrimp, or salmon for a light and colorful plate. It’s a perfect match for summer cookouts or easy weeknight dinners.
  • With chips on the side: This Cowboy Salsa recipe makes a great appetizer when served with tortilla chips. I like using the scoopable kind, so you can get a little bit of everything in each bite.
  • With eggs: Scrambled eggs wrapped in a tortilla with a generous spoonful of Texas Caviar makes an excellent breakfast burrito. It adds freshness, texture, and just the right amount of zing to your morning meal.

FAQs

What is Texas Caviar?

Texas Caviar is a recipe originally created and served by Helen Corbitt, the culinary director of Neiman Marcus, in 1940s Dallas.

Made with a combination of canned or cooked beans (i.e. red, black, or pinto), black-eyed peas, peppers, tomatoes, garlic, and other extras like corn, avocado, mango, and various herbs and spices, since then it has stood the test of time and become a Southern classic.

Texas Caviar vs. Cowboy Caviar: Is There a Difference?

The dish was originally created in Texas, which is how it got the name “Texas Caviar.” Over time, people started calling it “Cowboy Caviar” as a fun, casual nickname.

How far in advance can you make cowboy caviar?

You can make Cowboy Caviar up to 2 days in advance. Just store it in an airtight container in the fridge, and it should still taste fresh and delicious. If you’re planning to include avocado, wait to add it until right before serving to keep it from browning.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Delicious Bean Salads You’ll Love

Fan of bean salads? Me too! Here are a few more that you might like:

  • My Corn and Black Bean Salad is yet another great alternative to a bean salad that you can serve with chips on the side.
  • What makes my Five Bean Salad recipe the best bean salad is the garlicky mustard dressing. Just like this cowboy caviar recipe, it uses a combination of canned beans and some lightly boiled fresh green beans.
  • If you have extra black eyed peas, then my Black Eyed Peas Salad is just as fresh and satisfying. Not to mention, it takes 15 minutes to make.
Texas caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
Print

Texas Caviar Recipe

This Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar)loaded with black-eyed peas, corn, tomatoes, peppers, and tangy lime dressing makes the best salad, dip, or side dish. Ready in 30 minutes and can be made ahead.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 192kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon honey
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Caviar Dip:

  • 1 can black beans 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • 1 can black eyed peas 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • ½ cup corn kernels frozen (and thawed), canned (and drained) or fresh corn would all work
  • 3 scallions both white and green parts are chopped
  • cup red onion chopped finely or diced
  • 1 red bell peppers chopped (approx. 1/2 cup)
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ avocado ripe – cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro rinsed and chopped

To Serve With (Optional)

  • Your favorite hot Sauce
  • Tortilla Chips

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, smoked paprika, salt, honey and garlic. Set it aside.
    Person making Texas caviar dressing with lime juice.
  • For the Texas Caviar dip (or salad): Place, black beans, black eyed peas, corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeno pepper, cherry tomatoes, avocado, and fresh cilantro in a bowl.
    The ingredients for Cowboy caviar in a bowl from the top view.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person drizzling the salad with dressing and mixing it.
  • If preferred, add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce and serve with tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5-6 cups of Cowboy caviar ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving and does not include the calories coming from (optional) tortilla chips.
  • Make ahead: You can make this recipe up to 2 days in advance. If you go in that direction, add the avocado right before serving to avoid browning.
  • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • If you want to go with more of the traditional Italian salad dressing route instead of the lime dressing I used, feel free to use my Italian salad dressing below: ¼ cups extra virgin olive oil
    2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    1 clove of garlic, minced
    1 teaspoon dried basil
    1/4 teaspoon dried oregano
    ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper (optional)
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt (I use Diamond kosher salt)
    ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 326mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 982IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was originally published in March 2019. It has been updated with some additional information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2025.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/feed/ 44
Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins https://foolproofliving.com/pumpkin-oatmeal-muffins/ https://foolproofliving.com/pumpkin-oatmeal-muffins/#comments Thu, 26 Sep 2024 12:31:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11121 Pumpkin season is here, and today’s recipe, pumpkin oat muffins, is exactly what you need. Not only do they not…]]>

Pumpkin season is here, and today’s recipe, pumpkin oat muffins, is exactly what you need. Not only do they not require much effort in the kitchen, but they also make your whole house smell like pumpkin season. 

Like our Easy Pumpkin Bread and Almond Flour Pumpkin Bread, these muffins are a quick breakfast perfect for busy mornings throughout the fall season and best enjoyed with your morning coffee.

Pumpkin oat muffins on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This pumpkin oatmeal muffins recipe requires just a handful of simple ingredients you probably already have on hand. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  • Coconut Oil: I used melted and cooled coconut oil, but you can also use avocado oil, olive oil, or unsalted butter (though it won’t be dairy-free) if preferred.
  • Sweetener: One of my favorite natural sweeteners is pure maple syrup, but you can also use honey. I would not swap the liquid sweetener out for a dry granulated sweetener (like coconut sugar or brown sugar) because this will affect the moisture content.
  • Eggs: Use two large eggs at room temperature. For a vegan pumpkin and oats muffins recipe, use flax eggs. To make flax eggs that is equal to two eggs, mix two tablespoons of ground flaxseeds (aka flaxseed meal) with 5 tablespoons of water. Let the mixture sit for 10 minutes until it has a gel-like consistency. Use it in the recipe in place of eggs as written.
  • Pumpkin: Make sure to use pure pumpkin puree and not pumpkin pie filling. If you prefer fresh pumpkin puree, you can make yours following this Homemade Pumpkin Puree recipe.
  • Milk: I used unsweetened almond milk, but other options include full-fat coconut milk, cashew milk, or oat milk. You can also use regular whole milk instead.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Whole Wheat Flour: Whole wheat flour keeps adds extra fiber but regular all-purpose flour can be used instead.
  • Kosher Salt: Salt enhances all those oatmeal and pumpkin flavors.
  • Baking Soda: Baking soda helps the muffins rise and promotes a golden brown color.
  • Pumpkin Pie Spice
  • Old-Fashioned Oats: The types of oats you use will determine the final texture of your muffins. I prefer Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats because they are chewier and more substantial. Quick oats make the muffins too mushy, so I do not recommend using them.
  • Raisins: I highly recommend the raisins because they add the right amount of sweetness. Dried cranberries (apple juice sweetened preferred) are a good substitute.

Optional Add-Ins

Here are some additional mix-ins you can add to these healthy oat pumpkin muffins to make it your own:

  • Pumpkin Seeds: Sprinkle the tops of the muffins with pumpkin seeds (pepitas).
  • Chocolate Chips: To give it that pumpkin-and-chocolate vibe, sprinkle with dark chocolate chips (affiliate link) or white chocolate chips.
  • Nuts: Toss in some toasted and chopped pecans or walnuts for crunch.

How to Make Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins?

These oatmeal pumpkin muffins come together in a flash; the hardest part is waiting for them to bake in the oven. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to make this healthy breakfast pumpkin muffin recipe.
  1. Prep muffin pan: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 degrees C. Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchment paper liners. If you do not have liners, generously coat the muffin cups with coconut oil, butter, or cooking spray.
  2. Whisk wet ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk the melted coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, pumpkin puree, almond milk, and vanilla extract until smooth.
  3. Mix the dry ingredients: In a separate medium bowl, mix the whole wheat flour, Kosher salt, baking soda, pumpkin pie spice, and oats until combined.
  4. Make the muffin batter: Add the dry ingredients to the bowl of wet ingredients. Mix until just combined—do not overmix. Fold in the raisins.
Person portioning the muffin batter in a muffin tin and then topping each cup with chocolate chips.
  1. Fill muffin pan: Scoop the batter into each cup, about ⅔ full. Top with pumpkin seeds or chocolate chips if using.
  2. Bake: Bake for 25-27 minutes until a toothpick inserted into the center of a muffin comes out clean. 
  3. Cool: Allow to cool in the pan for 10 minutes before removing. Transfer the muffins to a wire rack to cool completely. Enjoy plain, with a drizzle of almond butter or a dollop of vanilla yogurt.

How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

If I have the extra time, I usually bake a double batch of these oatmeal pumpkin spice muffins as they make the best snack or quick breakfast. You can easily grab one and go because they store well. Here are my best storage tips to keep these muffins fresh and moist as long as possible:

  • Storage: Store muffins in an airtight container at room temperature for 3-4 days. The cold moisture in the fridge will draw out some of the moisture.
  • Freeze: Cool completely, then transfer to a freezer-safe container or freezer bag, squeezing out all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw in the fridge overnight or right on the kitchen counter to room temperature.
  • Reheat: Pop one in the microwave for 10-15 seconds or reheat in an oven or toaster oven until warm, about 5 minutes.
Healthy pumpkin oatmeal muffins fresh out of the oven in a muffin tin.

Expert Tips

While this recipe is pretty straightforward for any home baker, there are a few things worth mentioning to help you succeed on your first try. Here are a few helpful tips for the best oatmeal pumpkin muffin recipe:

  • Use parchment liners: The parchment paper liners make for easy removal and no messy clean-up. I love these Parchment Liners (affiliate link).
  • Do not overmix: The key to light and fluffy pumpkin muffins with oatmeal is not to overmix. This will prevent too much gluten from forming in the batter.
  • Make your own pumpkin spice: If you can’t find it at the grocery store or prefer to make your own, mix 3 tablespoons ground cinnamon, 2 teaspoons ground ginger, 2 teaspoons nutmeg, 1 teaspoon allspice, and 1 teaspoon ground cloves. Stir to combine. This makes 5 tablespoons of pumpkin spice, you can use some of it in this muffin recipe and store the remainder in an airtight container in a cool place for up to 6 months.

FAQs

Why are my pumpkin muffins gummy?

Pumpkin muffins become gummy when you overmix the batter. This means that too much gluten was developed during the mixing process, making tough, dense muffins.

If you try this Healthy Pumpkin Muffins recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Other Pumpkin Recipes You Might Like

Healthy oatmeal pumpkin muffins from the top view.
Print

Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins Recipe

Easy and healthy Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins are made with whole wheat flour and rolled oats and are minimally sweetened with maple syrup. They are the perfect grab-and-go breakfast or an afternoon snack when craving something sweet.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 12 muffins
Calories 220kcal

Ingredients

  • cup coconut oil melted and cooled
  • ¾ cup maple syrup
  • 2 large eggs at room temperature (or flax eggs)
  • 1 cup pumpkin puree (unsweetened) (not pumpkin pie filling)
  • ¼ cup unsweetened almond milk or regular milk
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 ¾ cup whole wheat flour 8.9 oz./266g
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda 5g
  • 2 teaspoons pumpkin pie spice
  • cup old-fashioned oats 40g
  • ½ cup raisins roughly chopped
  • 2 tablespoons pumpkin seeds as garnish (optional)
  • ¼ cup chocolate chips as topping (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 degrees C. Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchment liners. If you do not have parchment liners, generously coat the cups with oil.
  • To prepare the wet ingredients, place coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, pumpkin puree, almond milk, and vanilla extract in a large bowl. Whisk until thoroughly combined. Set aside.
  • To prepare the dry ingredients, whisk together whole wheat flour, kosher salt, baking soda, pumpkin pie spice and oats in a separate large mixing bowl until fully incorporated.
  • Fold the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and mix just until combined. Do not overmix.
  • Fold in the raisins.
  • Scoop the batter into each muffin cup, about ⅔ full. If preferred, top with the pumpkin seeds or chocolate chips.
  • Bake for 25-27 minutes until a toothpick, when inserted, comes out clean.
  • Let cool for 10 minutes before removing from the pan onto a wire rack to cool.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 muffins. The nutritional values below are per muffin.
  • Storage: Bring them to room temperature and store in an airtight container for upto 4 days.
  • Freeze: Cool completely, then transfer your muffins to a freezer bag, squeezing out all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Flax eggs: If you prefer a vegan pumpkin oatmeal muffins recipe, use flax eggs instead. Mix 2 tablespoons of ground flaxseeds (aka flax meal) with 5 tablespoons of water to make flax eggs. Let it sit for 5-10 minutes or until it reaches a gel-like consistency. Use it in the recipe in place of eggs.

Nutrition

Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 27mg | Sodium: 308mg | Potassium: 235mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 3220IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pumpkin-oatmeal-muffins/feed/ 47
Muhammara Recipe (Roasted Red Pepper Dip) https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/#comments Mon, 26 Aug 2024 23:12:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27123 If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt…]]>

If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt Dip, Roasted Carrot Hummus, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Roasted Vegetable Dip recipes.

What is Muhammara?

Muhammara is a traditional Middle Eastern red pepper dip or condiment typically served a dip or sauce with warm pita bread. It is claimed by many countries, but the actual origin is the Syrian city of Aleppo.

Also called Muhumra, Hamara, or Marmara, the dip is popular throughout Lebanon, Turkey, Armenia, the Middle East, and Meditteranean. It’s one of those recipes widely adapted according to the region and personal taste.

Muhammara is served in a large bowl and garnished with walnuts, scallions, and dill.

If you’ve never made this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to be amazed! Similar to its simpler version, roasted red pepper walnut dip, it is robust in flavor with sweet red peppers, nutty walnuts, and pomegranate molasses added to it to make it closer to its traditional version. All you need is a food processor and 30 minutes for a Meditteranean-inspired dip that is bright in color and flavor! Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! This a delicious dip I grew up eating. We put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter.

Key Ingredients:

To make this Mediterranean red pepper sauce, you will need the following ingredients:

All of the ingredients are photographed from the top view
Walnuts are roasted in a baking sheet
  • Red Bell Peppers – Purchase fresh, organic, sweet red bell peppers the day you are going to prepare the dip for the best flavor. If you’re in a pinch, jarred roasted red peppers can be substituted; however, it’s worth noting that the flavor of homemade roasted red peppers is much sweeter than using ones from a jar, and the texture is softer.
  • Raw Walnuts – Toasting walnuts beforehand brings out more of their nutty, creamy flavor. I like to purchase a bulk of walnuts and toast them in a single layer on a large baking sheet in a 350-degree oven until light golden brown (about 7 minutes) as soon as I get home from the store, then cool completely and store them in an airtight container in the freezer. That way I have toasted walnuts ready whenever I need them!
  • Crackers – The authentic muhammara recipe is made with bread crumbs. In this modern version, I followed in the footsteps of the authors of the Vegetable Illustrated and used crackers instead. You can use any type of lean crackers, such as the simple water cracker. However, for even more flavor variation, use a cracker scented with rosemary, thyme, flax seeds, or sesame seeds. For best results, gently crack the crackers in a zip-top bag and finish crushing with a rolling pin.
  • Scallions – Use both green and white parts and be sure to roughly chop prior to adding to the bowl of your food processor.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil – This is a raw, uncooked sauce, so a good-quality Extra Virgin Olive Oil makes all the difference. My favorite is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link).
  • Pomegranate Molasses – If you are unfamiliar with pomegranate molasses, it is a slightly sweet, slightly tart syrup made from boiling down pomegranate juice (similar to how balsamic glaze is prepared). It gives the dip its signature sweet and tangy taste, adding an extra depth of flavor. It is a very popular ingredient in Middle Eastern cuisine and an authentic ingredient for this red pepper spread. Most supermarkets sell pomegranate molasses, but you can also purchase it online. If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
  • Lemon Juice – A hint of fresh acidity goes a long way and locks in the color of those beautiful roasted red peppers.
  • Paprika – I prefer sweet paprika over hot since the spice factor will come from the cayenne.
  • Cumin – Although not typically included, I like the punch of savory, smoky goodness cumin brings to this dip.
  • Kosher Salt – Use the amount called for in the recipe and adjust the taste to your liking at the very end. I also recommend finishing it off with some flaky sea salt.
  • Cayenne Pepper (or red pepper flakes) – A slight kick from the cayenne pepper transforms it into a healthy spicy capsicum dip (capsicum is another word for pepper). If you are not into spiciness, you can simply omit it. Alternatively, if you can get your hands on it, you can swap cayenne pepper with Aleppo pepper.

How to make Muhammara?

To make this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, simply:

Red peppers are roasted and charred
  1. Roast bell peppers. Prepare the bell peppers by slicing off the stem end, removing the seeds and core with a spoon, slice in half and cut each half in three pieces. Remove the stem from the end and slice the end into large chunks. Transfer to a parchment-lined baking sheet and broil for 10 minutes, or until skins are well charred, making sure to rotate halfway through.
  2. Steam the bell peppers. Once roasted and charred, transfer the red bell peppers to a large bowl and cover with plastic wrap to steam for 10 minutes (this makes it easier to remove the skins). At this point, you can either leave the skins on for extra charred flavor or remove them.
  3. Crush the crackers. Place the crackers in a plastic bag, seal tight and gently crush with your hands. Finish crushing the crackers into coarse crumbs by rolling over with a rolling pin.
Ingredients are placed in a food processor and photographed from the top view
Dip is photographed in the food processor after it is processed
  1. Process all the ingredients. In the bowl of a food processor, add the roasted red peppers, walnuts, crackers, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, cumin, salt, and cayenne and process until smooth, about 15-20 seconds, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
  2. Garnish and serve. Transfer to a small bowl, spread it with the back of a spoon, garnish with fresh dill, scallions, sesame seeds, and a drizzle of olive oil. Serve with more crackers, pita or crudites.

Expert Tips:

  • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika. Also, if you can handle the heat, be sure to sprinkle it with Aleppo chili flakes.
  • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
  • Add a clove of garlic: While it is not a traditional ingredient, I sometimes add in a clove of minced garlic into the food processor for additional garlicky flavor as I did in this Vegan Red Pepper Dip recipe.

FAQs

How do you pronounce Muhammara?

Muhammara is the formal pronunciation and it sounds like it is written (though the “h” is slightly sibilant, almost as if you are exhaling through a sore throat). Not so easy to get right! Mm’hamara is a more idiomatic version. It also means roasted or burnt (made red), sharing the same etymological root as the word red (Ahmar).

Is Muhammara Similar To Harissa?

Not quite. Muhammara has a mildly spicy, tangy and sweet flavor and usually served as a dip, spread or a sauce, whereas Harissa is more of condiment that is usually used as a flavoring agent for soups, stews, marinades with rich spicy flavors.

Can I Use Jarred Roasted Red Bell Peppers?

You sure can. Just be sure to drain all the liquid before placing the peppers into the food processor or blender.

Can I Substitute The Pomegranate Molasses?

While it won’t be the same thing, you have a few options when it comes to substituting pomegranate molasses when making this Middle Eastern red pepper dip. You can use balsamic glaze, cranberry juice concentrate, or you can mixa few teaspoons of lemon juice with a tablespoon of honey to get a similar sweet and tangy flavor.

How Many Calories?

This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups and easily serves 6 people. And one serving of it is only 176 calories! When you pair the dip with fresh sliced vegetables, it’s even better for you. So go ahead, eat your veggies!

Can I Make Muhammara Without A Blender/Food Processor?

Yes, you can. You can first start by chopping all of the ingredients finely using a sharp chef’s knife and then mix them in a bowl. Alternatively, you can use a mortar and pestle for a smoother texture.

Is This Recipe Spicy?

The authentic Muhammara is usually mildly spicy. However, the spiciness level depend on the recipe you are using. Usually the spiciness comes from Aleppo pepper (or red pepper flakes). When making muhammara at home, you can easily adjust the amount of red pepper flakes you use according to your preference.

Storage Instructions:

  • To store your roasted bell pepper dip: Place muhammara in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, drizzle it with a thin layer of olive oil to extend its shelf life. Doing so helps prevent air from reaching the roasted red pepper dip and, as a result, keeps it fresh longer.
  • Freezing: If you prefer to store it for a longer period of time, you can freeze this red bell pepper spread. Simply place it in an airtight container (or a freezer bag) remove the air out as much as you can and freeze for up to 2 months.
  • Thawing: Thaw it in the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

Ways to serve this Syrian pepper sauce recipe

There are a number of ways to serve this muhammara dip recipe, such as:

  • Dip: Definitely the most authentic, serve it as a dip with seed crackers, pita bread, or fresh sliced vegetables as a part of your mezze platter.
  • Spread: Slather it on sandwiches, fresh pita bread, wraps, or your morning toast. In my opinion, leftover muhammara makes the best sandwich spread.
  • Pasta Sauce: Prepare your favorite pasta and toss it in a large bowl with the muhammara and a bit of pasta water – no additional cooking required!
  • Pizza Sauce: Replace the tomato sauce on pizza with muhammara – such a fun, Meditteranean twist!
  • Topping: A scoop of muhammara makes an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowls and pairs beautifully with other Mediterranean sauces like tzatziki and hummus.
A bowl of the dip is served with crackers on the side

Other sauce/dip recipes you might also like:

If you try this Muhammara dip recipe or any other Middle Eastern Dip recipes mentioned in this post, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

muhammara dip in a bowl from the top view
Print

Muhammara Recipe

Muhammara is a traditional Syrian red pepper dip made with roasted red peppers, walnuts, and pomegranate molasses. This recipe is easy to make, vegan and gluten-free. Serve as a dip, spread, or even as a pasta sauce. It is deliciously addictive!
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 176kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 red bell peppers medium-sized
  • ½ cup walnuts lightly roasted
  • cup crackers any type of lean cracker can be used*
  • 3 scallions chopped (both green and white parts)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 ½ tablespoons pomegranate molasses*
  • 4 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 ½ teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • To roast the bell peppers: Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper. Slice the tops of the bell peppers and remove the stems from the tops. Using a paring knife (or a spoon) take out the core. Cut the bell pepper into three pieces. Place them on the sheet pan skin side up. 
  • Adjust oven rack 3 to 4 inches from the broiler element (or at the top rack) and heat broiler. Broil until the skin is well charred, 10 minutes. Be sure to rotate the sheet pan halfway through.
  • Place the now-charred peppers in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap and let it steam for 10 minutes. At this point, it is up to you to whether or not remove the skin. If you like the charred flavor, feel free to keep the skins on. If not remove and discard them. You should end up with approximately 1 cup of roasted bell peppers.
  • Place crackers into a ziplock bag and crush them with a rolling pin.
  • Place roasted peppers, walnuts, cracker crumbs, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, ground cumin, salt, and cayenne pepper into the bowl of a foods processor. 
  • Process until pureed, 15-20 seconds scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing. 
  • Transfer to a bowl and serve with crackers, pita bread, and/or crudites.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups of muhammara, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer/dip. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • * If you don’t have crackers on hand, substitute ¼ cups of plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika.

Nutrition

Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 227mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1358IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

This recipe has been adapted (with minor changes) from Vegetables Illustrated (affiliate link).

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/feed/ 17
Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/#comments Sun, 02 Jun 2024 17:12:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25252 If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have…]]>

If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have come to the right place! We have already shared Mexican Street Corn On The Cob, Mexican Street Corn Salad with Avocado, Air Fryer Elotes, Mexican Street Corn Soup and Elote Dip. This Mexican street corn pasta recipe is the newest addition to the collection.

A person is drizzling the elote pasta salad with chili lime dressing.

While I usually make this street corn macaroni salad during the summer months when sweet corn is in season, you can also make it using canned or frozen corn during the cooler months (i.e., during the football season and Cinco de Mayo celebrations). In this post, we cover everything you need to know, including ingredient substitutions, variations, making it with grilled (or sauteed) corn, and expert tips to guide you through the process.

Ingredients for Mexican Pasta Salad with Chili Lime Dressing:

The ingredients list for this pasta corn salad consists of a mix of fresh and store-bought ingredients. You will need two sets of ingredients: First, for the salad and second, for the chili lime dressing: 

For The Salad:

  • Sweet corn on the cob: You can make this salad by cooking the corn on the grill (or using a grill pan), sauteeing it in a skillet, or even cooking it in an air fryer. Our recipe below covers both methods of cooking. However, during the cooler months, when corn is not in season, you can use canned or frozen corn as well. 
  • Oil: You can use any vegetable oil, like olive oil or avocado oil, but unsalted butter would also work.
  • Pasta: When making pasta salads, my favorite pasta shapes are fusilli, farfalle(bow-tie pasta), or cellentani. However, any pasta shape that can hold onto the dressing and mix well with other ingredients in the recipe would work here. If you are following a gluten-free diet, you can also use your favorite gluten-free pasta.
  • Jalapeno pepper: If you like the heat, keep the seeds on. If not, remove them before chopping the pepper into small pieces. Alternatively, you can use bell peppers if you prefer a milder flavor.
  • Onion: I used red onion, but green onions would also work for a lighter flavor. If you have them on hand, my Mexican pickled onions would also be a great addition.
  • Cilantro: Chopped fresh cilantro is a classic ingredient in any Mexican corn recipe, but if you are not a fan, you can use other fresh herbs like parsley or omit using it.
  • Cheese: The authentic elote recipe uses cotija cheese, so we used that, but you can also use queso fresco, shredded cheddar, or even crumbled feta cheese in a pinch.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For The Dressing:

  • Mayonnaise: Use a brand you like or make it at home
  • Sour cream: If you can find it, you can use Mexican crema (aka Mexican sour cream) instead of sour cream. 
  • Seasonings: I used a small amount of chili powder to complement the smoky and charred flavors of the corn, but it is optional. You will also need salt and pepper to season the recipe. If preferred, a cayenne pepper can also be added for some heat.
  • Lime zest and Lime Juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for the freshest flavors.

Optional Additions:

  • Cherry tomatoes: While it is not traditional, a handful of cherry tomatoes would be a lovely addition and make this grilled corn pasta salad a true summer salad. 
  • Garlic: A clove of minced garlic can be added to the creamy dressing, if preferred. If you prefer a lighter (less pungent) alternative, you can use a teaspoon of garlic powder as well.
  • Black Beans: Again, it is not traditional, but adding a can of drained and rinsed black beans would make this even more wholesome and filling.
  • Avocado: If you are an avocado lover, add a cubed ripe avocado to take this  Mexican corn pasta salad to the next level.
  • Grilled chicken: You can turn this sweet corn pasta salad into a delicious summer meal by adding some grilled chicken on top.

How To Make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad?

While I prefer using grilled corn, you can make this street corn macaroni salad by sauteeing corn kernels in a skillet. Below are the steps to making it both ways:

Steps showing how to make elote pasta salad.
  1. Cook corn:
    1. Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
    2. In a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
  2. Cook the pasta: Meanwhile, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. You can reserve some pasta water just in case, but during our recipe testing, we didn’t think that it was necessary. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl. Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
  3. Make the chili lime dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust your seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty!
Steps showing how to assemble Mexican pasta salad with corn recipe.
  1. Assemble the salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Serving Suggestions:

You can serve this grilled corn pasta salad by itself for a delicious pasta lunch or as a side dish with many of your vegetarian and meat dishes. Below are a few of my favorite dishes that you can pair it with:

  • Grilled seafood: The light and smokey flavors of Grilled Shrimp complement the creamy, spicy flavors of the salad. However, if you are feeding a crowd, you can also try my Grilled Sockeye Salmon for a well-rounded meal.
  • Tacos: The robust flavors of Grilled Flank Steak Tacos pair beautifully with this Mexican corn side dish, making it a summer feast. But if I am serving this salad during the cooler months, I pair it with my Slow Cooker Brisket Tacos for a meal that is perfect for a crowd.

Other Mexican recipes you might like:

If you make this Easy Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad recipe, I would appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Mexican street corn pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is bursting with the flavors of fresh summer corn, jalapenos, red onion, and a creamy chili lime dressing. Ready in just 30 minutes, it's the perfect dish for feeding a crowd!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 353kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn:

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil or melted butter
  • 6 ears corn – Husks removed – approximately 4 ½ to 5 cups of corn kernels or frozen or canned corn (see notes below)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Pasta:

  • 8 oz. dry uncooked pasta such as fusilli and farfalle (bowtie pasta)

For The Creamy Dressing:

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Mexican crema
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime (optional)
  • ¼ cup lime juice freshly squeezed from 1 ½ to 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 2 medium jalapeno seeded and sliced/chopped
  • ½ cup red onion chopped finely
  • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped – more to use as garnish
  • ½ cup cotija cheese crumbled

Instructions

  • When it comes to cooking the corn, you have two options:
    Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
    Cook it in a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
  • Cook the pasta: While the corn is cooling, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl.
  • Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
  • Make the Mexican Corn Dressing (Chili Lime Dressing): In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, lime zest, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty.
  • Assemble the roasted corn pasta salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 cups of pasta salad (the shape of the pasta you are using will change the volume), which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • What if I don’t have fresh corn? While I am a big fan of any pasta salad with fresh corn, to make this recipe year-round and still get that sweet corn flavor, you can use canned or frozen corn in place of the fresh. If you decide to do so, you can use:
    • Canned corn: For this recipe, you will need 3 (15 oz) cans of drained and rinsed corn.
    • Frozen corn kernels: You will need three (10 oz) bags. I like this option because the corn kernels are already off the cob, which saves you a step. Even better, there is no need to thaw. Simply add 1-2 minutes extra cooking time when sauteing the frozen corn in a skillet.
  • Be sure to salt the pasta water: Salting the cooking water allows the pasta to absorb some salt as it cooks, enhancing its flavor from the inside out so do not skip this step.
  • Toss while it is still warm: I know it’s tempting to add everything to the bowl and simply drizzle with dressing, but we’ve discovered that tossing the dressing with the corn and pasta while they’re still slightly warm allows them to better absorb the tangy, spicy flavors.
  • Serve it cold or warm: Like most pasta salads, this Mexican corn pasta salad can be served at room temperature, warm or cold. 
  • Make-Ahead: You can make this fresh corn pasta salad a day in advance. Simply assemble the pasta salad, but do not garnish with the cotija cheese or cilantro. Bring it to room temperature and store it in an airtight container. On the day you are going to serve, give it another gentle toss and let it come to room temperature. Add the cotija cheese and cilantro right before serving.
  • To Store Leftovers: Bring your Mexican pasta salad to room temperature and transfer it to an airtight container. As long as it is kept in the fridge, it should be good for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 605mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/feed/ 26
Bread Dipping Oil https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/#comments Sun, 31 Dec 2023 05:01:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25983 So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t…]]>

So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t wait for the olive oil dipping sauce and crusty bread to be placed on your table. It’s restaurant-style at its best (I’m looking at you, Carrabba’s Italian Grill, Bertucci’s, California Pizza Kitchen, Olive Garden, Maggino’s, and Macaroni Grill!) That is this recipe!

With the right mix of bread dipping seasoning and the best olive oil you can find, you can make restaurant-style food in your home kitchen. It serves as the perfect appetizer for those get-togethers with family and friends. Who knew bread and olive oil could taste so good?!

Person holding bread dipped in oil.

Ingredients You Will Need

You need a handful of basic ingredients to make this olive oil dip for bread. The good news is that the recipe itself is so forgiving that if you are missing an ingredient or two, you can easily substitute it with another ingredient. Below is what you’ll need, including the best oil for bread dipping:

Olive oil dipping spices and herbs from the top view.
  • Fresh or Dried Herbs: You will need fresh or dried basil, oregano, thyme, and rosemary to make this olive oil dip. If you decide to use dried herbs, I recommend using half the amount as they tend to be stronger. You can find the correct measurements in the recipe card below.
  • Seasoning and Spices: I know it may seem a bit basic, but the salt and pepper you use make all the difference. If you can, avoid table salt and pre-ground black pepper. Use flaky sea salt or kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper for the best flavor. However, if you do not mind your olive oil bread dip being a little bit spicy, you can also add a pinch of red pepper flakes (or red chili flakes) for some heat.
  • Olive Oil: There are so many olive oils on supermarket shelves these days, and it’s hard to know which one is the best olive oil for dipping bread. A general rule of thumb is to purchase cold-pressed extra virgin olive oil from one supplier or country. These are the fruitiest and most flavorful. Avoid olive oil blends or refined versions. 
  • Garlic: Garlic is a big flavor provider and enhancer in this olive dipping oil recipe. When mixed with spices (or fresh herbs), it infuses oil with additional Mediterranean flavors. However, it is also such a delicate ingredient. Use this list as a guide depending on how strong you want the garlic flavor when whipping up your own garlic bread cheese dip.
    • Minced Fresh Garlic cloves: Using fresh minced garlic will provide a strong garlic flavor. I recommend using this version right before you are going to serve. 
    • Oven Roasted Garlic – Roasted garlic olive oil dip is my absolute favorite! When you roast garlic, it brings out a natural, caramel sweetness that is simply divine. Once the garlic cloves are roasted, you should be able to easily mash them with a fork and mix them in. Use the moment you are going to serve. 
    • Garlic Powder – A good substitute if you want to make olive oil dip ahead. Use 1 teaspoon of garlic powder to replace the fresh.
  • Cheese: Grated Parmesan cheese is a classic ingredient in any restaurant-style Italian dipping oil, but it is an optional ingredient here. You can omit using it if you want to make it vegan or dairy-free. If you do not have Parmesan cheese, you can also use grated Pecorino Romano, cubed feta, or those small mozzarella balls for fresh, cheesy flavor.
  • Acid: Acid gives it a fresh flavor and a nice tang and balances the richness of the olive oil, so don’t skip it! My favorite is freshly squeezed lemon juice. But you can make an olive oil and balsamic vinegar bread dip with a splash of balsamic vinegar as well. If you decide to go with balsamic vinegar, simply use a tablespoon of balsamic in place of freshly squeezed lemon juice.

Optional Ingredients and Substitutions:

  • Olives: While it is not a traditional ingredient, a handful of chopped green or black (such as Kalamata) olives would take this Italian olive oil bread dip up a notch, especially if you are a fan of olives.
  • Italian Seasoning: For those times I am short on time, I keep a jar of homemade Italian seasoning in my pantry so that I can make this in minutes. Below is my go-to Italian seasoning recipe:
    • 1 tablespoon dried basil
    • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
    • ½ tablespoon dried rosemary
    • ½ tablespoon dried thyme
    • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • Shallots: Thinly sliced shallots would be a great substitute for garlic if preferred.
  • Other spices: While the combination of basil, oregano, rosemary, and thyme is often used in Italian restaurants, you can also use other olive oil dipping spices such as paprika, dried dill, dried sage, parsley, and even fennel seeds whenever you want to switch it up.

How to Make Olive Oil Bread Dip?

This olive oil dipping sauce for bread comes together quickly and easily. Below are the steps:

A woman is pouring olive oil to make Italian Bread Dipping oil
  1. Mix the herbs and spices: To make it, mix together dried or fresh rosemary, basil, oregano, thyme, and red pepper flakes (if using) in a shallow bowl. 
  2. Add the olive oil: Pour in the olive oil and lemon juice (or balsamic vinegar). Add in the garlic and parmesan cheese.
  3. Add the spices: Season lightly with salt and pepper. Stir it well to make sure that everything is fully mixed.
  4. Rest (Optional): If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour for the flavors to meld together nicely. 
  5. Serve: Place the bowl of seasoned oil on a large plate with sliced bread around it. Serve!

What Kind of Bread Do You Dip in Olive Oil Bread Dip?

When it comes to choosing the best bread for dipping in oil, you have so many options. While any fresh bread would work, below are a few suggestions:

Garlic bread dipping sauce in a bowl with bread on the side.
  • Italian bread: The classic Italian breads like fresh focaccia and ciabatta would be wonderful to dip into this homemade bread dipping oil.
  • French Bread: With its crispy crust and chewy interior, French baguette is a wonderful option. It also has a long and thin shape, which makes it ideal to slice and dip. Alternatively, if you prefer a soft bread for dipping, you can serve it with storebought or homemade brioche
  • Sourdough Bread: The tangy flavors of sourdough pair beautifully with this garlic bread dip. Plus, its dense texture holds the oil well.
  • Homemade bread: If you do have the time, I highly recommend making my No Knead Bread or Rustic Olive Bread (my personal favorite bread to serve it with.) They are both wonderfully crusty with a hearty texture and robust flavor.
  • Garlic Bread: The rich and savory flavor of garlic bread compliments the taste of herb and oil bread dip. If you need a good recipe, try my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
  • Pita Bread: Widely used in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine, pita’s soft and slightly chewy texture is a good choice for dipping.

How To Make Ahead and Store This Dipping Oil?

While making this Italian dipping sauce takes no more than 5 minutes, with a few adjustments, you can make it ahead and store it for serving later. Here is how I do it: 

  • Make Ahead: If you prefer to make this bread dipping oil a few days ahead, I recommend using dried herbs and spices instead of fresh herbs. Also, it is best to use garlic powder instead of fresh garlic, as when raw garlic sits in oil for an extended period of time, food-borne illness can occur. To make ahead, mix all the ingredients (except cheese) in a jar with a tight-fitting lid and store it at room temperature. Finally, I would add the parmesan cheese right before serving.
  • Storage: If you are making this olive oil dipping recipe with fresh herbs and fresh garlic, it is best to consume it on the day it is made or store it in an airtight container for an additional day or so. However, if you are using dried herbs and garlic powder, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge.

Expert Tips:

There is a reason why this recipe went viral on social media. It is not only super easy to make but also ready in minutes. 

With that being said, during our recipe testing, we learned a few lessons that I’d like to share so that you can have the best olive oil garlic dip for bread on your first try:

  • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
  • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.
  • Serve at room temperature: Olive oil tends to become cloudy and thicken when refrigerated. Therefore to maintain its ideal, fluid consistency and make it easier (and more pleasant) to dip, I recommend serving this bread oil dip at room temperature. 
  • Warm the bread: If you have the time, serve your dipping oil with warm bread as they do in fancy Italian restaurants.
  • Serving children: This easy bread dip is perfect to serve to family and friends, especially during the holiday season. To adjust the recipe for children, omit the red pepper flakes and use less of the overpowering dried herbs like rosemary and thyme. 
  • Dip it “well”: If you let the bread sit in the oil for a good minute or so, it absorbs even more of its delicious flavor.
  • Serving suggestions: While you can serve this bread and olive oil appetizer by themselves, for a special occasion, you can also make it a part of your meat and cheese platter. And if you want to amp up your weeknight dinner, try drizzling it on fish before roasting it in the oven.
  • Salad Dressing: I am pretty sure that you won’t have leftovers, but if you do, this olive oil bread dip makes a great salad dressing.
Person drizzling olive oil spread for bread into a jar.

FAQs

What kind of oil do you dip bread in?

The most commonly used and recommended oil for bread dipping is extra virgin olive oil (EVOO). A good olive oil for bread dipping is one that uses olives from a single origin. EVOO is preferred for its fruity and peppery flavors that pair well with various types of bread. However, while it is not common, you can also use commercially sold infused olive oils, avocado oil, or walnut oil to make this dipping oil for bread.

How to season olive oil for dipping bread?

Seasoning olive oil for dipping bread involves infusing it with a variety of flavors. In most cases, olive oil is infused with a combination of dried or fresh herbs (such as thyme, basil, rosemary, and oregano), spices and seasonings (like red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper) and acid (like lemon juice, red wine or balsamic vinegar.)

How long does bread dipping oil last?

If you make a version of this recipe using dried herbs and seasonings, you can store it for a long time, potentially up to a month. However, if you use fresh ingredients such as fresh garlic and Parmesan cheese, it should be used within 5 days.

Why dip bread in olive oil?

Dipping bread in olive oil is a practice enjoyed in Mediterranean cultures, often a part of the dining experience, reflecting the region’s culinary heritage where olive oil is harvested and produced locally. Additionally, olive oil adds a rich flavor to the bread. The fruity and peppery flavors of oil paired with bread create a delightful experience.

If you try this bread dip recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Bread dipped in olive oil dipping sauce in a person's hand.
Print

Bread Dipping Oil Recipe

Homemade Bread dipping oil just like they do in your favorite Italian restaurant! Made with extra virgin olive oil, dried spices (or fresh herbs), lemon juice, and parmesan cheese, this Italian-restaurant-style olive oil bread dip is guaranteed to impress.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 329kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon dried basil
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ¼ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced or one teaspoon of garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon lemon juice or balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons parmesan cheese shredded (optional)
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place dried basil, thyme, oregano, rosemary, and red pepper flakes in a bowl. Pour in the olive oil. Give it a mix.
  • Add in the garlic, lemon juice, and parmesan cheese. Stir to combine and serve with crusty bread on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This bread dip oli recipe makes a cup of dipping oil, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer with bread on the side. The calorie information below is per serving.
  • Fresh herbs: If you are growing your own herbs, you can use fresh herbs instead of dried herbs following the measurements below. Be sure to chop them before using in the recipe.
    • 1 tablespoon fresh basil
    • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano
    • 1/2 teaspoon fresh thyme
    • 1/4 teaspoon fresh rosemary
  • Storage: If you are making this recipe using dried herbs, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge. If using fresh herbs and fresh garlic, I would recommend storing it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
  • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
  • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.

Nutrition

Calories: 329kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 26g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 126mg | Potassium: 23mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 47IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/feed/ 63
Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/ https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/#comments Mon, 25 Sep 2023 16:31:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20686 I don’t know about you, but I think nothing says fall like the combination of apple, cinnamon, and walnuts. And…]]>

I don’t know about you, but I think nothing says fall like the combination of apple, cinnamon, and walnuts. And this Apple and Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe is probably the easiest way to fill your house with the smells of fall. It tastes like apple pie, but it is healthier.

If you are like me, a huge fan of apples and cinnamon, be sure to also check out our Apple Almond Flour Muffins, Apple Roses, and Dairy-Free Apple Crisp recipes.

Apple and cinnamon oatmeal garnished with toppings from the top view.

Whether you are a morning person like me or someone who prefers to sleep until the last minute, I am pretty sure the unmistakably autumn aroma of this homemade apple oatmeal cooking on the stovetop will lure even the sleepiest member of your family out of bed.

It’s an easy way to set the mood for the fall season, and similar to my other breakfast bowl recipes, it’s ready in only 15 minutes. Bonus – it’s also vegan, dairy-free, paleo-friendly, and gluten-free!

Ingredients for Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal:

You probably already have a handful of ingredients you need to make this Cinnamon Apple Oatmeal in your pantry. Below is everything you need:

Ingredients for homemade apple cinnamon oatmeal from the top view.
  • Oil: We use oil to sautee apples and cinnamon before adding in the oats and milk. We use coconut oil, but avocado oil, butter, or clarified butter (also known as ghee) would also work in this apple oatmeal breakfast recipe.
  • Fresh Apples: We use Honeycrisp apples, but any other variety of apples, like Fuji, Pink Lady, Gala, and Granny Smith Apples, would also work. Peeling them is optional, but we recommend cutting them into 1-inch cubes. You can also use two different kinds of apples if you want to take your apple pie oatmeal recipe to the next level.
  • Spices: You’ll need ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg.
  • Nuts: We are using unsalted walnuts, but pecans or almonds would also work well in this recipe. If you have the time, we recommend toasting your nuts for a few minutes to enhance their flavors.
  • Rolled Oats: Of all the different kinds of oats, rolled oats (also called old-fashioned oats) are probably the easiest to find, and therefore, it is what we are using in this apple oatmeal breakfast. Use gluten-free oats if you are following a gluten-free diet. If you are new to the world of oats and want to know more about them, be sure to check out our detailed articles on Rolled Oats vs. Steel-Cut Oats and Quick Oats vs. Rolled Oats.
  • Milk: We used unsweetened almond milk, but any dairy or non-dairy milk (such as coconut milk, oat milk, or regular milk) would work in this recipe. You can also make Almond Milk from Almond Butter in a pinch. Either way, we recommend using sugar-free milk to keep it healthy.
  • Superfoods: To boost protein and to keep you full for longer, we used a tablespoon of chia seeds. However, you can also add ground flax seeds, hemp seeds, and even your favorite protein powder to up the nutrition of this apple oats recipe.
  • Sweetener: We wanted this homemade apple oatmeal recipe to be sugar-free, so instead of adding sugar to the mixture, we opted for a drizzle of maple syrup in the end. However, if you prefer it to be sweeter, you can use brown sugar, coconut sugar, honey, or regular granulated sugar and add it to the oatmeal mixture as you are cooking it.
  • Optional Toppings: We sprinkled our apple and cinnamon oatmeal with diced apples, walnuts, and pomegranate arils for a pop of color. However, when it comes to toppings, the sky is the limit. Feel free to add a tablespoon of almond or peanut butter (a great way to add some protein to the recipe), raisins (or cranberries), and even a dollop of vanilla yogurt.

Optional Add-ins and Substitutions:

  • Vanilla Extract: A splash of vanilla extract is an easy way to enhance the sweet flavors of the apples.
  • Apple Juice: For a richer apple taste, consider replacing some of the milk with apple juice. A good place to start is 1/4 cup unsweetened apple juice with 1 1/2 cups of milk.
  • Applesauce: While we prefer this recipe with diced and sauteed apples, you can still make this apple cinnamon breakfast with applesauce instead. Simply skip the sauteing of the apples and add 1/2 cup unsweetened applesauce into the oat mixture.
  • Cranberry Sauce: Making this easy oatmeal recipe during the holiday season? A dollop of leftover maple cranberry sauce is a delicious way to sweeten it.
  • Spices: While we opted for the basic cinnamon and nutmeg, you can experiment with adding other spices, such as ground cardamom and apple spice.
  • Salt: It is optional, but as it is with any sweet recipe, adding a pinch of salt to the oatmeal mixture will help enhance and balance the sweet flavor of apples.
  • Cooking liquid: Alternatively, you can make this apple cinnamon oats recipe using water instead of milk. If you decide to do so, please keep in mind that it will be less creamy.

How To Make Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal on Stove Top?

The steps to making this easy apple cinnamon oatmeal recipe are twofold, and it only takes 15 minutes from start to finish. Below are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make cinnamon apple oatmeal step by step.
  1. Saute apples and spices: Start by heating coconut oil in a small saucepan over medium-high heat. Add apples and sauté, stirring frequently, for 2-3 minutes. Add the ground cinnamon and nutmeg and cook for 10 more seconds.
  2. Make oatmeal: Add the nuts, rolled oats, milk, and chia seeds (if using). Stir to combine and cook, keeping a close eye on it and stirring occasionally until thickened for 8-10 minutes.
  3. Serve with toppings: Ladle into bowls, and garnish with fresh diced apples (or other fruits like pomegranate seeds), more nuts, and a drizzle of maple syrup. If preferred, you can sprinkle it with more ground cinnamon and an extra splash of milk.

On a side note, we based the recipe for this healthy apple cinnamon oatmeal on my Oatmeal with Almond Milk and Chia Seeds recipe, which happens to be one of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living. It is a great recipe to show you how to make oatmeal on the stovetop if you are new to making oatmeal for breakfast or in need of a works-every-time recipe.

How To Meal Prep, Store, and Reheat?

One of the reasons why we love making this healthy apple cinnamon oatmeal is that it is a great meal prep-friendly breakfast recipe that you can make over the weekend and enjoy in the next few days. Perfect for busy mornings! Here is how we do it:

  • Meal Prep: Make the apple oatmeal recipe as written but refrain from adding the toppings. Divide it among four mason jars and let it cool on the counter. Once fully cooled, cover it tightly with a lid and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, be sure to top it off with your favorite toppings.
  • Storing leftovers: Store the leftover cinnamon apple oatmeal in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: While you can enjoy this recipe warm, cold, or at room temperature, we like to reheat it in the microwave if we are serving it on a crisp fall morning. To do so, transfer the apple porridge into a bowl, add a splash of milk (or water), and give it a stir. Place in the microwave and heat it in 30-second increments stirring every time until it is warmed to your liking.
Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal being drizzled with maple syrup.

How to make this Oatmeal recipe in the microwave?

If you’d rather make this homemade cinnamon apple oatmeal in the microwave, simply:

  • Start with cooking the apples: Sprinkle cubed apples with cinnamon and place in a large microwave-safe bowl (it should be large enough to make the whole oatmeal)
  • Add the liquid and nuts: Add in the almond milk (or water) and nuts and cook on high for 3-5 minutes, stopping and stirring every minute or so until it reaches your desired consistency.
  • Assemble: Drizzle with maple syrup and add the toppings. Give it a taste and add more if you like.

Expert Tips for the Best Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal

While the recipe below, as written, is pretty straightforward, there are a few things to pay attention to make flavors shine through when making this easy breakfast bowl:

  • Cooking apples for oatmeal: Do not skip the sauteeing of the apples, as it is key to bringing out their sweetness and making this a sugar-free apple cinnamon oatmeal. Additionally, cooking them ensures they soften, resulting in a more delightful texture in your oatmeal.
  • Experiment with different types of apples: While we do not think that there is such a thing as “the best apple for oatmeal,” we recommend experimenting with two (or more) different kinds of apples when making this recipe. Each type offers its unique flavor and texture, enriching the overall flavor and texture of your oatmeal.
  • Enhance and toast your spices: Consider experimenting with other spices such as cloves, star anise, ginger, apple pie spice, and allspice. However, we recommend using a very small amount to start with and then adjusting it according to your tastebuds. Furthermore, we recommend taking the time to toast your spices with the apples for a few minutes to enhance their flavors.

FAQs

How to cook apples for oatmeal?

To soften apples, use a teaspoon of coconut oil and saute them in the warm melted oil for a few minutes while stirring them often. As they cook, they release some of their juices and become sweeter and softer, making it a perfect pairing for this cinnamon oatmeal.

How to boost the nutrition of apple oatmeal?

To make this apple cinnamon porridge recipe even more nutritious, you can add a scoop of ground flaxseeds for additional fiber, a scoop of collagen for additional protein, and use less (or no sugar) in the recipe.

Is apple cinnamon oatmeal healthy?

Yes, it is, especially when made without using additional sugars. According to Healthline, when consumed on a regular basis, apples lower your chance of developing cancer, diabetes, and heart disease. Additionally, ground cinnamon is packed with antioxidants and anti-inflammatory properties, which help lower the risk of disease.

How much cinnamon to add to oatmeal?

You Might Also Like:

If you enjoyed this healthy apple breakfast porridge, then you will love our collection of oatmeal and apple recipes. Below are a few that we hand-picked for you:

Other Oatmeal Recipes:

Other Autumn-Inspired Apple Recipes:

If you try this Homemade Apple Oatmeal recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Apple cinnamon oatmeal in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe

This Homemade Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal is an autumn-inspired twist on plain oatmeal. Rolled oats, apples, and cinnamon simmered in almond milk with a touch of maple syrup make a delicious and healthy breakfast ready in less than 15 minutes.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 454kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon coconut oil avocado oil or ghee would also work
  • 1 large apple or 2 small apples, cut into small chunks
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • Pinch of ground nutmeg
  • ¼ cup chopped pecans or walnuts, plus more as topping
  • 1 cup rolled oats – Not quick cooking {I used Trader Joe's gluten free brand oats}
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk
  • 1 teaspoon chia seeds optional
  • 1 tablespoon pure maple syrup plus more to finish
  • ¼ cup pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Heat coconut oil in a medium sized saucepan over medium heat.
  • Add in the apples and saute for 2-3 minutes. Stir in the cinnamon and nutmeg.
  • Add in the pecans, oats, almond milk, and chia seeds (if using). Give it a stir and let it cook until thickened for about 7-10 minutes, stirring constantly during the cooking process.
  • Ladle into bowls and top them off with pomegranate seeds (or other fruit), nuts, more apples, and a slight sprinkle of ground cinnamon. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 cups of apple oatmeal, which is ideal for serving two people. You can multiply the recipe if you are serving a crowd. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the calories coming from the listed toppings.
  • Optional Add-ins: You can easily customize this cinnamon apple recipe according to your taste buds. A few of our favorite ways to do it are as follows:
    • Use two different types of apples
    • Add a splash of vanilla extract
    • Up the nutrition by adding other superfoods such as ground flaxseeds and hempseeds
    • Top it off with a dollop of creamy peanut butter or yogurt for additional protein
  • Meal Prep: Make the recipe as written but refrain from adding the toppings. Divide it among four mason jars and let it cool on the counter. Once fully cooled, cover it tightly with a lid and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, top it off with your favorite toppings.
  • Storing leftovers: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: While you can enjoy this recipe warm, cold, or at room temperature, I like to reheat it in the microwave if I am serving it on a crisp fall morning. To do so, transfer the apple porridge into a bowl, add a splash of milk (or water), and give it a stir. Place in the microwave and heat it in 30-second increments stirring every time until it is warmed to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 454kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 330mg | Potassium: 403mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 368mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/feed/ 38
Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/ https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/#comments Sun, 02 Apr 2023 19:16:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10022 The combination of spinach and peanut butter may sound unusual, but the creamy nuttiness of the peanut butter perfectly complements…]]>

The combination of spinach and peanut butter may sound unusual, but the creamy nuttiness of the peanut butter perfectly complements the earthy flavor of the fresh spinach. Plus, adding a frozen banana and almond milk makes this spinach banana smoothie a naturally sweet and healthy drink that is worthy of your weekly smoothie rotation. 

If you enjoy smoothies like this Peanut Butter Spinach Smoothie, you might also like our Turmeric Green Smoothie and Vegan Banana Smoothie, which are both packed with a variety of nutrients for a satisfying breakfast. And if you need more smoothie recipe inspiration, be sure to browse our collection of superfood smoothies.

Spinach peanut butter banana smoothie garnished with banana slices from the front view.

Ingredients

The ingredient list of this peanut butter banana spinach smoothie is short and sweet, with plenty of substitutions and optional add-ins to make it even more nutritious. Below is everything you need to know to make this healthy green smoothie your own:

Ingredients for green monster smoothie on a marble backdrop.
  • Frozen banana: I usually freeze ripe bananas when they start changing their colors. If all you have is a fresh banana (and want your smoothie to be super cold), then just add in a cup of ice cubes.
  • Natural Peanut Butter: I prefer unsalted and unsweetened creamy peanut butter to avoid added sugars and excessive sodium. However, you can also use other nut butter options like almond butter or cashew butter. And if you have nut allergies, you can substitute peanut butter with a seed butter of your choice.
  • Non-Dairy Milk: I prefer dairy free unsweetened almond milk (or vanilla almond milk), but any kind of milk would work here. Soy milk, oat milk, and coconut milk would all work. 
  • Fresh Spinach Leaves: I recommend using prewashed and rinsed baby spinach for ease of use. While I prefer fresh spinach for its milder flavor, you can make it with frozen spinach as well.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins: 

  • Yogurt: I sometimes add in a few tablespoons of whole milk yogurt for probiotics. Both plain Greek yogurt and vanilla yogurt would work here.
  • Superfoods: If you stock your pantry with superfoods such as chia seeds, ground flax seeds (aka flaxseed meal), and hemp seeds, you can add them in. Additionally, you can add in a few tablespoons of your favorite protein powder and powdered collagen for an extra boost.
  • Other leafy greens: Use other leafy greens like kale (or blanched kale) and spring mix instead of raw spinach. Kale peanut butter smoothie is just as delicious but tastes rather earthy. You can also use swiss chard and collard greens, but I would recommend blanching them first to get rid of some of their bitterness.
  • Sweeteners: If you like your smoothie more on the sweeter side, adding a few tablespoons of maple syrup, a few pitted dates or some honey (non-vegan option) gives is a nice sweetness.
  • Spices: A pinch of cinnamon or nutmeg is an easy way to give in a nice kick of flavor.

How To Make Peanut Butter Banana Spinach Smoothie?

The best part of this spinach breakfast smoothie recipe is that it takes just a few minutes to make. Simply:

A collage of photos showing how to make spinach banana peanut butter smoothie recipe.
  1. Blend: Put spinach leaves, peanut butter, milk of your choice, and frozen banana (and all the optional add-ins) into a blender and blend until creamy and smooth. 
  2. Serve: Pour into a few glasses (or mason jars) and serve right away.

How To Make Ahead and Store Spinach Banana Smoothie?

Whether you make green smoothies like this for breakfast or enjoy them as a post-workout snack, with just a few minutes of advance prep, you can have them in minutes. Here is how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: Portion out all the ingredients (except peanut butter) and place them into a Ziplock bag. Store in the fridge (or freezer). When ready to serve, dump everything in your blender along with peanut butter and blend until smooth.
  • Storing leftovers: I think this peanut butter spinach banana smoothie recipe is best on the day that it is made. However, you can place the leftovers into a mason jar, put the lid on and store it in the fridge for up to 1 day. Just be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Expert Tips:

  • Adjust the consistency: If you prefer your spinach banana peanut butter smoothie to have a thicker consistency add more frozen bananas along with a handful of ice cubes. And if you want it to have a thinner consistency, simply add more milk to the blender.
  • Use a high powered blender: If you make green monster smoothies like this one on the regular, I highly recommend investing in a high-speed blender. While you can make a good smoothie in any blender, a high-powered one makes it so much easier, especially when blending frozen fruit and leafy greens.
  • Chill your glass: I love serving this in the warmer summer months by the pool as an afternoon snack in a cold glass as an alternative to ice cream. I pour it into chilled glasses and serve it with a few slices of bananas and then let everyone know that I have a delicious green spinach milkshake! It disappears in minutes!
A person pouring smoothie with spinach and banana in a glass.

FAQs:

Why is spinach good in smoothies?

Adding a handful of spinach into your smoothie is a great idea because spinach is a low calorie, nutrient dense food that is packed with fiber, vitamins, and minerals. It also has a mild taste that does not take over the whole smoothie and blends well with the rest of the ingredients.

Are smoothies good for losing weight?

They can be as long as they are consumed in smaller portions and without extra added sugars.

Is peanut butter good for protein smoothies?

Yes, because peanut butter is a great source of plant-based protein, with 8 grams of protein per 2 tablespoons (source.) Adding a few tablespoons of peanut butter is an easy way to get a portion of your daily protein in.

Other Smoothie Recipes You Might Like:

It is no secret that green smoothies like this Spinach Banana Smoothie have a long list of benefits and incorporating them in your daily diet (especially as a substitute for your sweet cravings), will help you feel energized and full. If you agree, here are a few other smoothie recipes you might like:

If you try this healthy peanut butter green smoothie recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Peanut butter and spinach smoothie in a glass garnished with banana slices.
Print

Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie Recipe

Treat yourself to a refreshing Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie, crafted with creamy peanut butter, vibrant fresh spinach and a frozen ripe banana. This naturally sweetened green smoothie is ready in 5 minutes and great as a healthy breakfast or post work-out fuel.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 257kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups baby spinach leaves
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk or any other regular or plant based milk
  • 1 large banana frozen*
  • 3 tablespoons peanut butter creamy and unsalted natural peanut butter
  • 1 tablespoon ground flaxseeds optional – plus more as garnish

Instructions

  • Place all the ingredients into a blender. Blend in high speed until smooth.
  • Pour into glasses and sprinkle with ground flaxseeds (and/or chia seeds.) Serve right away.

Notes

  • Banana: If you do not have a frozen banana, you can use a ripe one and add 1 cup of ice cubes into the blender.
  • Optional sweeteners: If you want your peanut butter smoothie to be sweeter, you can add in a few tablespoons of maple syrup, honey or a few pitted dates and blend until smooth.
  • Consistency: For a thicker smoothie, use an additional half a banana and for a thinner one, use more almond milk.
  • To Make Ahead: Portion all the ingredients (except peanut butter) and place them into a plastic bag. Store in the fridge (or freezer). When ready to serve, dump everything in your blender along with peanut butter and blend until smooth.
  • Storing leftovers: I think this peanut butter spinach banana smoothie recipe is best on the day that it is made. However, you can place the leftovers into a mason jar, put the lid on and store it in the fridge for up to 1 day. Just be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 257kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 354mg | Potassium: 541mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 2851IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 353mg | Iron: 2mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/feed/ 8
Quick Brioche Waffles https://foolproofliving.com/quick-brioche-waffles/ https://foolproofliving.com/quick-brioche-waffles/#comments Sat, 04 Feb 2023 15:41:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10362 Who doesn’t love to start a slow weekend morning with a warm, sweet, and decadent breakfast? If you’re looking for…]]>

Who doesn’t love to start a slow weekend morning with a warm, sweet, and decadent breakfast? If you’re looking for more indulge-worthy breakfast recipes, try my Overnight Belgian Waffles and this Gluten Free Waffle Recipe with Almond Flour. If you have some extra brioche on hand, use it to make this delicious Brioche French Toast Casserole

Brioche waffles layered with fruit from the front view.

Ingredients

We’re keeping the ingredient list short and simple for this recipe, making it easy to whip up these quick brioche waffles whenever the mood strikes. Top them off with fresh fruit and maple syrup for the perfect Sunday morning breakfast. Here’s what you’ll need:

  • For this brioche waffle recipe, gather a loaf of brioche bread, whole milk, eggs, salt, vanilla extract, and maple syrup (optional). 
  • As optional toppings, use maple syrup, chopped seasonal fruit, and optional confectioner’s sugar. 

Ingredient Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

If you don’t have all the ingredients on hand, you may not have to take a trip to the store. You can easily substitute for the bread and a few other ingredients, so feel free to be resourceful and make it your own. Here are my recommendations: 

  • Bread: The soft, fluffy texture and lightness of French brioche makes for a mouth-watering recipe, but don’t stress if your local store doesn’t carry it or if you don’t have the ingredients to make it at home. A great substitute is Challah bread, which is similar in texture and flavor. If you’d like to make Challah from scratch, try this Challah Bread Recipe
  • Milk: While I love the richness that whole milk gives this recipe, you can also use skim milk for an option that is lower in fat and calories. 
  • Sweetener: I personally find it sufficient to drizzle maple syrup over my waffles to give them some sweetness, but you can also add additional sweetener to your milk and egg mixture. I recommend adding a bit of coconut sugar, maple syrup, regular sugar, or brown sugar into the milk mixture as you’re whisking in the rest of the ingredients. 

How to Make Brioche Waffles 

This fast brioche recipe comes together in about 25 minutes, meaning you can spend less time cooking and cleaning and more time indulging. Here’s how to make them:  

  1. Slice the bread: Cut your brioche loaf into approximately 1 ½ inch slices. Set them aside. 
  2. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 200 degrees F. You can keep your cooked brioche bread waffles in the oven to keep warm while you cook the rest of the waffles. 
  3. Preheat the waffle iron: Preheat your waffle iron according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 
  4. Make the milk mixture: Add the milk, eggs, vanilla extract, salt, and (optional) maple syrup to a bowl and whisk until combined. Dip each slice of brioche into the mixture for 2-3 seconds per side. Transfer them to a baking sheet. 
  5. Cook the waffles: Spray the waffle iron with vegetable oil spray and cook each piece of brioche according to your iron’s instructions. Make sure to spray the iron before adding another slice. 
  6. Transfer to the oven: Transfer each cooked waffle onto a baking sheet and keep them in the warmed oven as you cook the rest of the waffles. Continue until all your slices are cooked. 
  7. Serve: Top each waffle with chopped fresh fruit and a drizzle of maple syrup. For additional sweetness, dust the waffles with confectioner’s sugar. 
A slice of brioche bread waffle topped off with fruit from the top view.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat 

The great thing about this fast brioche recipe is that you can make extra waffles to store and enjoy for breakfast throughout the week. All you have to do is reheat them, add your toppings of choice, and enjoy! Here are a few storage tips: 

  • Store: If you think you’ll consume the extra waffles within a few days, let them cool to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll keep in the fridge for up to four days.
  • Freeze: I like to freeze my extras, so I have a quick waffle to enjoy whenever I have a busy morning. To freeze, allow them to come to room temperature before placing them in a freezer-safe, airtight container (ensure it’s airtight to prevent freezer burn). You can store them in the freezer for up to a month. 
  • Reheat: To reheat the waffles from the fridge or the freezer, pop them in the toaster or toaster oven until they’re warm.

How to Serve

This simple recipe pairs beautifully with a variety of toppings, allowing you and your family to customize the flavors to your liking. Top it off with fresh fruit and a dusting of cinnamon for a lighter option, or go crazy with the toppings to make it more indulgent. 

For a classic, subtly sweet waffle topping, add a dollop of this Whipped Maple Cream. Or, to truly indulge a sweet tooth, generously spread some Healthy Chocolate Frosting on your brioche waffles recipe. If a fruity flavor profile with natural flavoring is more your speed, add a drizzle of Pureed Blueberries

FAQs

What is the difference between a Belgian waffle and a regular waffle?

Belgian waffles and regular “American” waffles mainly differ in size and texture. Belgian waffles tend to be thick and fluffy, as they’re usually made with a yeasted dough that puffs up when cooked, while regular waffles are thin and dense. Belgian waffles are also sometimes coated with Belgian pearl sugar (sometimes referred to as Liege waffles), giving them a crispy exterior with a nice crunch.

Can you freeze brioche waffles?

Yes, you can! To freeze brioche bread waffles, allow them to come to room temperature before placing them in a freezer-safe, airtight container. Store them in the freezer for up to a month.

Other Quick Breakfast Recipes You Might Like

They say breakfast is the most important meal of the day, so why not make it delicious? Whether you’re in the mood for something savory or sweet, you can find lots of breakfast inspiration here on the blog. Check out the links below for some ideas:

If you try this Waffle Brioche recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Brioche waffle topped off with fresh fruit on a plate with a fork on the side.
Print

Brioche Waffles Recipe

These quick brioche waffles are a great alternative to waffles made with batter, especially when you are short on time. It is made by lightly dipping slices of brioche in an egg and milk mixture and cooking them in a waffle iron. Simply make a batch eat it right away, or freeze it for later.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 Slices
Calories 236kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 loaf Brioche bread
  • ¾ cup whole milk
  • 3 large eggs
  • Pinch salt
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup optional
  • vegetable spray
  • ½ cup seasonal fruit chopped
  • Confectioners’ sugar (optional)

Instructions

  • Slice Brioche into 1½ inch thick slices. Set aside.
  • Pre-heat your oven to 200 degrees.
  • Pre-heat your waffle iron.
  • Whisk together the milk, eggs, salt, vanilla extract, and maple syrup (if using). Dip each slice into the mixture for 2-3 seconds on both sides and then transfer it to a baking sheet.
  • Spray the waffle iron with vegetable spray. Cook each slice in your waffle iron according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Make sure to spray again after each slice to prevent bread from sticking.
  • Transfer cooked waffles onto a rimmed baking sheet and keep them warm in the oven as you cook the rest of the slices.
  • To serve: Top them off with chopped fruit. Drizzle them with maple syrup. If preferred, sprinkle it with some confectioners’ sugar.

Video

Notes

  • Store: If you think you’ll consume the extra waffles within a few days, let them cool to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll keep in the fridge for up to four days.
  • Freeze: I like to freeze my extra waffles, so I have one ready to go whenever I’m craving a quick, yummy breakfast. To freeze, allow them to come to room temperature before placing them in a freezer-safe, airtight container (make sure it’s airtight to prevent freezer burn). You can store them in the freezer for up to a month.
  • Reheat: To reheat the waffles from the fridge or the freezer, simply pop them in the toaster or toaster oven until they’re warm.

Nutrition

Calories: 236kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 136mg | Sodium: 228mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 535IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/quick-brioche-waffles/feed/ 14
Savory Steel Cut Oatmeal https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-savory-steel-cut-oats/ https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-savory-steel-cut-oats/#comments Tue, 24 Jan 2023 19:05:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3022 Wondering what to make with that jar of steel cut oats that is hiding in the dark corners of your…]]>

Wondering what to make with that jar of steel cut oats that is hiding in the dark corners of your pantry? Well, you have come to the right place! In addition to this savory steel cut oatmeal recipe, we have crockpot steel cut oats and pressure cooker steel cut oatmeal to help you use this versatile ingredient with only a few minutes of hands-on time.

New to cooking steel-cut oats? Learn why I choose steel-cut oats over any other type of oats for my morning breakfast in this Rolled vs. Steel Cut Oats article.

A bowl of oats topped with an egg, mushrooms, and spinach from the top view.

Ingredients

To make this tasty, savory oatmeal recipe, you will need two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for an oatmeal recipe with spinach and mushrooms from the top view.
  • Steel-cut oats: Gather vegetable stock, steel cut oats (aka Irish Oats) and kosher salt. 
  • Vegetable toppings: For the savory vegetable topping, you will need olive oil, ground cumin, ground paprika, Baby Bella mushrooms, baby spinach, a fresh garlic clove, kosher salt, and ground black pepper. 
  • Optional toppings: While they are optional, you can also top it off with fried eggs, hard-boiled eggs, soft-boiled eggs, or even poached eggs for some extra protein. I think savory oatmeal with an egg on top is a tasty, high-protein meal that happens to be one of my favorite steel cut oats dinner recipes. However, if you prefer this recipe to be vegan, you can omit it.

Substitutions & Variations

  • Quick cooking steel cut oats: Steel-cut oats do take a while to cook, so to shorten the cooking time we are soaking them overnight. However, if you can find quick cooking steel cut oats (such as Bob’s Red Mills brand – affiliate link) in your grocery store, you can skip the overnight soaking and make this creamy savory steel cut oatmeal recipe in the morning in just about 5-7 minutes. Simply, skip steps one and two of the recipe and simply follow the directions on the package to boil the quick oats with the vegetable stock (or water.) 
  • Oil: Replace the olive oil with unsalted butter, avocado oil, or coconut oil. 
  • Cooking liquid: Water or chicken broth can be used in place of vegetable stock. Use homemade chicken stock to make my savory oats, but a storebought version would also work.
  • Kale: Amongst all types of kale, my favorite ones to use are curly kale or lacinato kale as a substitution for baby spinach in this savory breakfast recipe. 
  • Fresh herbs: Alternatively, in place of greens, you can also use fresh herbs such as parsley and basil.
  • Optional mix-ins: With endless mix-in options, this steel cut oatmeal will never get boring. Add shredded cheddar cheese, parmesan cheese, nutritional yeast, sun-dried tomatoes, pine nuts, chia seeds, peppers, or fresh avocado to your bowl of savory oatmeal. 

How to Make This Recipe?

Making this savory steel cut oats dish could not be easier. Here are the steps:

A person showing how to make Irish oats on the stove from the top view.
  1. Soak the steel cut oats: Bring the vegetable stock to a boil in a small saucepan. Turn the heat off and stir in the oats and salt. Cover it with a tight-fitting lid and let the oats sit overnight. 
A person showing how to sauté mushrooms and spinach from the top view.
  1. Make the toppings: Start by heating the olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Stir in the ground cumin and paprika and cook for about a minute. Add the sliced Baby Bella mushrooms and cook for about 4-5 minutes or until they are softened and have released some of their juices. Stir in the spinach and cook until it wilts. Add the minced garlic (if using) and season it with salt and pepper. Set it aside while you finish making the steel cut oatmeal. 
  2. Prepare the additional toppings (optional): If you are planning to make your savory oats with egg on top, this is the best time to cook them. I like to fry mine with a bit of butter, but you can cook your eggs any way you like.
A person stirring oats in a pot from the top view.
  1. Prepare the steel-cut oatmeal: Place the pot of steel cut oats and broth back on the stove and stir it frequently while heating over medium-high heat. The steel cut oatmeal will get thicker and creamier as it cooks. If it is too thick, feel free to add ¼ cup of water (or vegetable broth) to make it the perfect consistency. Be sure to taste the oatmeal and add more seasonings if necessary. 
A bowl of oats topped with an egg and veggies from the top view.
  1. Assemble the savory steel cut oats: Scoop the steel-cut oatmeal into a bowl and top it with the mushroom spinach topping. If you are using eggs, add one (or more) on top of the warm oats. Sprinkle with a pinch of salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes, if using.

How to Store Leftovers?

Go ahead and put this savory steel cut oatmeal recipe on your weekly meal prep list because it can easily be made ahead and put together in a pinch when you are short on time. This is how I make ahead, store and reheat:

  • Make ahead: You can prep the steel cut oatmeal and savory toppings and store them in separate air-tight containers in the fridge for up to 4 days. When you are ready to serve, you can reheat (following the instructions below) each component and assemble it as directed. 
  • Storing leftovers: If possible, I recommend storing the savory oatmeal and vegetable toppings in separate airtight containers. Ensure the oats and toppings are at room temperature, not hot, and then place them in an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: To reheat the cooked oats, microwave in 30-second increments, stirring after heating, until they are warm. You can also heat it on the stovetop in a small pot. Simply heat it over medium heat and stir frequently until the oats are warm, which will take about 3-5 minutes. You may need to add an extra splash of vegetable stock, coconut milk, or water to thin out the oats a little bit. 

Variations- Other Topping Ideas

I love to serve my family a big bowl of savory steel cut oatmeal because it offers numerous health benefits and, with a little bit of creativity, they can customize it to their liking. Simply take the basic recipe below and change it up with just a few additions and ingredient swaps. Get creative with whatever vegetables, spices, and herbs you have in your pantry and fridge. Think of this savory steel cut oatmeal recipe as a blank canvas!

Here are a few of my other favorite ways to make this savory steel cut oatmeal recipe:

  • Utilize your leftovers: Try using leftover sauteed veggies or roasted veggies as your savory oatmeal toppings. Baked shiitake mushrooms, sauteed asparagus, or roasted butternut squash make fantastic toppings for this dish. Using leftovers will also save you time since your toppings are already prepared! 
  • Create Indian steel cut oats: Indian-inspired steel cut oats make for an incredible breakfast, lunch, or dinner. Mix a teaspoon of my golden paste into the cooked steel cut oats, then top it with some roasted chickpeas for an amazing Indian-cuisine inspired bowl of steel-cut oats. Alternatively, if you do not have the golden paste, you can use a touch of curry powder to make this recipe one of the best savory breakfasts you can make in minutes.
  • Asian savory steel cut oatmeal: Make the steel cut oatmeal topping with shiitake mushrooms, baby spinach, and sesame oil. Add a splash of soy sauce and garnish the oatmeal with edamame or steamed broccoli
  • Mediterranean steel cut oats: Make a Mediterranean bowl of steel cut oats simply by topping it with my Turkish White Bean Salad. And, if you want to take it a step further and make this savory dish umami-rich, you can mix vegetable broth (or water) with a tablespoon of tomato paste. 
  • Mexican steel cut oats: Add a little ground cumin, coriander, and red chili powder to make a flavorful, Mexican-style steel-cut oats breakfast. Taking inspiration from my Mexican Quinoa recipe, you can make a warm topping by sauteing some onions, tomatoes, bell pepper, jalapenos, and black beans to use as a topping. Some fresh avocado, a squeeze of lime juice, or a few tablespoons of pickled Mexican red onion are also great oatmeal toppings.
A bowl with grains, eggs, and veggies with a fork from the top view.

Other Ways of Cooking Savory Steel Cut Oats

I like to make overnight steel-cut oats as it is a very hands-off recipe. However, you can make steel cut oats in different ways. Here are a few other methods you may want to try:

Stove Top

Bring your vegetable broth to a boil, then add the steel-cut oats. Let the oats simmer over medium-low heat for about 30 minutes. The liquid will be completely absorbed, and the oats will be tender and soft. Be sure to keep a close eye on it and stir it a few times during cooking.

Slow Cooker

To cook steel cut oats in the crockpot, add vegetable stock, steel-cut oats, and salt to a slow cooker. Cover and cook over low heat for 4-5 hours. If you need to know more about this cooking method, check out my detailed recipe for crockpot steel cut oatmeal.

Instant Pot

Stir the vegetable stock, steel-cut oats, and salt in the bowl of your pressure cooker. Cover, seal and cook on high pressure for 4 minutes. Let the pressure release naturally for 10 minutes, open the lid, give it a stir, and ladle it into bowls. For more information on cooking oats in a pressure cooker, check out my Instant Pot Steel Cut Oats recipe.

FAQs

Can I use rolled oats instead of steel cut oats in this recipe?

You can use this recipe to make savory oatmeal with rolled oats with a few adjustments. Simply bring the vegetable broth to a boil and then add 1 cup of rolled oats. Simmer the rolled oats for 5-7 minutes or until creamy, stirring frequently while cooking. While that is cooking, make the savory oatmeal toppings and assemble the savory oatmeal as directed in the instructions.

Can I use quick cooking steel cut oats in this recipe?

Yes, you can use quick cooking steel cut oats. However, since they cook much faster there is no need to let the quick-cooking oats sit overnight. Simply follow these preparation instructions on the packaging to cook them.

Are steel cut oats good for weight loss?

Studies have shown that steel-cut oats may be good for weight loss mainly because, as a whole, grain oats are packed with fiber. Therefore, including oats in your daily diet may contribute to the feeling of fullness, which in turn helps you with consuming fewer calories.

Other Oatmeal Breakfasts You Might Like

If you are a fan of recipes with steel cut oats, chances are you often enjoy a bowl of oatmeal in the morning. Below are a few more oatmeal recipes you might like:

If you try this Savory Steel Cut Oatmeal recipe, please take a minute to leave a comment or even a picture below. It is great to hear how much you love the recipes on my site and will help others who may be planning to make the recipe. And, if you took any pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories. Enjoy!

Savory steel cut oatmeal topped off with veggies and a fried egg on top.
Print

Savory Steel Cut Oats Recipe

This Savory Steel Cut Oatmeal is packed with fresh veggies and fragrant spices for a hearty, filling meal that will fuel your day. Customize it with add-ins and toppings to accommodate your family's preferences and serve it for an easy breakfast, lunch, or dinner.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Overnight Soak 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 20 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 417kcal

Ingredients

For The Steel Cut Oats

  • 2 cups vegetable stock or water plus a bit more if needed
  • 1 cup steel cut oats
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Topping:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil or unsalted butter
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon ground paprika
  • 8 ounces baby bella mushrooms sliced / or any other one of your favorite mushrooms
  • 5 oz. fresh baby spinach leaves
  • 1 clove garlic minced or ½ teaspoon garlic powder – optional
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 large eggs – fried or soft boiled – optional
  • 1/8 teaspoon Red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • To soak steel cut oats: Place vegetable stock (or water) in a medium saucepan with a lid. Bring it to a boil. Off the heat, stir in the steel-cut oats and salt. Cover it with the lid and let it sit on the kitchen counter overnight.
  • To make the veggie topping: In the morning, before cooking the steel-cut oatmeal, prepare the topping. To do so, heat oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add spices and cook them for a minute or so.
  • Add the sliced mushrooms and cook, stirring often, until they are fully cooked, for about 6-8 minutes.
  • Add the baby spinach and cook until wilted, for 3-4 minutes.
  • If using, add the garlic and saute for 30 seconds. Finish it off with salt and pepper and set it aside.
  • To prepare the savory steel-cut oatmeal: Put the saucepan back on the stove and heat it over medium heat. Stir it frequently using a wooden spoon to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pan. As it cooks, the excess liquid will evaporate, and the steel-cut oatmeal will form a thicker and creamier texture. If it gets too thick, feel free to add ¼ cup of water (or vegetable broth) to thin it out. This process happens in 3-4 minutes, so do not leave site of it.
  • Taste steel-cut oatmeal for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • When ready to serve, ladle steel-cut oatmeal into a bowl. Top it off with cooked mushrooms and spinach. If using, add a fried egg on top.
  • Finish it off with salt and pepper and red pepper flakes. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Serving size: This recipe yields about 2 to 2 1/4 cups of cooked steel cut oatmeal. I listed it as 2 servings (as shown in the photos), but if you keep the portions smaller, it could be served to 4 people. 
  • Steel cut oats: If you are following a gluten-free diet, be sure to purchase gluten-free certified steel cut oats.
  • Make-Ahead Instructions: You can prep the steel cut oatmeal and the toppings and store them in separate air-tight containers in the fridge for up to 4 days. When you are ready to serve, you can reheat each component and assemble it as directed. 
  • Storing Leftovers: I recommend storing the savory oatmeal and vegetable toppings in separate airtight containers if you can. Bring them to room temperature and store them in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: To reheat, microwave the steel-cut oatmeal in 30-second increments, stirring after heating, until they are warm. You can also heat it on the stovetop in a small pot. Simply heat it over medium heat and stir frequently until the oats are warm, which will take about 3-5 minutes. You may need to add an extra splash of vegetable stock, coconut milk, or water to thin out the oats a little bit.
  • Nutrition Information: The calorie and nutrition information below does not include the optional egg on top.

Nutrition

Calories: 417kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 647mg | Potassium: 931mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 6934IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 139mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-savory-steel-cut-oats/feed/ 12
Sweet Potato Noodles https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-noodle-pad-thai/ https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-noodle-pad-thai/#comments Wed, 28 Sep 2022 01:51:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=12110 What are Sweet Potato Noodles? Sweet potato noodles are a type of “noodle” made from spiralizing sweet potatoes into a…]]>

What are Sweet Potato Noodles?

Sweet potato noodles are a type of “noodle” made from spiralizing sweet potatoes into a shape similar to spaghetti or angel hair pasta. You can buy spiralized sweet potato noodles at the grocery store or make them at home by feeding skinned sweet potatoes through a spiralizer.

A pot of noodles made from sweet potatoes from the top view.

The sweet potato spiral noodles we are featuring in this recipe are not the same as Korean sweet potato glass noodles (also known as japchae noodles, Korean potato noodles, and Korean vermicelli potato noodles). Korean sweet potato noodles consist of sweet potato starch and water, whereas my noodles come from whole sweet potatoes.

I use a spiralizer to make the sweet potato spaghetti used in this recipe. However, you can find out below how to make spiralized sweet potato noodles without a spiralizer.

How are they Made?

If you’ve ever wondered, “How are sweet potato noodles made?” you’ll be happy to see that they are super easy to make. Yes, you do need a spiralizer (I use this Paderno Spiralizer – affiliate link), but it is a rather inexpensive one-time investment.

Once you have your equipment ready, spiralizing sweet potatoes requires the following three steps:

A person showing how to peel and cut a sweet potato from the top view.
  1. Cut and peel the sweet potatoes: Use a sharp knife to cut off both ends of the sweet potato. Then, peel off the skin using a vegetable peeler. Once peeled, cut the sweet potatoes in half, right down the middle.
  2. Align the sweet potato: Secure your spiralizer on the countertop to keep it from moving (for instance, my spiralizer has suction cups on its bottom to help keep it in place). Take one of your sweet potato halves, line it up with the center prong on your spiralizer, and press it firmly into the prong. Then, press the other end of the spiralizer to secure the sweet potato from both sides.
A person showing how to spiral a sweet potato from the top view.
  1. Spiralize: Once you secure the sweet potato half, spin the side handle of the spiralizer clockwise while applying pressure. Continue turning the handle until you spiralize the entire sweet potato half. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have spiralized all of your sweet potatoes.

What if I Don’t Have a Spiralizer?

If you don’t have a spiralizer, don’t worry! You can also prepare them using a julienne peeler (affiliate link). Just keep in mind that this method will likely require more physical effort. Also, because the noodles will turn out thinner, they will take less time to cook than spiralized vegetable noodles.

To reduce preparation time, you can also buy pre-prepared sweet potato noodles at the grocery store in lieu of using a spiralizer.

Recipe Ingredients

To make this recipe with sweet potato noodles, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for sauce for sweet potato noodles from the top view.

For the sauce, you’ll need unsweetened, smooth peanut butter, tamari (or soy sauce), sesame oil, maple syrup, freshly grated ginger, minced garlic, fresh lime juice, salt, and vegetable stock.

Ingredients for a bowl of noodles made from sweet potatoes from the top view.

For the noodles, you’ll need olive oil, onion, red or yellow bell pepper, sweet potatoes, vegetable stock, edamame, and fresh cilantro.

You can also garnish them with sesame seeds, green onions, and lightly salted peanuts (roughly chopped).

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

There are countless ways to customize this gluten free sweet potato noodles recipe. These delicious add-ins will take your dish to the next level, from a pop of spice to natural oils.

  • Tamari: I use tamari in my noodle dish to make it gluten-free. However, soy sauce works just as well.
  • Nut butter: Don’t want to use peanut butter in your pasta sauce? Good news: Almond butter makes an excellent substitute for this sweet potato pasta.
  • Oil: I use sesame oil to give my potato and noodles a nutty Asian flavor. However, this recipe also works with light-flavored olive oil or avocado oil.
  • Add mushrooms: Few things amplify the taste of these tender veggie noodles more than earthy, buttery mushrooms. Add shiitake mushrooms to your noodles at the start of the recipe, and the mushrooms will come out beautifully sautéed. Or, add Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms just before serving your dish for extra smoky flavor.
  • Chili paste: Add a zing of sweet-and-spicy flavor by adding one teaspoon of chili paste to your sweet potato spaghetti recipe.

How to Cook?

Cooking sweet potato noodles is a simple, healthy way to treat yourself to full-bodied Asian flavor. You can have this delicious dish from spiralizer to table in just half an hour.

A person showing how to cook noodles made from yams.
  1. Spiralize the sweet potatoes: Trim, peel, and cut your sweet potatoes to prepare them for spiralization. Then, attach the sweet potato halves to your spiralizer, one by one, and turn the handle clockwise until you spiralize each half. Continue spiralizing your sweet potato halves until you have enough noodles.
  2. Mix the dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the peanut butter, tamari, sesame oil, maple syrup, ginger, minced garlic, lime juice, salt, and vegetable stock. Refrigerate the mixture until you are ready to use it.
  3. Saute the veggies: Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onion and pepper to the skillet and cook them, frequently stirring, until they turn translucent (5-7 minutes).
  4. Cook the noodles: Add the spiralized sweet potatoes and vegetable stock to the skillet. Using a pair of kitchen tongs, cook sweet potato noodles tossing gently every few minutes until they are al dente and lose most of their volume, for 6-7 minutes.
A person adding dressing and toppings to sweet potato spirals.
  1. Add the dressing: Pour the dressing over the noodles and toss the mixture until the noodles have an equal layer of dressing. Cook the coated noodles until they are warm (2-3 minutes).
  2. Stir in the edamame: Take the noodles off the heat, then stir in the edamame and chopped cilantro.
  3. Serve: Divide the noodles among four bowls and garnish each dish with sesame seeds, green onions, and peanuts. Serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store

Preparing sweet potato zoodles is a great way to fit meal prep into your schedule. Whether you serve this dish at a party or pack it for an easy lunch, these storage tips are just what you need.

  • Make ahead: To make sweet potato noodles ahead of time, spiralize your sweet potatoes up to 3-4 days in advance. Just be sure to remove air from the noodles’ container during storage. I recommend storing them in an airtight jar or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. You can also prepare the dressing up to two days in advance, storing it in an airtight container. Finally, you may also chop your vegetables on the day you plan to serve your noodles dish to eliminate prep time.
  • Store: To store leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.

How to Serve?

As the main dish: Whether you serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold, this dish is a delicious lunch or dinner that is perfect when you are in need of a light meal with lots of flavors.

As a tasty side: This recipe also makes a delicious side dish alongside dozens of meat dishes with a similar flavor profile. Serve your vegetable noodles with Chicken Teriyaki Stir Fry or Crock Pot Butter Chicken for a bold and saucy pair. Or, try my Cauliflower Curry or Thai Lemongrass Chicken for meals as vibrant as they are easy.

A bowl of yam noodles with edamame and cilantro from the top view.

FAQs

Where to buy sweet potato noodles?

Most grocery stores sell sweet potato noodles in their refrigerated section, often near other frozen pasta.

Are sweet potato noodles healthy?

Yes! Sweet potato noodles contain high amounts of vitamins, antioxidants, and fiber, making them a popular choice among health-conscious eaters.

What are sweet potato noodles made of?

They consist of peeled sweet potatoes cut into shape using a spiralizer. However, the Korean version of this dish—japchae noodles—is made from sweet potato starch and water.

Is sweet potato noodles carb?

Yes, sweet potato noodles contain carbs. Generally, 1 cup of sweet potato noodles has 23 g. of carbs.

What do sweet potato noodles taste like?

Though incredibly mild, sweet potato noodles have a hint of the sweet, nutty flavor typical among sweet potatoes. They also have a tender, slightly chewy texture that tastes heavenly in pasta dishes.

Other Sweet Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

Want even more sweet potatoes on your table? The following recipes are some of the best ways to incorporate this festive (and healthy!) vegetable into your cooking.

If you try this recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of sweet potato noodles garnished with cilantro.
Print

Sweet Potato Noodles Recipe

This easy Sweet Potato Noodles recipe is loaded with Asian-inspired flavors, like ginger, edamame and cilantro, and is tossed in a sweet and savory peanut sauce. Throw this easy dish together for a satisfying lunch or a light, nutritious dinner
Course Main Dish
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 Servings
Calories 291kcal

Ingredients

For the dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons unsweetened and smooth peanut butter
  • 3 tablespoons tamari*
  • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon freshly grated ginger
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 3 tablespoons vegetable stock more as needed

For the Noodles:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 small onion chopped
  • 1 red or yellow bell pepper seeded and sliced thinly
  • 2 medium-size sweet potatoes peeled and spiralized (as seen in the photos) – You should have 5-6 cups of “noodles”
  • ¼ cup vegetable stock
  • ½ cup edamame
  • 3 tablespoons chopped cilantro

As Garnish:

  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
  • 1-2 stalks green onions both white and green parts chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lightly salted peanuts coarsely chopped

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together all the dressing ingredients in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate until you are ready to use it.
  • To cook the sweet potato noodles: Heat olive oil in a large skillet in medium heat. Add in the onion and pepper. Cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 5-7 minutes.
  • Add in the sweet potato noodles and vegetable stock and cook, stirring frequently, for 6-7 minutes.
  • Pour the dressing over the noodles and give it a large stir, making sure that the noodles are coated with the dressing. Cook 2-3 minutes until it is warm.
  • Off the heat, stir in the edamame and chopped cilantro.
  • To serve, divide the noodles in 4 bowls and garnish each one with sesame seeds, green onions, and peanuts.
  • Serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • If you are not gluten-sensitive, you can use soy sauce instead of tamari, but make sure to taste the dressing before adding more salt to it. 
  • To Make ahead: To make this dish ahead of time, spiralize your sweet potatoes up to 3-4 days in advance. Just be sure to remove air from the noodles’ container during storage. I recommend storing them in an airtight jar or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. You can also prepare the dressing up to two days in advance, storing it in an airtight container. Finally, you may also chop your vegetables on the day you plan to serve your noodles dish to eliminate prep time.
  • Store: To store leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 291kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 1289mg | Potassium: 708mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 17068IU | Vitamin C: 47mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 2mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-noodle-pad-thai/feed/ 44
Potato Salad with Capers https://foolproofliving.com/the-ultimate-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/the-ultimate-potato-salad/#comments Tue, 16 Aug 2022 20:18:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3278 Inspired by my deviled egg potato salad and red potato salad, this potato salad recipe with capers is just as…]]>

Inspired by my deviled egg potato salad and red potato salad, this potato salad recipe with capers is just as tangy and comforting. It comes together in a flash and can be served in a number of ways.

And if you happen to have extra potatoes on hand, give these muffin tin potatoes or this mashed potato casserole a try.

potato salad recipe with capers on a plate from the top view

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

Nothing says potato salad more to me than a drool-worthy dressing to toss it in. I know you will love it because:

  • Update on classic potato salad. This one comes with a world of fixings, including capers, pickles, onions, and hard-boiled eggs.
  • Serving is versatile. You can serve this summer potato salad recipe warm, room temperature or cold. The choice is yours!
  • Super customizable. With plenty of ingredient swaps and substitutions, you can really make this potato salad your own.

Ingredients

This easy potato salad recipe is broken down into three parts – potatoes, dressing and the salad ingredients.

  • Potatoes: You will need Yukon Gold potatoes, kosher salt, and water.
ingredients for salad dressing for potatoes salad from the top view
  • Salad Dressing: Gather mayonnaise (or veganaise), whole grain Dijon mustard, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper.
ingredients for lemon potato salad in bowls from the top view
  • Other potato salad ingredients: Prepare dill pickles, red onion, scallions, capers, hard-boiled eggs, and fresh parsley.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Potatoes: Yellow potatoes, such as Yukon gold, give an extra buttery consistency. But waxy potatoes, such as red potatoes, fingerlings, baby potatoes, or new potatoes, will all work. Just note cooking times will vary.
  • Acid: Replace the lemon juice with white wine vinegar or red wine vinegar instead.
  • Pickles: Feel free to use dill pickles, sweet pickles, bread and butter pickles, garlic pickles or extra briny cornichons.
  • Olives: Up the salty bite a bit more with the addition of sliced green olives or black olives.
  • Onions: I love the mix of sweet red onion and scallions, but chives and spring onions are a great combo too.
  • Vegan: Use veganaise and omit the hard-boiled eggs.
  • Fresh Herbs: Toss in a handful of fresh dill or replace the parsley altogether.

How to Make

This homemade potato salad recipe is so easy to make and takes under 30 minutes to put together. Here’s how to do it:

person showing how to boil potatoes and make dressing for warm potato salad from the top view
  1. Boil Potatoes: In a large pot, cover potatoes with cold water by one inch and liberally salt the water. Set the pot over medium-high heat. Bring the potatoes to a boil, then turn down the heat to medium. Cook until the potatoes are slightly tender when pierced with a sharp knife, 15-20 minutes. Drain the potatoes in a colander. Leave aside to cool slightly.
  2. Make the dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, mustard, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper until combined.
showing how to assemble potato salad with lemon from the top view
  1. Make the salad: Once the potatoes are cool enough to handle, cut them into small cubes or thin rounds. Place potatoes in a large bowl, then stir in the pickles, red onion, scallions, capers, eggs, and chopped parsley. Pour the dressing over the mixture and give it a gentle toss. Serve right away or store in the fridge for later.

What to Serve it With?

This homemade potato salad is a crowd pleaser and the ultimate summer side dish that goes with just about anything. Some of my favorite pairings include:

How to Store

This creamy potato salad will last for days in the fridge. Here’s how to do it:

  • To Store Leftovers: Transfer to an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Make Ahead: If looking to get ahead for a party or BBQ, potato salad will keep well in the fridge, tightly wrapped in plastic wrap, in your serving bowl of choice for 2-3 days. Please note that the potatoes will absorb the dressing over time. If you prefer a looser potato salad come serving time, make an extra batch of dressing.
a bowl of salad from the top with a spoon on the side

Expert Tips

  • Cooking time will vary based on the size of the potatoes. Start checking at the 15-minute mark after boiling.
  • Make the dressing and prep the rest of the ingredients while the potatoes boil. This cuts down on prep time.
  • Thoroughly drain the potatoes in a colander. This further allows excess water to drain and evaporate.
  • Toss the potatoes with the dressing while they are still warm. This ensures that the dressing is thoroughly absorbed by the potatoes, making them extra delicious and creamy.
  • New to cooking hard-boiled eggs? My friend Beth’s article on How to Make Hard Boiled Eggs is my go-to guide for perfectly hard-boiled eggs every time.

FAQs

What type of potato is best for potato salad?

Avoid starchy potatoes, like russet potatoes, and stick to buttery, thin-skinned potatoes such as Yukon Gold or Red Potatoes.

How long will potato salad last?

Potato salad will last in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

Is it better to boil or steam potatoes for potato salad?

I find it much easier to boil potatoes for potato salad. Steaming potatoes requires much more attention since the water evaporates from the pan during cooking.

Should you let potatoes cool before making potato salad?

Potatoes should be cool yet slightly warm to the touch when tossed with the dressing. This way, the potatoes absorb more of all those delicious flavors.

Why does my potato salad get watery?

When you boil potatoes, they absorb much of the boiling water. It’s important to leave them to cool slightly and dry out to allow the excess water to evaporate.

Do you salt the water when boiling potatoes for potato salad?

Yes, a healthy pinch of salt is key. The general rule of thumb I follow is 1 Tablespoon Kosher salt for every 1 quart of water.

Is it better to peel potatoes before boiling for potato salad?

I prefer to leave the skins on entirely, for both texture and color. That being said, if you prefer to peel them, boil the whole, unpeeled potatoes first, then peel them.

Can you freeze potato salad?

I do not recommend freezing potato salad. The texture of both the potatoes and dressing will change once thawed from frozen.

Other BBQ Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Potato Salad with Capers recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe was originally published in 2014 and was called The Ultimate Potato Salad. In August 2022, it has been updated with new photos and helpful information with no changes made to the originally published recipe.

potato salad with capers and parsley in a bowl from the top view
Print

Potato Salad with Capers Recipe

This Potato Salad with Capers recipe is what I'd like to call "The Ultimate Potato Salad recipe". Creamy potatoes mixed in with capers, cornichons, onions, and eggs, it offers the perfect balance of creamy, salty, and earthy flavors.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 340kcal

Ingredients

For the potatoes:

  • 2 pounds Yukon Gold potatoes washed thoroughly and unpeeled
  • Kosher Salt

For the dressing:

  • 3/4 cup mayonnaise or veganese
  • 3 tablespoons whole grain mustard
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed through a garlic press
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

For the salad:

  • 1/4 cup dill pickles chopped
  • 1 red onion (a small one – approximately 1/2 cup chopped onions)
  • 5 stalks scallions both green and white parts, chopped
  • 1/2 cup capers drained
  • 2 hard-boiled eggs chopped
  • 1/4 cup Italian parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Boil Potatoes: In a large pot, cover potatoes with cold water by one inch and liberally salt the water. Bring the potatoes to a boil over medium-high heat, then turn down the heat to medium and continue to cook until potatoes are barely tender when pierced with a knife, 15-20 minutes. Drain the potatoes in a colander and set them aside to cool.
  • Make the dressing: In a small mixing bowl, whisk together the mayonnaise, mustard, lemon juice, garlic, salt and black pepper.
  • Make the salad: Cut the now-cooled potatoes into small cubes. Place them in a large mixing bowl. Add the pickles, red onion, scallions, capers, eggs, and chopped parsley. Pour the dressing over the mixture and give it a gentle stir. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Serve warm, room temperature, or cold.

Video

Notes

  • To Store Leftovers place them to an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Make Ahead: If you are looking to get ahead for a party, this salad will keep well in the fridge, tightly wrapped in plastic wrap for 2-3 days. Please note that the potatoes will absorb the dressing over time. If you prefer a looser potato salad come serving time, make an extra batch of dressing.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing this potato salad recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 340kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 1122mg | Potassium: 735mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 421IU | Vitamin C: 38mg | Calcium: 56mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/the-ultimate-potato-salad/feed/ 41
Greek Yogurt Parfait https://foolproofliving.com/layered-yogurt-parfait/ https://foolproofliving.com/layered-yogurt-parfait/#comments Wed, 06 Jul 2022 00:34:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15540 Need more ideas to make your mornings easier? Overnight Oats with Steel Cut Oats, Overnight Muesli with Yogurt, Yogurt Overnight…]]>

Need more ideas to make your mornings easier? Overnight Oats with Steel Cut Oats, Overnight Muesli with Yogurt, Yogurt Overnight Oats, and Chia Seed Oatmeal are all great options to make the most important meal of the day not only quick and easy but filling and nutritious. 

fruit and yogurt parfait garnished with mint from the front view

Why Should You Make This Recipe? 

Nothing beats fresh fruit, thick creamy yogurt, and crunchy granola. This layered fruit and yogurt parfait recipe will rival any Starbucks or Chick fil A yogurt parfait and save you money too. 

Need more convincing? Here are a few other reasons to give it a try:

  • Made with 3 ingredients. Fresh fruit, crunchy granola, and Greek yogurt are all you need for this easy healthy breakfast parfait that you can make in minutes.
  • It stores well so you can make ahead for a grab-and-go breakfast.
  • Easy to customize with whatever you have on hand. If you don’t have fresh fruit, use frozen fruit. Got a bit of a sweet craving? Add honey or maple syrup. The options are endless for this healthy Greek yogurt parfait recipe.

Ingredients 

Since this greek yogurt parfait only has 3 ingredients (not counting the optional sweetener), I recommend using the best ingredients you can find.

ingredients for yogurt parfait recipe from the top view
  • Greek Yogurt: I prefer whole milk plain yogurt for its thicker consistency and no added sugar, but any of your favorite types of yogurt will work as well. Vanilla Greek yogurt (I make mine at home), honey yogurt, and even vegan choices such as coconut or almond milk yogurt would work well in this recipe.
  • Berries/Fruit: I used a combination of fresh strawberries and blueberries, but any of your favorite fruit combinations (including my Breakfast Fruit Salad) would work. No fresh fruit? Use frozen fruit! Frozen berries work perfectly in this recipe.
  • Granola: I might be biased but I think the best granola for yogurt parfait is homemade granola as and it can be made with less sugar (than most store-bought brands). However, in a crunch, you can use storebought. If you are in need of a good granola recipe, feel free to check out my Chunky Granola. Or, if you are after high protein yogurt breakfast, try my Quinoa Crunch for added plant-based protein.

Substitutions and Optional Additions 

The best part about a DIY parfait is making it your own. Here are a few great choices to get you started. 

  • Sweetener: Add a natural sweetener like a drizzle of honey, maple syrup, or agave to your homemade parfait. Or, try incorporating my Honey Syrup, Blueberry Puree, or fresh raspberry sauce to flavor the yogurt. 
  • Protein Powder: Add a scoop of your favorite whey or plant-based protein powder for a high-protein snack. 
  • Superfoods: Incorporate ½ teaspoon of chia seeds or hemp seeds per serving to make it even more nutritious.
  • Nut Butters: Add a tablespoon of almond butter or peanut butter for healthy fats and protein. Though I recommend checking the labels for added sugars.
  • Nuts & Seeds: Want to cut down on carbs? Switch out the granola for a handful of nuts and seeds. However, if you prefer a low-calorie yogurt parfait with no added sugar omit the granola and the nuts.
  • Chocolate Chips: If you can’t deny your sweet tooth and want to splurge, chocolate chips may just satisfy your craving.

How To Make A Parfait With Greek Yogurt

Making this yogurt and fruit parfait cannot be easier. Follow these steps for a quick breakfast that is not only delicious but also visually impressive:

person whisking yogurt with honey in a bowl
  1. Add the sweetener (optional): If using, whisk together your choice of sweetener with your favorite yogurt until it is completely whipped and creamy.
  2. Build the yogurt parfait layers: Spoon half of the yogurt at the bottom of a bowl, tall glasses, or mason jars. Layer with half of the fruit and half of the granola. Carefully spoon the remaining yogurt mixture into the glass and add the rest of the fruit and granola to the top. 
photos showing how to layer parfait with berries and granola
  1. Garnish: If you prefer, finish it with a drizzle of honey (or maple syrup), more fresh fruit, and granola on top. Serve immediately or store in the refrigerator for later.

How To Make Ahead And Store 

Got some leftovers or want to make it ahead? No problem! Follow the tips below to enjoy these healthy yogurt parfaits for days:

Make-Ahead Instructions:

Making this layered parfait recipe as a part of your weekly meal plan is a breeze, but there are a few things to keep in mind:

  1. Serve granola on the side: I recommend leaving the granola out when layering the parfait because as it sits it will lose its crunchy texture and become soggy. Let’s face it, no one likes soggy granola. Instead, serve it on the side and add the granola into the parfait right before serving.
  2. Use mason jars: I think 8 oz. mason jars – affiliate link – (mostly used for canning) are ideal for the perfectly portioned and grab-and-go homemade yogurt parfait. Simply layer yogurt and fruit, tighten it with the lid and store it in the fridge.

Make-ahead yogurt parfait should keep fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days.

To Store Leftovers:

If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container (such as a mason jar) and keep them in the fridge for up to 4 days. Be sure to serve them with extra fruit and granola on the side.

person drizzling strawberry blueberry granola parfait with honey

Expert Tips 

Here are a few quick tips for the best yogurt fruit granola parfait that you can make over and over again.

  • Whisk yogurt: It might sound like an extra step, but taking a few minutes to whisk the yogurt in a bowl makes it even more creamy and easy to layer. 
  • Make it your own: The thing I love about this simple recipe is that it is so easy to change it up with whatever you have on hand. Use these measurements as a place to start and make it your own with different fruit, yogurt, and granola.
  • When serving for breakfast or brunch: If I am serving this for friends, I make sure to take my time in layering, use colorful fresh fruit and always garnish it with fresh mint. People go crazy as soon as they see pretty parfaits layered with colorful fruit in jars.

FAQs

What is the difference between yogurt and parfait?

Yogurt is a thick milk-based product that is sold plain or with other flavorings such as fruit and sweetener. A parfait, on the other hand, is a layered dessert typically consisting of yogurt, fresh or frozen fruit and berries, ice cream, and whipped topping. 

What is in a yogurt parfait?

Most Yogurt parfait recipes are made with plain or flavored yogurt, fresh fruit (mostly berries), and granola made with ground oats, nuts, and seeds.

What is the best yogurt for a parfait?

The best yogurt for parfait is plain Greek yogurt as it has a thick and creamy consistency that is ideal for a yogurt parfait recipe. Plus, it is made without the addition of sugar making this breakfast a healthy option. However, you can use any type of yogurt (including plant-based options) to make this easy breakfast recipe.

Is yogurt parfait healthy?

It is no secret that Greek Yogurt and fresh fruit are good for you and are recommended as a part of a healthy diet. However, it is best to be conservative when adding granola to the parfait as it is usually made with added sugars.

How many calories in a yogurt parfait?

One serving of this Greek Yogurt Parfait recipe is 298 calories.

Other Easy Breakfast Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you are a fan of Chic Fil A’s Yogurt Parfait or Pioneer Women’s Yogurt Parfait with honey, I hope you give my version a try. I know those are favored by many people but my version here is just as easy and delicious.

And if you have leftover yogurt, try your hand at making my Frozen Yogurt Bark as well. It’s a healthy dessert that is a great alternative to ice cream.

If you try this Fruit and Yogurt Parfait recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Print

Greek Yogurt Parfait Recipe

This Fruit and Yogurt Parfait recipe is made by layering yogurt with granola and fruit. It is quick and easy to put together. It also stores well so it is a great breakfast recipe to make it a part of your weekly meal prep.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 servings
Calories 298kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup optional – more as a drizzle
  • ¾ cup plain Greek yogurt
  • ¼ cup berries or any other fruit cut into small 1-inch chunks
  • ¼ cup homemade granola or store bought granola

Instructions

  • If using a sweetener, mix it with greek yogurt in a small bowl until fully combined.
  • To layer the yogurt parfait, place half of the yogurt at the bottom of a mason jar or a bowl. Top it off with half of the fruit and half of the granola. Cover them with the rest of the yogurt and top it off with the rest of the fruit and granola.
  • If preferred, finish it off with a drizzle of honey. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • This recipe can be multiplied as many times as you want.
  • Make Ahead: If you are making these granola parfaits as a part of your meal plan I would recommend against using the granola as a part of the layers. Instead, just layer them with fruit and yogurt and serve the granola on the side to add in later to prevent it from getting soggy. I also recommend using 8 oz. mason jars as they are not only ideal in size but also great for serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 298kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 78mg | Potassium: 185mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 122IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 225mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/layered-yogurt-parfait/feed/ 4
Almond Flour Bread (Quick Low Carb Recipe) https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-bread/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-bread/#comments Tue, 28 Jun 2022 21:21:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27214 If you have been following me for a while you know that I love baking with almond flour. As a…]]>

If you have been following me for a while you know that I love baking with almond flour. As a matter of fact, I have a collection of almond flour recipes that are some of the most liked, shared, and baked recipes on this blog.

Today’s recipe, Almond Flour Bread, a savory quick bread recipe, is yet another addition to my collection. Though I have to admit, it is one that took quite a bit of trial and error to be good enough to be published.

Healthy Almond Flour Bread sliced and photographed from the front view.

I believe the reason why it took so long is that I was after a savory almond loaf bread recipe that tasted more like bread than an almond cake and none of the recipes I tried gave me one that I would use to make a sandwich. Until now.

Low Carb Flourless Almond Flour Bread Recipe sliced and photographed from the top view.

The trick is all about the eggs. Rather than using whole eggs, I replaced a few of them with egg whites (removed egg yolks) and it made all the difference in texture. The exceptional flavor was just the added bonus. Believe it or not, I had four slices as soon as the bread came out of the oven!

Just like my Almond Flour Waffle and Almond Flour Biscuits recipe, this easy almond flour bread is healthy, light, low carb and with the right adjustments, Paleo, Keto Diet friendly, and Whole30, too. So I guess those four slices were totally worth it – no guilt included!

If you are thinking like, how the heck do you make homemade bread using almond flour, read on. I promise it is easier (and more delicious) than you think.

Almond Bread Ingredients

Like it is in many baked goods, this gluten-free almond flour bread recipe has 2 sets of ingredients; wet and dry ingredients:

Wet Ingredients:

The wet ingredients are photographed from the top view.
  • Vegetable Oil – I used grapeseed oil, but any mild-flavored oil, such as extra virgin olive oil, coconut oil, or avocado oil, will do.
  • Large Eggs, plus Egg Whites – The combination of whole eggs and egg whites create a light-textured bread.
  • Apple Cider Vinegar – Subtly sweet, the acid in ACV activates the baking soda and brings balance to the flavor.
  • Liquid Sweetener – Although completely optional, any of your favorite liquid sweeteners will do. I prefer maple syrup, but you can use honey or agave if that’s all you have on hand.

Dry Ingredients:

Dry ingredients are photographed from the top view.
  • Blanched Almond Flour – I highly recommend blanched almond flour (made from ground almonds) over almond meal (which is almond flour with the skins still on) more so for its light golden color, but you can use them both interchangeably. If you have the time you can easily make your own almond flour (made with grinding almonds in a high-powered blender (like Vitamix) or a food processor).
    If you want to make this recipe using almond flour, my favorite brand is Blue Diamond (affiliate link). I love that it tastes great and has almost no odor, which is usually an issue with most packaged almond flours sold in stores.
    If you want to use almond meal (affiliate link), my favorite brand is Barney. 
  • Ground Flaxseeds – There are two options – regular Flaxseed or Golden Flaxseed. Either one can be used, however, regular flax seeds will give you specks throughout your gluten-free loaf, whereas golden flaxseed creates a more neutral-colored bread.
  • Baking Soda – The leavening agent reacts with the apple cider vinegar, giving you both lift and that beautiful golden hue.
  • Baking Powder – A bit more lift never hurt any low carb gluten-free bread recipe. To make this a paleo bread, you can use 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar as a substitute for 1 teaspoon of baking powder.
  • Fine Sea Salt – I specify fine sea salt since it dissolves easily into the batter. If you do not have fine sea salt on hand, you can also use the same amount of kosher salt.
Wet ingredients are photographed from the top view while a woman is whisking them.

How to make bread with almond flour

The batter is photographed while a woman is mixing it.
homemade low carb bread batter is placed in a loaf pan and photographed from the top view.

To make this Gluten-Free Almond Flour Bread, simply:

  1. Whisk together the wet ingredients. Add the oil, eggs, egg whites, apple cider vinegar and liquid sweetener to a medium bowl. Thoroughly mix all the ingredients together until smooth and emulsified (see PRO TIP below).
  2. Mix together the dry ingredients. In a larger bowl, add the almond flour, flaxseed, baking soda, baking powder, and salt. Mix together until well combined and create a slight well in the center.
  3. Pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients. Fold together gently until just combined. Transfer to the prepared loaf pan (more on that below) and smooth the top.
  4. Bake. For 35 minutes, or until the loaf is golden brown, springs back to the touch and a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean. Allow to cool for 10 minutes in the pan, then transfer to a cooling rack to cool completely.
  5. Serve. Slice and serve. A few of my favorite options include slicing the loaf like sandwich bread and placing a few slices of roasted turkey, lettuce, and mashed avocado between two slices.

How To Serve:

Go ahead, slice your almond flour loaf and enjoy it right away. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Make avocado toast: Spread it with a thick layer of my avocado dressing and sprinkle it with bagel seasoning for a low carb breakfast.
  • Use it to make a sandwich: Layer it with baked turkey bacon, tomato, and lettuce for a keto BLT.
  • Serve in place of toast with a layer of cream cheese (or peanut butter) and your favorite jam.

Expert Tips:

  • Mix it well: Thoroughly mixing the wet ingredients until emulsified is important as it helps the bread bake to the right texture. When the wet ingredients become one smooth mixture and slightly thickened, you know it’s ready! Be sure to watch the quick how-to video below to see what it looks like.
  • Use room temperature ingredients: As it is with most baked goods, it is important to have your ingredients at room temperature for the best results.

FAQs

How many carbs are in almond flour bread?

As you might already know, almond flour has lower carbs compared to traditional flours (i.e. all-purpose flour, whole wheat flour, etc.) that are used to make bread. One serving of this homemade low carb bread recipe is only 9.1 grams of carbs compared to 13 grams in a slice of traditional bread. Since almond flour is packed with protein, fiber, and nutrients, it’s the best way to get your bread fix while still being mindful of your diet.

How to make this quick almond flour bread paleo, keto, and whole30 compliant?

This almond meal bread is really easy to adjust to your diet by making just a few small changes to the ingredients. To make it Paleo, Keto, and Whole30 compliant, simply omit liquid sweetener and use a grain-free baking powder. The taste difference will be very minimal and you will still end up with a healthy, low-carb, and sugar-free bread you can serve for any meal.

How to Store Almond Flour Bread?

This homemade almond flour loaf keeps best in an airtight container or wrapped in parchment paper and stored on the kitchen counter for up to 3 days. However, if you keep it in the fridge it will store for up to a week. I would avoid wrapping it in plastic wrap, however, as it will trap moisture and completely ruin the texture of the bread.

How To Freeze This Bread?

For longer storage, slice it, place in a plastic freezer storage bag, seal tight, label, date and freeze for up to 3 months. Any time the craving strikes, simply remove a slice (or two!) from the freezer and pop it in your toaster!

What kind of loaf pan should I use to bake ground almond bread recipe?

I baked this basic almond flour bread in an 8X4 loaf pan (affiliate link) and the bread you see in these photographs was baked in that pan. However, you can use a 9X5 loaf pan (affiliate link) as well. I tried it both ways and the difference in baking time was just so minimal that I wouldn’t change a thing. However, please know the version baked in a 9X5 loaf pan is a little shorter in height and longer in length.

Can I use chia seeds instead of flax seeds?

While some readers made this recipe using chia seeds instead of flax seeds, I prefer the version made with flaxseeds. Ground flax seeds help with rising and provide a better form and shape to the overall bread.

Can I substitute coconut flour for almond flour?

This almond flour bread recipe will not work with coconut flour. While both of these flours are gluten-free, they behave differently in baked goods. Therefore, I do not recommend substituting one for another.

For the full nutritional information (including calories), please be sure to check out the recipe card above.

Low Carb, Paleo and Keto friendly Almond Flour Bread Recipe is sliced and photographed from the top view.
Print

Almond Flour Bread Recipe

The best quick and easy to make Almond Flour Bread recipe that is low carb, grain-free, gluten-free, dairy free, low sugar, paleo and keto friendly. Great to use as a sandwich bread or as toast for breakfast.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 8 slices
Calories 288kcal

Ingredients

Wet Ingredients:

  • 5 Tablespoons (70g) Vegetable Oil, plus more for greasing – I used grapeseed oil but olive oil would also work
  • 2 large Eggs room temperature
  • 3 large Egg Whites room temperature
  • 1 Tablespoon (15g) Apple Cider Vinegar
  • 1 Tablespoon (21g) Maple Syrup (or honey)

Dry Ingredients:

  • 2 cups (224g) Blanched Almond Flour
  • ¼ cup (28g) Ground Flaxseed
  • ¾ tsp Baking Soda
  • 1 tsp Baking Powder*
  • ½ tsp Fine Sea Salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Grease an 8X4 (or 9 x 5-inch) loaf pan with 1 teaspoon vegetable oil.
  • In a medium bowl, whisk together the oil, eggs, egg whites, apple cider vinegar and maple syrup until emulsified*
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the almond flour, ground flaxseed, baking soda, baking powder and salt. Make a slight well in the dry ingredients and mix in the egg mixture until just combined.
  • Transfer to the prepared loaf pan and smooth the top. Bake 35 minutes, or until golden brown and a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
  • Let cool in the pan for 15 minutes, then transfer to a cooling rack to cool completely.

Video

Notes

  • Thoroughly mixing the wet ingredients until emulsified is important as it helps the bread bake to the right texture. When the wet ingredients become one smooth mixture and slightly thickened, you know it’s ready!
  • Substitute for baking powder: To make this a paleo-diet-friendly bread, you can use 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar as a substitute for 1 teaspoon of baking powder.
  • Can I use chia seeds instead of flax seeds? While some readers made this recipe using chia seeds instead of flax seeds, I prefer the version made with flaxseeds. Ground flax seeds help with rising and provide a better form/shape to the overall bread.
  • Storage: This homemade almond flour loaf keeps best in an airtight container or wrapped in parchment paper and stored on the kitchen counter for up to 3 days. However, if you keep it in the fridge it will store for up to a week.
  • Freezing Instructions: For longer storage, slice it, place in a plastic freezer storage bag, seal tight, label, date and freeze for up to 3 months. When you are ready to serve, pop it in your toaster to warm it up. There is no need to thaw.

Nutrition

Calories: 288kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 348mg | Potassium: 74mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 59IU | Calcium: 111mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-bread/feed/ 110
Spinach and Feta Cheese Bรถrek https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/ https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/#comments Tue, 14 Jun 2022 22:52:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1824 What is Borek? Crisp and rich, borek is a savory Turkish pastry often served at breakfast and brunch. It’s made…]]>

What is Borek?

Crisp and rich, borek is a savory Turkish pastry often served at breakfast and brunch. It’s made by layering ultra-thin dough, an egg mixture, and various fillings. Borek also comes in many shapes and sizes, ranging from cigarette-shaped rolls to large trays. 

Traditionally, chefs prepare borek with Turkish yufka dough, an ultra-thin, unleavened dough made from flour, water, and salt. Yufka pastry leaves recipes—like borek—often use layers of a yogurt or milk mixture to keep the dough equally moist and flakey. 

Turkish borek sliced and placed on an oval plate

Although feta and spinach borek is a quintessential Turkish dish, you can find Turkish borek recipes across the former Ottoman Empire. The Balkans, Eastern Europe, and even Northern Africa are just a few places. Perhaps because of the pastry’s geographic range, its name has many alternate spellings. “Bourek,” “burek,” “börek,” and even “bòrek” are all popular variations.

Recipe Ingredients

Who knew authentic Turkish cuisine could be so easy to make? This spinach borek recipe only uses simple ingredients that you can find at your local grocery store.

yogurt wash and phyllo dough - ingredients for borek recipe on a marble backdrop
  • Phyllo Dough: You’ll need one package of phyllo dough to make this recipe, which you can find in the grocery store’s frozen section. Though chefs traditionally make Turkish borek dough from layers of yufka, phyllo dough (this is the brand I used) is easier to find here in the U.S. so that’s what I am using. Be sure to thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Yogurt Wash to Keep Layers Moist: For the yogurt wash, gather olive oil, whole milk, egg, plain unsweetened yogurt, salt, and black pepper.
spinach and feta filling ingredients from the top view
  • Borek Filling: In this spinach burek recipe, your filling will consist of olive oil, chopped onion, baby spinach, kosher salt, black pepper, crumbled feta cheese, sesame seeds, and egg yolks. You may also add poppy seeds or Nigella seeds if desired.

Substitutions

  • Cheese: Turkish feta cheese is a classic in this traditional börek recipe, but shredded mozzarella, cheddar cheese, and Monterey jack would also work.
  • Oil: If you’d rather not use olive oil, you can make this bourek recipe extra rich by using melted butter instead. Just make sure the butter is cool before using it.
  • Baby spinach: Swiss chard makes an excellent substitution for fresh spinach in this Turkish cheese pastry, as long as you sauté it first. You could also replace the baby spinach with potatoes for a heartier filling.

How to Make Borek with Spinach

Sheet pan borek is one of my recipe book’s tastiest and most effortless Turkish side dishes. You can learn how to make borek like an expert in just a few simple steps.

Cook the Vegetables & Make the Filling

person sauteeing veggies and making the yogurt milk mixture
  1. Sauté the veggies: Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onion to the pan and cook, frequently stirring, until translucent (4-5 minutes). Then, add the baby spinach, salt, and pepper to the pan. Toss the mixture every few minutes using kitchen tongs. Let it cook until the spinach loses most of its volume (approx. 5 minutes). Turn off the heat and let the veggies cool for 15-20 minutes.
    PRO TIP: If your veggie filling has too much liquid, I recommend straining the juices using a colander. Straining will keep your borek from turning soggy when fully assembled.
  2. Prepare the yogurt milk mixture: While your vegetables cool, whisk your olive oil, milk, egg, whole-milk yogurt, salt, and black pepper in a measuring cup.
  3. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. 

Layer the Phyllo Dough

a collage of photos showing how to assemble borek from the start
  1. Layer the bottom borek sheets: Line your sheet pan with parchment paper. Then, layer sheets of phyllo dough onto the parchment paper until the whole pan is covered, using as many sheets as necessary. Let any excess dough hang over the sides. 
  2. Brush the phyllo: Lay a second layer of phyllo on top of the first, covering every part of the sheet pan. Pour 3-4 tablespoons of the milk mixture over the sheets, and use a pastry brush to spread it evenly over the dough.
  3. Add layers: Add another two layers of phyllo sheets on top of the first. Brush the top layer again with yogurt wash. Then, place one more layer of phyllo dough on the washed layer. Don’t brush this top layer with the milk mixture.
  4. Layer the filling: Distribute your cooled sautéed veggies over the top sheet of phyllo in one even layer. Then, sprinkle the crumbled feta cheese evenly over the spinach. 
a collage of images showing how to assemble cheese borak food
  1. Layer the top borek sheets: Place another two layers of phyllo dough over the spinach filling, covering it completely. Brush the top layer with the milk and yogurt wash. Then, place two more layers of phyllo dough on top of the washed layer. Brush the top of the assembled pastry with an even layer of the yogurt mixture.
  2. Fold excess dough: If any sheets are hanging over the side of the pan, fold them in toward the pastry’s center. Be sure to brush this extra dough with the milk mixture. At this point, your borek should look moist and tightly packed.
collage of photos showing before and after bourek recipe is baked.
  1. Cut the pastry: Cut your borek into 12 equal pieces using a knife. 
  2. Add toppings: Mix the egg yolks in a bowl. Brush the top layer of the borek with a generous layer of egg wash. If desired, sprinkle the top with sesame seeds and nigella seeds.
  3. Bake: Bake the borek in the preheated oven for 30-35 minutes or until the top is golden brown. 
  4. Serve: Remove the pastry from the oven and let it cool for 15-20 minutes on a wire rack. Then, slice it along the pre-cut lines, and serve while still warm.

What to Serve with Borek

There’s a reason why so many people call it “borek bread.” This flaky and flavorful Turkish side makes a perfect pair with any dish you’d eat with bread, from light salads to meaty mains.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

Make meal prep stress a thing of the past with this Turkish cheese borek recipe. Whether you make this dish a day or an entire month in advance, these storage tips have you covered.

  • Make ahead: To make your pastry ahead of time, cook the burek spinach and onions one day in advance. Store the veggies in an airtight container in the fridge, removing it when you’re ready to assemble your borek. Another option is to assemble the entire pastry, cover it with plastic wrap, and store it in the fridge overnight. Then, cook your burek as usual when ready to eat.
  • Store: Leftover borek will stay fresh for up to 3 days when stored in an airtight container. Just be sure to let it reach room temperature before storing.
  • Freeze: You can freeze your spinach burek recipe for up to one month before baking it. Just be sure to cover the pastry tightly with plastic wrap and cover it with aluminum foil to prevent freezer burn.
  • Thaw: Transfer your burek from the freezer to the fridge one full day before you plan to bake it. Then, bake the pastry according to the standard cooking directions (350 degrees F. for 30-35 minutes).

Filling Variations

The sky’s the limit when it comes to filling this Turkish cheese pastry. Whether you want a borek recipe with meat or a cheese burek for feta fans, these popular fillings are just what you need.

  • Meat borek: Make your pastry extra satisfying by adding a savory protein. Any meat will work, but ground beef borek, borek with minced meat, and ground lamb borek are some of my favorite savory fillings.
  • Cheese & herbs: Don’t want to add veggies? No problem! Borek with cheese and fresh herbs is a common filling you’ll adore. Simply fill your Turkish filo pastry with feta cheese and fresh parsley.
  • Try it with different vegetables: When you make burek, spinach is only one of the countless delicious veggies you can use. Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms and Baked Portobello Mushrooms are two of my favorite alternatives.
turkish cheese borek right after it comes out of the oven

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to make international eats. With these foolproof tips, your cheese and spinach borek will come out flaky, gooey, and decadent every time.

  • Don’t worry about torn phyllo dough: Phyllo dough is so delicate that it may tear while you work with it. Don’t worry! You can easily pinch phyllo dough back together, and a few tears won’t ruin the dish.
  • It’s OK if you miss a layer: Don’t stress if you miss a layer when assembling your borek. This dish is highly forgiving, and it’s always better to have too few layers than too many.
  • Cover the filo sheets with a damp towel: As you are making this Turkish spinach borek recipe, be sure to cover the filo dough sheets with a damp towel to prevent them from drying. 
  • Don’t skimp on the yogurt wash: Be sure to spread the yogurt wash evenly over your Turkish pastry. Every layer should be adequately moist after brushing. 
  • Slice before baking: Slicing the borek pastry before it goes into the oven will make cutting and serving much easier. Simply slice the dough into your ideal portion sizes when you finish layering your borek.
  • Let the borek sit overnight: Though this step is optional, I highly recommend letting your borek recipe sit in the fridge overnight. Allowing your borek to rest will give your phyllo dough time to absorb the flavorful liquid, giving your pastry extra moisture and savoriness.
  • Strain your veggie mixture: If your sautéed veggie mixture has any liquid, I suggest straining it in a colander before adding it to your borek. Too much liquid will turn your pastry soggy.
  • Prewashed baby spinach: If you have a busy schedule or simply don’t want to spend hours in the kitchen, prewashed baby spinach will save you oodles of time.
  • Phyllo dough vs. puff pastry: Though phyllo dough and puff pastry can be found in the same section of the grocery store, they are not interchangeable. French puff pastry contains many layers of dough and butter, which rise and become airy in the oven. By contrast, phyllo pastry is paper-thin and bakes to a super fine, flaky texture.
Learn how to make Turkish Spinach and Feta Cheese Borek recipe - Borek served with Turkish Tea.

FAQs

You don’t have to be Turkish to be a borek buff. This handy FAQ will answer all your questions about my recipe for Turkish borek, from the dish’s national origins to its nutritional content.

Is borek the same as spanakopita?

Turkish borek and Greek spanakopita come from the same family of pastry. However, the two often differ in preparation and texture, with Greek spanakopita often having a flakier, puffier crust. 

Is it burek or borek?

Both spellings of this pastry are technically correct, depending on the country. Turkish people tend to spell the name as “borek,” while “burek” is more common in the Balkans.

What countries have burek?

Many may think of borek as Turkish food. However, you can find this iconic dish in numerous countries across the former Ottoman Empire. This area includes countries in the Balkans, Middle East, and Northern Africa.

Is spinach borek healthy?

This recipe for burek with cheese isn’t the healthiest, with many calories coming from fats and carbs. However, borek can provide essential nutrients from its vitamin-rich spinach and calcium-rich feta when enjoyed in moderation.

How do you eat borek?

 Traditionally, people have Turkish cheese borek for breakfast or brunch during family gatherings. However, you can eat borek alongside any meal in place of bread.

Other Turkish Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Turkish Borek recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person serving spinach and feta cheese borek
Print

Spinach and Feta Cheese Börek – Turkish Borek Recipe

Learn how to make Spinach and Feta Cheese Borek – A classic Turkish Borek recipe made with stuffing phyllo sheets with spinach and feta. This authentic and simple recipe can be made ahead and baked right before serving for a warm and delicious breakfast or brunch recipe.
Course Appetizer, Breakfast
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 174kcal

Ingredients

For the Spinach and Feta filling:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil or any vegetable oil such as avocado oil
  • 1 medium-size onion peeled and chopped
  • 16 oz. baby spinach leaves washed and dried
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 8 oz. crumbled feta cheese

For The Milk Yogurt Mixture:

  • 3 tablespoon olive oil or any vegetable oil such as avocado oil
  • ½ cup whole milk
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 tablespoons plain whole-milk yogurt
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

For The Layers:

  • 1 package of Phyllo Dough* thawed overnight in the fridge
  • 2 egg yolks
  • 2 tablespoons sesame seeds
  • ½ teaspoon Nigella seeds optional

Instructions

  • Cook the filling: Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large pan at medium heat. Add the chopped onion and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add the spinach, salt, and pepper. Cook it, tossing it every few minutes using kitchen tongs, until the spinach loses most of its volume, around 5 minutes. Give it a stir and turn the heat off. Let it cool for 15 minutes.
  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
  • Make the yogurt milk mixture: Whisk olive oil, milk, egg, yogurt, salt, and black pepper in a bowl until combined.
  • To assemble: Line a baking sheet (mine is 12X17) with parchment paper. In a single layer, place sheets of phyllo dough onto the parchment paper. Use as many sheets as you need to make sure that the pan’s whole surface is covered. It is okay if some filo is overhanging on the sides.
  • Place another layer of phyllo on top of the first, again making sure that the bottom of the pan is covered. Pour 3-4 tablespoons of the milk mixture on the top layer of dough and brush it over the filo sheets, making sure that it is evenly spread.
  • Stack another two layers of phyllo dough on top of the first two. Again, brush the milk mixture over the top phyllo sheet. Then, cover the top sheet with one more layer of phyllo dough—not two. Do not brush the top sheet with the milk mixture again.
  • Spread the now-cooled spinach and crumbled feta cheese evenly over the top layer of phyllo sheets.
  • Place another two layers of phyllo sheets over the filling, covering it completely. Brush another 3-4 teaspoons of the milk mixture over the topmost sheet. Then, place two final layers of phyllo dough on top of the washed layer, and brush the top with the milk mixture. You should have 9 layers of dough in total.
  • If there are sheets overhanging on the side, fold them in towards the pastry’s center and make sure that they are brushed with the milk mixture. At this point, the borek should look nicely moist and tightly packed.
  • Using a sharp knife, pre-slice borek into 12 equal pieces (please refer to the video for a visual).
  • Mix egg yolks in a bowl.
  • Brush each slice with egg yolk and sprinkle with sesame seeds and nigella seeds if using.
  • Bake in the oven for 30-35 minutes or until it turns golden brown.
  • Let it cool for a few minutes, slice, and serve while it is still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Prior to adding salt to the filling, it is good to taste your feta cheese and determine if you need more salt or not.
  • If you have time, I recommend letting your borek rest before baking it. Simply cover the baking sheet with plastic wrap and place it in the fridge. Let the pastry rest for a few hours or up to overnight. Then, bake as usual.
  • Depending on the size of the sheet pan you are using, you may not need to use the whole package of phyllo dough. 
  • Strain your veggie mixture: If your sauteed veggie mixture has any liquid, I suggest straining it in a colander before using it as a filling. Too much liquid will turn your pastry soggy.
  • Don’t worry about torn phyllo dough: Phyllo dough is so delicate that it may tear while you work with it. Don’t worry! You can easily pinch phyllo dough back together, and a few tears won’t ruin the dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 174kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 503mg | Potassium: 481mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 6851IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 219mg | Iron: 3mg

This recipe was originally published in November 2013. It has been updated in June 2022 with new text, photos, and a how-to video with very minor edits (mostly for clarification) to the originally published recipe.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/feed/ 69
Eggplant Involtini https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-involtini-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-involtini-2/#comments Thu, 28 Apr 2022 22:30:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3593 With over 20 healthy eggplant recipes on this blog, it is no secret that eggplant is one of my favorite…]]>

With over 20 healthy eggplant recipes on this blog, it is no secret that eggplant is one of my favorite vegetables. While I love any Italian dish with eggplant like Eggplant Baked Ziti and Baked Eggplant Parm, a fun Mediterranean Ratatouille, or a classic like Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, transforming eggplant into involtini is quick, easy, and delicious.

Interested in more ways to roast eggplant? You should definitely try Whole Roasted Eggplant, Fire Roasted Eggplant, and Roasted Eggplant Halves.

eggplant involtini in skillet garnished with parmesan and basil

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

Eggplant and ricotta are a match made in heaven – and for good reason. An America’s Test Kitchen recipe that stood the test of time, I make this easy vegetarian recipe during the eggplant season. I know you will love it because:

  • Healthy and satisfying: Baking eggplant slices in the oven cuts down on prep time (and all the unwanted fat and calories from frying) and allows the meaty texture of eggplant to shine.
  • A feast for eyes: I always make this involtini recipe when I am entertaining. It’s one of those dishes that make people swoon as soon as you place it in the middle of the table. First, the smell hits them, and then the beauty of rolled eggplant with ricotta cheese simmering in tomato sauce.
  • Hearty and vegetarian: I love a vegetarian meal that can stand up on its own. Serve it with a crisp green salad such as my Spring Mix Salad or Butter Lettuce Salad on the side for a summery feel.

Ingredients

This is an Italian-style eggplant recipe that relies on just a handful of fresh and flavorful ingredients that you probably have in your fridge/pantry.

ingredients for the recipe from the top view

For the eggplant, you will need two large eggplants, olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper.

To make the filling, gather together ricotta cheese, breadcrumbs, grated Parmesan cheese, fresh basil leaves, lemon juice, and lemon zest.

For the tomato sauce, you will need olive oil, garlic, oregano, red pepper flakes, canned diced tomatoes, and fresh basil.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Eggplant: When you are shopping for eggplant, I recommend buying shorter and wider ones that are similar in size. I buy globe eggplants that are widely available. Not familiar with this vegetable, check out my detailed article on eggplant varieties to learn more.
  • Ricotta Cheese: I use this Homemade Ricotta Cheese recipe, but you can use storebought full-fat ricotta as well. 
  • Breadcrumbs: Use unseasoned regular breadcrumbs. Feel free to swap them out for gluten-free breadcrumbs instead.
  • Parmesan Cheese: Parmesan or Pecorino Romano cheese can be used interchangeably.
  • Fresh Herbs: Feel free to add more herbs to the ricotta cheese mixture, such as fresh parsley or oregano. Garnishing with fresh chopped parsley adds a special finishing touch.
  • Tomato Sauce: I like to make a simple tomato sauce from scratch. Or, if you want to save on time, use one jar (half a recipe) of this Homemade Tomato Sauce or any leftover marinara sauce you have in your fridge.

How to Make

The simplicity of this eggplant stuffed with ricotta really brings the eggplant into focus. Here’s how to make it:

Step 1: Bake Eggplant

Below are the basic steps to precook the eggplant slices for this recipe. However, if you wish to learn more about it, be sure to check my detailed post on Baked Eggplant Slices.

person seasoning aubergine slices
  1. Prep equipment: Preheat the oven to 400 F degrees. Set up two large baking sheets lined with parchment paper. Spray with cooking spray.
  2. Slice the eggplants: Cut the stem end off, then peel each eggplant with a vegetable peeler. Slice eggplant lengthwise into ½-inch thick slices. Trim the rounded ends for even cooking. New to preparing eggplant? Check out our guide on How To Slice an Eggplant like a pro.
  3. Coat with olive oil: Brush eggplant slices with olive oil. Season with 1/2 teaspoon salt and 1/4 teaspoon black pepper.
  4. Bake: Bake for 25 to 30 minutes, or until the eggplant is tender and soft to touch. Flip the eggplant slices and switch and rotate the sheets halfway through baking. 

Step 2: Prepare The Ricotta Filling

Mix all ingredients: Combine ricotta cheese, breadcrumbs, grated cheese, chopped fresh basil, lemon juice, and 1/2 teaspoon salt in a medium bowl.

collage of images showing how to make the filling and tomato sauce

Step 3: Make the Tomato Sauce

  1. Saute aromatics and seasonings: In a 10-inch ovenproof skillet, add olive oil and heat for 1 minute over medium heat. Add the garlic, 1/2 teaspoon salt, oregano, and a pinch of red pepper flakes. Stir and cook for 30 seconds.
  2. Cook tomatoes: Stir in the canned diced tomatoes. Bring to a boil and let it simmer, stirring occasionally, over medium-low heat, until thickened for about 12 to 15 minutes.
  3. Add basil: Once tomatoes have thickened, add the chopped basil, give it a large stir and turn off the heat.

Step 4: Assembly

images showing how to make eggplant involtini
  1. Roll the eggplant: Evenly distribute the ricotta cheese mixture onto the widest end of each eggplant slice (bottom third of each slice). Then, gently roll eggplant slices with your hands. Place seam side down, in the pan with the tomato sauce.
  2. Simmer, then broil: Once all the eggplant slices are in the pan, bring it back up to a simmer over medium heat. Simmer for 5 minutes, then broil for 5 more minutes in the oven.
  3. Finish and serve: Sprinkle with the remaining grated cheese and chopped basil. When serving, place a rolled eggplant on a plate and spoon tomato sauce over. 

What to Serve with This Recipe?

Eggplant ricotta rolls are a beautiful and showstopping meal perfect for any dinner party or potluck. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze and Reheat?

The eggplant rollatini will keep stored to enjoy later in the week. It can also be made ahead. Here’s how I like to do it:

  • Make-Ahead: You can make the whole recipe, until the last broil, bring to room temperature, cover it tightly with stretch film, and keep it in the refrigerator a day in advance. When ready to serve, preheat the oven to 350 degrees and reheat it for about 15 minutes or until thoroughly warmed. Garnish with fresh basil and parmesan cheese right before serving.
  • Store: Transfer the ricotta eggplant rolls to a large container big enough to fit them in a single layer. Seal tight and keep in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Transfer to an oven-safe baking dish, and reheat, covered, in a 350-degree F oven for 10-15 minutes. Or, reheat 1-2 pieces in the microwave in 30-second to 1-minute increments until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Prepare as directed, then cool completely. Transfer to a freezer-safe and oven-safe casserole dish. Cover it tightly with stretch film (and/or aluminum foil) to prevent freezer burn. Freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Reheat: Bake right from frozen, covered with aluminum foil, in a 350-degree oven for 20-25 minutes, or until warmed through.
aubergine ricotta rolls in a skillet in tomato sauce

Expert Tips

  • Use a 10-inch oven-proof skillet. This makes it easier to transfer from stovetop to oven. Alternatively, if you do not oven an oven-proof skillet, spread the tomato sauce at the bottom of a baking dish, nestle the rolled eggplant into the sauce, and bake in the oven.
  • Sweating eggplants: As you can see in the recipe below, I did not salt the eggplants as I was making this baked stuffed eggplant recipe during the eggplant season. However, if you prefer salting yours, feel free to do so before baking the eggplant slices in the oven. If you are new to it, be sure to check out my guide on How To Prepare and Salt eggplant before cooking.
  • Not a fan of broiling? Alternatively, you can place the skillet in a preheated 350 degrees F oven for 10-15 minutes before serving.

FAQs

What does involitini mean?

The Italian word involtini means small bundles. And this dish is exactly that. Thinly sliced eggplant filled with a delicious ricotta cheese filling that’s rolled into a bundle and cooked in an easy-to-make tomato sauce.

What is the difference between involtini and rollatini?

The technique and recipe used in involtini and rollatini recipes are very similar with the exception that, when making rollatini, some people bread eggplant slices before baking and rolling.

Can you freeze eggplant involtini?

Yes, it can be. Simply bring it to room temperature, transfer it to a freezer-safe container, and tightly cover it with a lid (or stretch film). Freeze it up to a month.

Want more Italian Comfort Food?

Here are a few more Italian dishes that you might also like:

If you try this Eggplant Involtini recipe or any other eggplant recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

eggplant involtini in a skillet from the top view
Print

Eggplant Involtini Recipe

This eggplant involtini recipe is made by rolling slices of oven-baked eggplant with basil-ricotta mixture and baking it in a homemade tomato sauce. Serve it as a vegetarian main course or as a side dish to accompany any meat dishes. Either way, it is easy-to-make and delicious.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 306kcal

Ingredients

For Baked Eggplant Slices

  • 2 globe eggplants each approximately 1 to 1/2 half lbs.*
  • 5 tablespoons olive oil divided
  • Kosher Salt and Pepper

For Ricotta Mixture

  • 1 cup homemade ricotta cheese or full fat store bought ricotta cheese
  • 3/4 cup shredded Parmesan cheese Or Pecorino Romano cheese
  • 1/2 cup breadcrumbs
  • 1/4 cup fresh basil chopped
  • 1/2 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed

For Tomato Sauce

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 3 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon oregano
  • Pinch of red pepper flakes
  • 1 can diced tomatoes 28 oz of can
  • 1/2 cup fresh basil loosly packed and roughly chopped

As Garnish

  • 2 tablespoons fresh basil roughly chopped
  • 2 tablespoons shredded parmesan cheese

Instructions

To prepare eggplant:

  • Pre-heat your oven to 400 F Degrees.
  • Peel the eggplants. Cut them lengthwise into 6 slices. Each slice should be about 1/2 inch thick. Trim the rounded ends so that they will lay flat.
  • Cover two baking sheets with parchment paper and spray them generously with cooking spray. Place 6 eggplant slices on each baking sheet.
  • Start with the first baking sheet. Brush each eggplant slice with two and a half tablespoons of olive oil (you use the 2 1/2 tbs olive oil to brush all of the slices) and season it with 1/2 teaspoon salt and 1/4 teaspoon pepper. Flip each slice and do the same thing for the other side. Repeat the same process for the second baking sheet.
  • Place both sheets in the oven and bake for 25-30 minutes, or until they are tender and lightly browned. To ensure even baking, flip eggplant slices and switch and rotate sheets halfway through the baking process.
  • When eggplants are baked, let them cool for 5 minutes.

To make the filling:

  • Place 1 cup of homemade ricotta cheese (or full-fat supermarket ricotta cheese), 1/2 cup bread crumbs, 1/2 cup grated parmesan cheese, 1/4 cup chopped fresh basil, lemon zest, 1 tablespoon lemon juice, and 1/2 teaspoon salt. Stir until they are all combined. Set aside.

To make the tomato sauce:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large ovenproof skillet (I used a 10-inch skillet). Add the garlic, 1/2 teaspoon salt, oregano, and a pinch of red pepper flakes. Cook, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds.
  • Stir in the tomatoes and cook, stirring occasionally, on medium-low heat, until it thickens, 12-15 minutes.
  • At the very end, add the chopped basil, give it a large stir, cover, and set aside.

To assemble:

  • With the widest side of the eggplant slices facing you, evenly distribute approximately 1 1/2 to 2 tabelspoons of ricotta mixture onto each slice. Starting from the widest end, gently roll each piece and place it, seamed side down, in the pan with the tomato sauce.
  • Bring it to a simmer over medium heat. Allow it to cook for 5 minutes.
  • Turn the broiler on, place it in the oven, and broil* for 5 minutes until the eggplants and cheese are warmed thoroughly.

To finish:

  • Sprinkle it with 1/4 cup of grated parmesan cheese and 2 tablespoons of chopped fresh basil.
  • When ready to serve, place a few eggplant rolls onto a plate and spoon a generous amount of tomato sauce over it.

Video

Notes

  • When you are shopping for eggplants I recommend buying shorter and wider ones that are similar in size. I also recommend making sure that they are sliced around 1/2-inch thick, which should give you 5-6 slices per eggplant.
  • Sweating eggplants: As you can see in the recipe, I did not salt the eggplants as I was making this recipe during the eggplant season. However, if you prefer salting yours, feel free to do so before baking the eggplant slices in the oven. If you are new to it, be sure to check out my guide on How To Prepare and Salt eggplant before cooking.
  • Not a fan of broiling? Alternatively, you can place the skillet in a preheated 350 degrees F oven for 10-15 minutes before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 381mg | Potassium: 641mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 404IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 376mg | Iron: 2mg

Recipe adapted (with minor changes) from Cook’s Illustrated magazine, June 2014 edition.


This post was originally published in July 2014. It has been updated with new photos and helpful information in April 2022.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-involtini-2/feed/ 23
Paleo Carrot Cake with Almond Flour https://foolproofliving.com/paleo-carrot-cake/ https://foolproofliving.com/paleo-carrot-cake/#comments Sat, 02 Apr 2022 09:38:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=28158 If you are like me, a fan of baking with almond flour, you are in for a treat because we…]]>

If you are like me, a fan of baking with almond flour, you are in for a treat because we are putting my favorite flour to good use and making a paleo-diet friendly almond carrot cake.

Similar to my Almond Flour Vanilla Cake and Chocolate Almond Flour Cake, it is a wonderful, one-layer cake you can make for the upcoming Easter celebration and throughout the spring season. This healthy spin on gluten-free carrot cake recipe with almond flour is also grain-free, refined sugar-free, and Paleo.

Paleo carrot cake with almond flour is sliced and photographed from the front view

For the icing on top of the cake (literally!), the maple frosting is inspired by my Maple Cream Cheese Frosting recipe. It’s a Vegan Paleo Cream Cheese Frosting that transforms this into a completely dairy-free dessert!

Ingredients for the cake:

The ingredients for healthier flourless carrot cake are broken down into the dry ingredients, the wet ingredients, and last-minute additions (aka the goodies).

Dry ingredients for almond flour carrot cake recipe

Dry Ingredients

  • Almond Flour / Meal – My favorite brand is Blue Diamond Almond Flour since it is sweet and nutty, but Bob’s Red Mill is another great option. If you have the time, homemade almond flour is even better. 
  • Ground Golden Flaxseed – I specify golden flaxseed here because you don’t get the little specks of flaxseed throughout the grain-free cake, but the golden version can sometimes be hard to find in stores. Simply use regular ground flaxseed, if that is all you have on hand.
  • Baking Powder* + Baking Soda + Fine Sea Salt – For lift, color and flavor, make sure you don’t leave them out! Almond flour needs that extra bit of insurance from the chemical leaveners. *While some people use baking powder while observing a paleo diet, I know that some don’t. If that is you, in place of 1 teaspoon of baking powder, you can mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar.
  • Cinnamon + Ginger + Cardamom – This is my favorite part! Cinnamon and ginger are traditional, but it’s the cardamom that takes this carrot cake mix above and beyond – trust me, it makes all the difference!

Wet Ingredients

Wet ingredients for the recipe
  • Coconut Oil – I used refined coconut oil, which is milder in flavor than unrefined, but either will work. Make sure to melt and cool completely before mixing it into the wet ingredients.
  • Eggs – Three large eggs help bind the wet and dry ingredients together. Make sure to bring to room temperature for easy whisking.
  • Coconut Sugar – Delicately sweet and fruity, coconut sugar is a paleo-friendly sugar that is (most of the time) an easy 1:1 substitute for refined white sugar.

FUN FACT: When I first began researching this paleo carrot almond flour cake recipe, I was a little confused about the Paleo concept, mainly about which sweeteners are appropriate to use in a paleo recipe. Upon further research, and thanks to this article from America’s Test Kitchen, coconut sugar, along with raw honey, maple syrup, maple sugar, and dried fruit are all paleo-friendly sweeteners.

  • Orange Juice – A mere teaspoon goes a long way here, adding a pop of acidity. You will need more orange juice in the vegan frosting recipe, so make sure to keep it on hand.
  • Vanilla Extract
  • Shredded Carrots – I personally like to peel my carrots, but if yours are organic, feel free to skip that step, and instead, thoroughly scrub the surface. Grate on the smallest holes of your box grater for the best texture.

PRO TIP: Just like my Almond Flour Banana Bread, it is crucial to focus on the weight and measure of the fruit/vegetable used. In that recipe, it was the bananas, and in this one, it is the carrots.

Since they can vary so much in size, it is best to weigh them before adding to the batter. For best results, 6 ounces of carrots shredded on the small holes of a box grater, about 1 ¼ cups measured, produces the perfect amount of carrots-to-cake ratio.

Last-Minute Additions

  • Chopped Walnuts – For that extra bit of crunch and classic flavor. If you have a few minutes, while you gather the rest of the ingredients, toast the walnuts on a baking sheet in the preheated 350-degree F oven for 5-7 minutes and cool completely.
  • Golden Raisins – A bit more sour and sweet than regular raisins, be sure to use the golden variety if you can find them.
  • Shredded Unsweetened Coconut – The coconut is optional, but I find it adds that extra layer of texture and flavor. If you can’t get your hands on shredded coconut, you can use an equal amount of coconut flour.
  • Diced Fresh Pineapple – Pineapple is another optional ingredient but I highly encourage you to add it as paleo carrot cake with pineapple is much better tasting than without.

Ingredients For Dairy Free Carrot Cake Frosting

Inspired by my Maple Cream Cheese Frosting, this vegan version of carrot cake frosting is just as satisfying.

A woman is making Vegan Paleo Cream Cheese frosting
  • Unsalted Vegan Butter – Remove the butter from the fridge while you are preparing the cake recipe. This will be enough time to bring the butter to cool room temperature.
  • Vegan Cream Cheese – I personally enjoy Kite Hill Vegan Cream Cheese for all my icing needs.
  • Pure Maple Syrup – Another paleo-friendly sweetener, purchase Grade A golden or dark amber.
  • Vanilla Extract – The vanilla makes it taste like a homemade cake frosting recipe.
  • A Squeeze of Orange/Lemon Juice – That extra pop of fresh citrus flavor makes this frosting to the next level.

How To Make Almond Flour Carrot Cake

This grain-free carrot cake can easily be mixed by hand, no mixer required! Simply:

Steps for making the cake
  1. Prep your tools. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F, place the oven rack in the center of the oven and grease an 8” or 9” cake pan with coconut oil (or you can use a cooking spray as well) and line the bottom with parchment paper.
  2. Mix the dry ingredients. In a large bowl, whisk together almond flour, ground flaxseed, baking powder, baking soda, salt, cinnamon, ginger, and cardamom.
  3. Mix the wet ingredients. In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, remaining coconut oil, coconut sugar, orange juice, and vanilla extract until well combined, silky smooth, and emulsified. 
  4. Make the cake batter! Add the wet ingredients to the dry ingredients and fold with a spatula until well combined. Fold in the grated carrots, walnuts, golden raisins, pineapple, and coconut (if using). Transfer the batter to the prepared cake pan and smooth the top.
  5. Bake! Bake for 1 hour if using an 8-inch cake pan or 50-55 minutes if using a 9-inch cake pan, or until golden brown and the center springs back to the touch. Transfer to a cooling rack and let cool in the pan for 20 minutes. Gently remove from the pan, peeling off the parchment paper bottom and place on the cooling rack to cool completely. This is a good time to make the Maple Cream Cheese Frosting or Dairy Free Icing!
How to make this cake step by step photos

How To Make Paleo Cream Cheese Frosting

I use my refined sugar free cream cheese frosting to finish it off. This way, you get all the flavors of the traditional carrot cake with every bite.

The icing will whisk together much better with an electric stand mixer or hand mixer. Simply:

  1. Whisk the butter and cream cheese. In the bowl of an electric mixer with the whisk attachment or a large bowl and handheld mixer, beat the vegan butter and cream cheese on medium-high heat until smooth, about 2 minutes. Scrape down the sides of the bowl.
  2. Sweeten it up! Add the maple syrup, vanilla extract, and orange/lemon juice. Beat on medium-high until light and fluffy, about 4 minutes, scraping the sides and bottom of the bowl halfway through. If the frosting is too soft, chill in the fridge for 10 minutes to stiffen slightly to a spreadable consistency.

Cream Cheese Vs. Vegan Cream Cheese Frosting

If you are avoiding all dairy, the vegan cream cheese frosting is a great alternative. I personally used Earth Balance Vegan Butter (affiliate link) and Kite Hill Vegan Cream Cheese. Note the texture will be a bit more grainy and not as thick as regular frosting since the vegan products are looser in terms of consistency. But this makes the entire carrot cake recipe completely Dairy-Free!

The Vegan Cream Cheese recipe makes just enough to frost the cake, but you can double the recipe and use it throughout the week to slather on anything from bagels to paleo pumpkin muffins to almond meal banana bread to low carb almond flour bread!

If dairy is not an issue, try my Maple Cream Cheese Frosting recipe for a more traditional flavor. It is surely a great option for the classic cream cheese frosting made with powdered sugar.

A slice of healthy carrot cake recipe is photographed from the front view

How To Store Leftovers

If you happen to end up with leftovers, you can store this low sugar carrot cake in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 1 week. After about 4 days, the cake will begin to dry out, so I would recommend freezing it after the 4-day mark.

To freeze, place a piece of plastic wrap over the entire opening of your container, seal tight, label, date and freeze for up to 1 month.

A sliced low sugar carrot cake from the top

A Few Helpful Tips for The Best Cake:

  • Use room temperature ingredients for the best paleo carrot cake, but be sure to cold ingredients for the vegan frosting. I know this sounds confusing, but cake mix ingredients that are warm-room temperature combine better, whereas frosting ingredients that are a bit colder whip to a better consistency.
  • Bake this flourless carrot cake in the center of your oven. There is where the heat is most even. I tested one cake with the convection setting on my oven, but I still placed my oven rack in the center for added insurance.
  • Be sure to treat yourself (or your family) to a slice of carrot cake with a glass of almond milk or a cup of coffee.

FAQs:

What is the best cake size pan to make paleo carrot cake?

This is a one-layer carrot cake recipe, which is much easier to bake and assemble than a layered cake. Feel free to use either an 8 or 9-inch cake pan. Note that the baking times and thickness will vary based on which size you use.

8” Pan: Bake the cake for 1 hour. The cake will be smaller and thicker.
9” Pan: Bake the cake for 50-55 minutes. This will produce a cake that is longer and thinner.

How To Use This Recipe To Make Cupcakes And Muffins?

If you prefer individual low carb carrot cakes (paleo carrot cake muffins), divide the batter into a 12-cup muffin tin lined with parchment paper liners. Bake in a 350 degrees F oven in the center of the oven for 20-25 minutes.

For paleo carrot cake cupcakes, pipe swirls of dairy-free frosting (or maple cream cheese frosting) on top with a piping bag and decorative pastry tip.

For almond flour carrot muffins, top the unbaked batter with extra chopped walnuts, gently pressing into the top of each muffin so they stick.

Can’t Get Enough Almond Flour Cakes? Here are a few more:

If you enjoyed this grain free carrot cake recipe, you might enjoy our other grain free cakes:

If you try this Almond Flour Carrot Cake recipe or any other Almond Flour Cake recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A slice of paleo carrot cake on a plate
Print

Paleo Carrot Cake with Almond Flour Recipe

This Paleo Carrot Cake with almond flour is deliciously moist, lightly spiced, and mildly sweetened with maple syrup. Topped off with creamy vegan cream cheese frosting it is gluten and dairy-free too.
Course Cake, Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 8 slices
Calories 402kcal

Ingredients

For The Almond Flour Carrot Cake:

  • ¼ cup Coconut Oil plus 1 teaspoon for greasing the pan, melted + cooled
  • 1 ½ cups Almond Flour
  • 3 Tbsp Ground Flaxseed aka flax meal
  • 1 tsp Baking Powder* Or Mix 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar for paleo version
  • ¼ tsp Baking Soda
  • ¾ tsp Kosher salt or fine sea salt
  • ½ tsp Ground Cinnamon
  • ½ tsp Ground Ginger
  • ½ tsp Ground Cardamom
  • 3 Large Eggs at room temperature
  • ½ cup Coconut Sugar plus 2 tablespoons (total of 125 g)
  • 1 teaspoon Orange Juice freshly squeezed – optional
  • ½ teaspoon Vanilla Extract
  • 6 oz Carrots about 2 large, scrubbed, grated on the smallest holes of a box grater (1 ¼ cups packed)
  • ¼ cup Diced Fresh Pineapple, optional
  • ¼ cup Chopped Walnuts
  • ¼ cup Raisins or golden raisins
  • ¼ cup Shredded Unsweetened Coconut, optional

For The Vegan Cream Cheese Frosting:

  • 2 Tablespoons Unsalted Vegan Butter, cool room temperature
  • ½ cup Vegan Cream Cheese, cool room temperature
  • 2 Tablespoons Pure Maple Syrup
  • ½ teaspoon Vanilla Extract
  • Squeeze of Lemon/Orange Juice about ½ teaspoon

Instructions

To Make The Paleo Carrot Cake:

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and place a rack in the center of the oven. Grease an 8 or 9-inch cake pan with 1 teaspoon coconut oil and line the bottom with parchment paperIn a large bowl, whisk together the almond flour, ground flaxseed, baking powder, baking soda, salt, cinnamon, ginger and cardamom.
  • In a medium bowl, whisk the eggs, remaining coconut oil, coconut sugar, orange juice and vanilla until well combined, silky smooth and emulsified.Add the wet ingredients to the dry ingredients and mix until just combined. Fold in the walnuts, raisins and coconut (if using).Fold in the carrots, pineapple (if using), and walnuts.
  • Transfer the batter to the prepared pan and smooth the top. Bake for 1 hour (8-inch) or 50-55 minutes (9-inch), or until lightly brown, a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean and the center springs back to the touch.
  • Let cool in the pan for 10 minutes, then gently remove from the pan, discard the parchment paper and transfer to a cooling rack to cool completely. Top with the frosting.

To Make The Vegan Cream Cheese Frosting:

  • In the bowl of an electric mixer with the whisk attachment or with a large bowl and hand held mixer, beat butter and cream cheese on medium-high speed until very smooth, about 2 minutes.
  • Scrape down the sides of the bowl and add maple syrup, vanilla extract, and lemon/orange juice.
  • Beat on medium-high until light and fluffy, about 4 minutes, scraping down the sides and bottom of the bowl halfway through.
  • If needed, chill for 10 minutes in the fridge to stiffen slightly to spreadable consistency.

Video

Notes

  • How To Store: If you happen to end up with leftovers, you can store this low sugar carrot cake in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 1 week. After about 4 days, the cake will begin to dry out, so I would recommend freezing it after the 4-day mark. To freeze, place a piece of plastic wrap over the entire opening of your container, seal tight, label, date and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • To Make Muffins (or cupcakes): If you prefer individual low carb carrot cakes, divide the batter into a 12-cup muffin tin lined with parchment paper liners. Bake in a 350 degrees F oven in the center of the oven for 20-25 minutes. For paleo carrot cake cupcakes, pipe swirls of dairy-free frosting (or maple cream cheese frosting) on top with a piping bag and decorative pastry tip. And sprinkle it with walnuts.
  • If you do not mind a frosting with dairy, you can also use my Maple Cream Cheese Frosting recipe
  • The prep time below does not include the cooling time of the cake. Depending on the temperature of your kitchen, I would recommend adding at least 30 minutes for cooling time.
  • Baking powder: While some people use baking powder while observing a paleo diet, I know that some don’t. If that is you, in place of 1 teaspoon of baking powder, you can mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar.

Nutrition

Calories: 402kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 61mg | Sodium: 460mg | Potassium: 187mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 3775IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 2mg

This Paleo Carrot Cake recipe was originally published in April 7, 2020. It has been updated with a few more helpful notes and no changes to the originally published recipe on April 2nd, 2022.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/paleo-carrot-cake/feed/ 21
Oven Baked Chicken Parmesan https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-chicken-parmesan/ https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-chicken-parmesan/#comments Mon, 24 Jan 2022 09:41:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1283 I am a big fan of easy chicken recipes like chicken caprese sandwich, chicken bolognese, and baked bone-in chicken. They…]]>

I am a big fan of easy chicken recipes like chicken caprese sandwich, chicken bolognese, and baked bone-in chicken. They are lean, healthy, protein-packed, and satisfy the hunger in all of us. On those occasions when I find myself craving restaurant-style chicken parmesan, but without all the guilt and extra calories, I turn to this easy-baked chicken parm with panko.

This no-fry chicken parmesan recipe is crisp, crunchy, and cheesy—everything you want in a hearty Italian meal. Ready in about 45 minutes, it is the perfect healthy weeknight dinner that you can make for your family.

Oven Baked Chicken Parmesan topped off with tomato sauce and mozzarella on a wire rack.

Ingredients

The ingredient list for this oven fried chicken parmesan recipe is broken down into two parts – the chicken and the tomato sauce.

Ingredients placed on a marble backdrop from the top view.

For the chicken, gather together:

  • Panko breadcrumbs (aka Japanese breadcrumbs): While I think what makes this easy chicken parmesan recipe so special is the crunch factor coming from the panko breadcrumbs, you can use traditional or seasoned breadcrumbs (such as Italian breadcrumbs.) However, please be aware that it will not have that nice crispy coating after it is baked in the oven.
  • Olive oil
  • Parmesan cheese: I usually buy a block of Parmesan and grate it myself, but you can buy already grated Parmesan cheese from the store.
  • All-purpose flour
  • Kosher salt & black pepper
  • Garlic powder
  • Egg whites and water: Lightly whisked egg whites and water help coat the chicken breasts with the bread crumbs.
  • Chicken breasts
  • Shredded mozzarella cheese: Shredded mozzarella works best here, but you can swap out the mozzarella cheese for provolone, asiago, or fontina. You can also slice thin medallions of fresh mozzarella cheese to layer on top before melting.
  • Fresh basil
Marinara sauce ingredients from the top view.

When it comes to the tomato sauce, I took inspiration from my homemade tomato sauce recipe. You can follow the recipe as written or you can take a little help from the grocery store with store-bought jarred tomato or marinara sauce such as Ragu or Rao’s. If you decide to follow the recipe, you will need:

  • Canned crushed tomatoes
  • Olive oil
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Tomato paste
  • Red pepper flakes (optional)
  • Fresh basil

Ingredient Substitutions & Notes

  • Chicken Thighs: Multiple requests have been made to replace the chicken breasts with chicken thighs. I found that chicken breasts deliver better taste and texture, mainly because of their shape, so I wouldn’t recommend using chicken thighs for this recipe.
  • No eggs: If you prefer chicken parmesan without eggs, I recommend coating the chicken with melted butter or olive oil to help the breadcrumbs stick to it. Alternatively, for a lighter chicken parmesan, you can use a cup of milk.
  • Seasoning: Add 1-2 teaspoons of Italian seasoning for even more flavor.

How to Cut Chicken Breasts in Half?

This chicken parm recipe calls for three 6-8 ounces chicken breasts each. As a part of the ingredient prep, you need to cut chicken breasts in half. To do so, simply cut through the middle of the chicken breast horizontally (as if you were going to butterfly the chicken) while holding it firmly on the top of a cutting board. You will end up with two thinner chicken breasts.

Person cutting chicken breasts in half.

This creates chicken breast halves roughly the same size in thickness throughout. Even thickness promotes even (and faster) cooking every time.

How to Make Chicken Parmesan in Oven?

This is one of those baked homemade chicken parmesan recipes that is just as good as its original fried version. And making it can not be easier. Follow the steps below.

Person toasting breadcrumbs and brushing the wire rack with oil.
  1. Toast breadcrumbs: Place the panko bread crumbs in a large non-stick skillet with olive oil and cook until it is golden brown, stirring frequently, 9-10 minutes. Set aside to cool.
  2. Prep equipment: Preheat the oven to 450 F degrees. Cover a rimmed baking sheet with aluminum foil and place a wire rack on top. Spray it with olive oil spray or brush it with oil.
Breading station with panko crumbs, eggs, and flour from the top view.
  1. Set up the breading station: In the first shallow dish, mix flour, salt, black pepper, and garlic powder. In the second shallow dish, Place the egg whites and water and whisk until incorporated. In the third shallow dish, Stir in the Parmesan cheese with the now-cooled panko.
Person showing steps of how to make chicken parmesan with panko.
  1. Coat chicken: Pat-dry each chicken cutlet with a paper towel. Dredge the cutlets into flour (shake off the excess flour), dip chicken into the egg wash, and then lastly, coat with panko and Parmesan breadcrumbs. Press the breadcrumb mixture to coat. Place it on the wire rack. Repeat the same process for the rest of the chicken cutlets.
  2. Bake for 15-20 minutes, or the internal temperature of a chicken breast inserted with a digital thermometer reaches 165 degrees F.
Person showing how to make tomato sauce and how to layer chicken parmesan to cook it in the oven.
  1. While the chicken cooks, make the tomato sauce: Saute the olive oil, minced garlic cloves, tomato paste, and optional red pepper flakes in a large skillet over medium heat. Stir in the crushed tomatoes and season with salt and black pepper to taste. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the sauce is thickened, about 15-20 minutes. Off the heat, stir in the fresh basil.
  2. Assemble chicken parmesan: Once the chicken is cooked, remove it from the oven. Place 2 tablespoons of tomato sauce on each chicken cutlet and top it off with 2 tablespoons (or more) of mozzarella cheese. Return to the oven and broil until the cheese melts, about 5 more minutes.
  3. Serve: Sprinkle each chicken cutlet with ribbons of basil and grated cheese and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

This healthy chicken parmesan is best the day it is made. However, if you are short on time, you can make it ahead by following the steps below. Additionally, below are the steps for storing, freezing, and reheating the leftovers.

  • To Make Ahead: You can make the tomato sauce up to 4 days in advance and store in a tight-fitting jar. I would recommend working on the rest of the recipe on the day you are preparing to make it.
  • Storage Instructions: Bring breaded chicken cutlets to room temperature and place them in an airtight container. Store in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. When ready to serve, place chicken parm in an oven that is preheated to 350 F for 10-15 minutes or until it is warmed thoroughly. If you have it, you can add more cheese and tomato sauce on top.
  • Freezer: Place the boneless baked chicken breasts in a freezer-safe container with strips of parchment paper between each layer. Freeze for up to 1 month. The tomato sauce can be stored in a freezer-safe glass jar and frozen for up to 4 months. With this being said, please know that the thawed and heated panko chicken parmesan will not be as crispy as the one that is freshly baked.

What To Serve It With?

You can easily turn this baked panko chicken parmesan into a whole meal by serving it with a number of dishes. I rounded up all my favorite side dishes in a round-up post and published it under What To Eat with Chicken Parmesan, but here are a few sides to get you started:

Expert Tips

While this recipe is pretty straightforward and easy to make, I learned a few things during my recipe testing. Below are a few helpful tips to help you make the best chicken parmesan on your first try:

  • Set a wire rack over the baking sheet: Do not skip this step! Doing so ensures the hot air from the oven circulates all the way around the surface of the chicken. Be sure to brush it with oil to avoid the breaded chicken breasts sticking to the wire rack. I use and recommend this wire rack (aka cooling rack) (affiliate link).
  • Prepare your breading station before you start: For a seamless operation, it is best to have your breading station in order before you start. Once you have it ready, most of the work is already done.
  • Save the rest of the tomato sauce: The tomato sauce in the recipe below makes more than you need to top the parmesan chicken. You can use the rest as a pasta sauce.
  • Making it for a crowd? Double or triple the recipe for a healthy and homemade Italian dinner party.
  • Serving kids? To make it kid-friendly, cut the chicken breast halves into thinner strips (similar to chicken tenders) for a fun and festive meal for the whole family. I would even recommend keeping some extra sauce on the side for dipping.
Baked Parmesan Panko Chicken from close up.

FAQs

What is chicken parmesan (chicken parmigiana)?

Chicken Parmesan is a dish consisting of breaded chicken cutlets covered in tomato sauce and mozzarella, parmesan, or provolone cheese.

Is there a difference between chicken parmesan and chicken parmigiana?

No, chicken parmesan and chicken parmigiana are just different names for the same recipe. Chicken Parmesan is the American version of Italian Chicken Parmigiana – parmigiana referring to “in the style of Parma”.

Is chicken parmesan fried?

Yes, chicken parmesan is traditionally pan-fried, or even deep-fried in some restaurants today. Our non-fried chicken parmesan recipe gives it a healthy twist in the oven.

What kind of cheese goes on chicken parmesan?

Chicken parmesan can be topped with shredded mozzarella, parmesan, or provolone cheese. Some fun variations include asiago and fontina cheese as well.

Is baked breaded chicken healthy?

Yes, baked breaded chicken is healthier than pan-fried or deep-fried chicken because it relies on the oven’s heat and uses far less oil.

How to make breaded chicken crispy in oven?

Two things will help make breaded chicken crispy in the oven: First, set a wire rack over an aluminum-lined baking sheet, and second, liberally spray the tops of the chicken with cooking spray.

Should I bake chicken parmesan covered or uncovered?

Baked chicken parmesan should be cooked uncovered so that it bakes up to golden brown and crispy.

What temperature should I use to cook chicken parmesan in the oven and how long does it take?

I follow a chicken parm bake temp of 450 degrees F for fast and speedy chicken that’s baked through in 15-20 minutes. Times will vary depending on the thickness of the chicken.

Other Chicken Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

If you try this Oven Baked Chicken Parmesan recipe or any other one of our easy chicken recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked Chicken Parmesan recipe fresh out of the oven
Print

Oven Baked Chicken Parmesan Recipe

This delicious Oven Baked Chicken Parmesan recipe is made with panko. Unlike the traditional Parmesan Chicken recipe, this version is made without frying. Event hough it is not fried it is still super moist and flavorful.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 310kcal

Ingredients

For The Chicken

  • 1 1/2 cups panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 oz. grated Parmesan cheese (approximately 1/2 cup)
  • 1/2 cup all-purpose flour
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 1/2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • 3 egg whites
  • 1 tablespoon water
  • Vegetable cooking spray
  • 3 chicken breasts boneless and skinless – sliced into cutlets – (6-8 ounces each)
  • 3/4 cup mozzarella cheese shredded
  • 1 tablespoon minced fresh basil

For The Tomato Sauce

  • 2 cans crushed tomatoes (14 oz. each)
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • 1/8 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 tablespoon minced fresh basil leaves

Instructions

  • Place the panko in a large non-stick skillet with olive oil and cook until it is golden brown, stirring frequently, 9-10 minutes. Set aside and let it cool.
  • Preheat the oven to 450 F Degrees. Cover a rimmed baking sheet with aluminum foil and place a wire rack on top. Spray it with vegetable oil cooking spray.
  • Arrange 3 shallow bowls (or pie plates) side by side. First shallow dish: Mix flour, garlic powder, salt and black pepper. Second shallow dish: Place the egg whites and water and whisk until incorporated. Third shallow dish: Stir in the Parmesan cheese with, now cooled, panko.
  • Pat-dry each chicken cutlet with a paper towel.
  • First, dredge the cutlets into flour (shake off the excess flour), second, dip into the egg whites and then lastly, coat with panko and Parmesan breadcrumbs. Press the panko mixture to coat. Place it on the wire rack.
  • Lightly spray the top of each chicken with vegetable oil spray prior to placing it in the oven. Bake for 15-20 minutes or the internal temperature of a chicken breast inserted with a thermometer reaches 165 degrees F.
  • While it is baking, make the tomato sauce: Cook the oil, garlic, tomato paste, red pepper flakes in a large skillet (in medium heat), until it coats the bottom of the pan. Stir in the crushed tomatoes and season it with salt and pepper. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the sauce is thickened, about 15-20 minutes. Off the heat, stir in the basil.
  • Once the chicken is cooked, remove it from the oven. Place 2 tablespoons of the tomato sauce on each chicken cutlet and top it off with 2 tablespoons (or more) mozzarella cheese. Return it into the oven and broil until the cheese melts, for 5 more minutes.
  • To serve, sprinkle each chicken cutlet with ribbons of basil and Parmesan cheese.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This quick chicken parmesan recipe makes 6 pieces, ideal for serving 6 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Tomato sauce: For an even quicker dinner, you can use your favorite store-bought tomato, pasta, or marinara sauce.
  • Use the rest of the tomato sauce later: The tomato sauce makes more than you need to top off the parmesan chicken. You can use the rest as a pasta sauce.
  • To Make Ahead: You can make the tomato sauce up to 4 days in advance and store it in a tight-fitting jar. I would recommend working on the rest of the recipe on the day you are preparing to make it.
  • Storage Instructions: Bring breaded chicken cutlets to room temperature and place them in an airtight container. Store in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. When ready to serve, place chicken parm in the oven preheated to 350 F for 10-15 minutes or until it is warmed thoroughly. If you have it, you can add more cheese and tomato sauce on top.
  • Freezer: Place the boneless baked chicken breasts in a freezer-safe container with strips of parchment paper between each layer. Freeze for up to 1 month. The tomato sauce can be stored in a freezer-safe glass jar and frozen for up to 4 months. With this being said, please know that the thawed and heated panko chicken parmesan will not be as crispy as the one that is freshly baked.

Nutrition

Calories: 310kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 962mg | Potassium: 742mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 501IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 198mg | Iron: 3mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-chicken-parmesan/feed/ 63
Garlic Butter Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/garlic-butter-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/garlic-butter-green-beans/#comments Mon, 17 Jan 2022 22:25:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=47844 If you are new to cooking green beans, be sure to check out my guide on How To Boil Green…]]>

If you are new to cooking green beans, be sure to check out my guide on How To Boil Green Beans. Knowing the basics will help you make the best garlic butter green beans on your first try. And if you are a fan of air fryers, you might also like my Air Fryer Green Beans and Green Bean Fries in Air Fryer recipes.

If you are a fan of simple side dishes like this one, be sure to check out our library of Vegetable Side Dishes.

Garlic Butter Green Beans in an oval pan being served by a person

Why Make This Recipe

Sautéed green beans with garlic is the perfect side dish that keeps on giving. Perfect for parties, holidays, and even weeknights, this easy stove-top recipe will astound you with its flavor and adaptability.

  • This quick and easy green bean recipe uses just a handful of pantry-ready ingredients. Plus, you can even do most of the preparation in advance.
  • Perfect green beans for a crowd, this savory side is one of the best green bean recipes for Thanksgiving dinner, potlucks, and parties. Double the recipe, and you’re good to go!
  • This simple green bean recipe bursts with rich, grassy, and robust flavors. Even better, you can customize this versatile side dish with dozens of tasty toppings.

Ingredients

To make garlic string beans, gather fresh green beans, unsalted butter, minced garlic cloves, kosher salt, and black ground pepper. You can also add lemon zest if desired.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view

A Few Substitutions:

  • Olive oil: I know the recipe is called garlic butter green beans, but an equal amount of olive oil can be used instead of butter. 
  • Fresh Garlic vs. Garlic Powder: I’ll be honest, fresh garlic cloves is the way to go but if you are in a pinch you can also use garlic powder.
  • Butter: If you want to take things up a notch, you can also make this easy green bean dish with my garlic butter recipe.

How to Make?

Cooking green beans on the stove is a piece of cake when you have my foolproof guide. This garlic string beans recipe comes together in less than 20 minutes with seven basic steps.

How to cook green beans
  1. Boil the saltwater: In a large pot, mix 2 tablespoons of salt into 3 quarts of water. Bring the water to a boil over medium-high heat.
  2. Prepare the ice bath: Fill a large bowl with ice and water. Then, line a sheet pan with paper towels (or a clean kitchen towel) and set both aside.
  3. Boil the green beans: Add the green beans to the boiling water and cook until crisp, tender and al dente (5 minutes).
  4. Blanch the green beans: Transfer the green beans to the ice bath using a slotted spoon or spider strainer. Let them cool for about 5 minutes or until they reach room temperature. Then, drain the bowl and transfer the beans to the lined sheet pan. Dry them as much as possible.
Person making garlic green beans
  1. Saute the garlic: Melt butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the garlic and cook for 30 seconds, stirring constantly.
  2. Saute the green beans: Add the green beans and stir so that each stalk is fully coated with the butter mixture. Saute until the green beans are softened yet tender (2-3 minutes), being sure to turn them often.
  3. Season & Serve: If desired, add the lemon zest one minute before the cooking is complete. Transfer the beans to a plate and serve. 

Do I Have to Blanch Green Beans Before Sauteing?

No, you don’t have to blanch your green beans before sautéeing them. Blanching green beans—or boiling them for a short time before cooling them in an ice bath—often helps preserve the vegetable’s bright green color and crisp, tender texture. It also shortens the sauteing time. For this reason, I recommend blanching before cooking green beans with garlic and butter.

However, those who prefer not to blanch their green beans can saute their veggies without this extra step. With a full recipe for sautéed string beans with garlic, you can simplify your cooking process and still have a succulent side.

How to Season Green Beans?

Ever wonder how to make green beans more interesting? You’re not alone! Here are the most mouthwatering toppings to use when you want something to add to green beans for flavor.

  • Add a squeeze of lemon juice or lemon zest to make lemon garlic green beans that will tantalize your taste buds.
  • Nuts, sliced almonds, and pine nuts are classic additions to whole green beans. Add a nutty sweetness to your bland beans for delicious results.
  • A drizzle of my go-to Lemon Vinaigrette will transform your dull green beans into a salad bursting with tangy flavor. You can even use vegan butter for an easy vegan recipe.
  • Lemon Pepper is a good seasoning for green beans because it brightens their grassy notes with a citrusy zing. 
  • A sprinkle of parmesan cheese is just the ingredient to give your green beans a sharp, nutty flavor that no one can resist.
Easy green bean recipe in the pan with a wooden spoon on the side

Make Ahead, Storage, & Reheating Instructions

Whether you want to cut down on preparation time or free up counter space, garlic butter green beans is the perfect dish to make ahead. 

  • Make ahead: To make ahead green beans for a crowd, parboil your green beans ahead of time, dry them off completely, and store them in the fridge in an airtight container. Then, right before serving, heat the butter and garlic in a large skillet. Add the green beans and stir until cooked through and thoroughly coated in the butter mixture.
  • Store: If you have any leftover green beans (not sautéed), dry them off after parboiling and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. If they are sautéed, you don’t need to dry them off before storing them.
  • Reheat: To reheat plain green beans, add a little bit of water to their container and microwave them for a few minutes until hot. You can also saute them with a tiny bit of water on the stovetop. If the green beans are sautéed, you don’t need to add water before reheating.

Expert Tips

  • Double the recipe: Whether you’re cooking green bean recipes for Thanksgiving dinner or a party potluck, it never hurts to make extras. You can easily double (or triple!) this easy green bean recipe to feed a crowd.
  • Add flavor: The best way to cook green beans is by adding enough flavor. Two tablespoons of unsalted butter and two garlic cloves are an excellent place to start for one lb. of green beans. However, you can always use more garlic and more butter if you want a more sumptuous flavor.
  • French Green Beans: The recipe below is made using regular green beans, if you are using French beans (aka Haricot verts) please know that the blanching time should be no more than 2 minutes as they are usually thinner and more delicate texture. 

What to Serve it With?

One of my favorite things about this garlic green beans recipe is how it makes the perfect accompaniment with so many dishes. You can balance nearly any meal with this easy side dish.

FAQs

Want to know how to make sautéed string beans with garlic like a pro? I’ve answered all your biggest questions about this side dish recipe right here.

  • How to make green beans taste good? To make flavorful green beans, cook them until they are crisp and tender. Then, saute them in butter and garlic for added richness. Add more flavor with seasonings like salt, black pepper, red pepper flakes, and lemon zest. For additional complexity, try topping your green beans with roasted nuts, like sliced almonds or pine nuts.
  • How long to blanch green beans before sauteing? Usually, 5-7 minutes are sufficient to soften your green beans while keeping them crisp and tender. However, you can always cook your beans for a longer or shorter period depending on your preference. Just take a stalk out and give it a taste when you think your green beans are ready.

Other Similar Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you are serving this simple side dish with your Thanksgiving turkey for your holiday meal or with Roast Chicken on a Tuesday night, it is guaranteed to impress. Below are a few other similar vegetable dishes you might enjoy:

If you try this Garlic Butter Green Beans recipe or any other Vegetable Side Dishes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Garlic Butter Green Beans in an oval dish with spoon on the side
Print

Garlic Butter Green Beans Recipe

Made in about 15 minutes, this Garlic Butter Green Beans is the perfect side dish for Thanksgiving or on any night of the week.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 88kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound fresh green beans aka string beans, ends trimmed
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt + more for seasoning the boiling water
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest – Optional

Instructions

  • Place 6 cups of water and 2 tablespoons salt in a large pot over medium-high heat. Cover and bring it to a boil.
  • Meanwhile, fill a large bowl with ice and water. Line a sheet pan with a few sheets of paper towel. Set them aside.
  • Carefully add the green beans into the boiling water. Cook until crisp and tender, 5 minutes.
  • Using a slotted spoon or a spider strainer, transfer the green beans into the ice water. Let them cool to room temperature completely for about 5 minutes. Drain and then transfer on to the sheet pan lined with paper towels. Dry as much as you can.
  • Melt the butter in a large skillet (10 or 12 inch) over medium heat. Add the garlic and cook, stirring constantly, 30 seconds.
  • Add in the green beans and gently stir to make sure they are coated with the butter and garlic mixture. Sautee, turning often, for 2-3 minutes or until green beans are softened but still tender.
  • If preferred, toss in the lemon zest at the last minute. Transfer the beans on a plate and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Make ahead: To make ahead green beans for a crowd, parboil your green beans ahead of time, dry them off completely, and store them in the fridge in an airtight container. Then, right before serving, heat the butter and garlic in a large skillet. Add the green beans and stir until cooked through and thoroughly coated in the butter mixture.
  • Store: If you have any leftover green beans (not sautéed), dry them off after parboiling and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. If they are sautéed, you don’t need to dry them off before storing them.
  • Reheat: To reheat plain green beans, add a little bit of water to their container and microwave them for a few minutes until hot. You can also saute them with a tiny bit of water on the stovetop. If the green beans are sautéed, you don’t need to add water before reheating.
  • Double the recipe: Whether you’re cooking green bean recipes for Thanksgiving dinner or a party potluck, it never hurts to make extras. You can easily double (or triple!) this easy green bean recipe to feed a crowd.
  • Add flavor: The best way to cook green beans is by adding enough flavor. Two tablespoons of unsalted butter and two garlic cloves are an excellent place to start for one lb. of green beans. However, you can always use more garlic and more butter if you want a more sumptuous flavor.
    •  

Nutrition

Calories: 88kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 299mg | Potassium: 249mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 958IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/garlic-butter-green-beans/feed/ 4
Roasted Carrot Hummus https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-carrot-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-carrot-hummus/#comments Tue, 12 Oct 2021 15:48:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14848 Today’s recipe, Roasted Carrot Hummus, is the newest addition to our collection of easy appetizers. Similar to some of the…]]>

Today’s recipe, Roasted Carrot Hummus, is the newest addition to our collection of easy appetizers. Similar to some of the other reader favorites like my Baked Goat Cheese Dip, Italian Bread Dipping Oil, and Muhammara, it is ready in less than 20 minutes.

Roasted Carrot Hummus in a bowl with vegetables and olives around it

Why Should You Make This Recipe?

  • Next-level flavor: The caramelized flavor of roasted carrots mixed in with tahini, chickpeas, and a squeeze of lemon juice is surprisingly flavorful and can be a great alternative to the classic hummus recipe with only one quick step (aka adding roasted carrots)
  • Easy to customize: While the recipe as written is great, if you are having to accommodate different diet restrictions, perhaps requiring it to be made without tahini or chickpeas (for Whole 30), you can easily make a few ingredient swaps to customize it to your needs. It is also vegan, gluten-free and paleo friendly.
  • Versatile: Entertain in style by serving it with crudite vegetables (like I did) or simply use it to spread your morning/avocado toast for a delicious breakfast.

List of Ingredients:

To make this carrot hummus recipe you will need three sets of ingredients. The list below might look long but I bet you have all of them in your pantry.

For Roasting Carrots:

In terms of veggies, you will need carrots and whole garlic cloves. Make sure to wash and chop your carrots and don’t be afraid to mix them up with some colorful carrots such as purple or yellow. 

the ingredients for roasted carrots are laid out on a marble backdrop

I like to cut them into equal (2-inch) pieces to make sure they roast evenly. You will also need a few garlic cloves, olive oil, ground cumin, and salt and black pepper.

For The Hummus:

Regular hummus ingredients are portioned out and placed on a marble backdrop

For the hummus ingredients, gather tahini (aka sesame paste), olive oil, fresh lemon juice, water, salt and black pepper, and chickpeas.

For The Toppings:

You can certainly serve this roasted carrot hummus without any toppings, but toppings are usually the fun part. A few of my favorites include black or white sesame seeds, chopped fresh herbs like parsley or dill, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How To Make It?

carrots being roasted on a sheet pan
  1. Roast the vegetables: Arrange carrot and garlic cloves in a single layer on a baking sheet. Drizzle it with olive oil and sprinkle it with salt and pepper. Roast in a preheated 400 degrees F oven for 30-35 minutes. Set aside to cool.
person showing steps of making carrot hummus in four photos
  1. Prep the tahini mixture: Meanwhile, whisk together tahini, olive oil, lemon juice, water, salt and pepper in a small bowl. Place roasted carrots, garlic and drained chickpeas in a food processor.
  2. Process: Pulse 4-5 times to break them. Then while the machine is running, pour the tahini dressing through the opening. 
  3. Scrape: Stop and scrape the sides of the bowl to incorporate any unmixed chunks. Give it a taste and add more seasoning if necessary.
  4. Garnish & Serve: Transfer into a bowl, drizzle it with a tablespoon of olive oil and sprinkle it with fresh parsley.
roasted carrot hummus with veggies around it

Variations:

What I love most about this Roasted Carrot Hummus is that you can easily accommodate various dietary needs with a few simple ingredient adjustments. Here are a few variations I tried:

  • Carrot Hummus without Chickpeas: Not allowed to eat legumes because you’re following the Whole30 diet? No worries! Simply replace the can of chickpeas with 2 or 3 more carrots or a ½ cup of cauliflower florets. 
  • Carrot Hummus without Tahini: If you’re not crazy about the taste of sesame paste, use an equal amount of unsalted and unsweetened peanut or almond butter in place of tahini.
  • Carrot Turmeric Hummus: For a little extra boost of seasoning, add ½ teaspoon of dried turmeric but keep in mind that a little goes a long way.
  • Moroccan Spiced Carrot Hummus: If you want to add a unique flavor straight from the Middle East, try adding a mix of ¼ teaspoon each of ground cinnamon, ginger, coriander, and all spice to the hummus while blending in the food processor.
  • Carrot Sriracha Hummus: Like your dip with a little bit of kick? Try mixing in 1 tablespoon of sriracha!
  • Switch up the flavors with toppings: Inspired by the way I serve my Whole Roasted Carrots, you can top it off with crumbled feta, fresh dill, and pomegranate seeds.

How and What to Serve With?

There are so many options when it comes to serving this carrot hummus dip and no wrong way to eat it! Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve this appetizer:

Carrot hummus is being served as a part of cheese platter
  • Serve it with crackers & raw vegetables: Pita chips, crackers, root vegetable chips, raw veggies (like snap peas, cauliflower, and broccoli) provide a colorful serving option.
  • Serve it as a part of a charcuterie board: Present this homemade hummus as part of a meat and cheese platter for a unique spin on an appetizer display.
  • Use it as sandwich spread: On the next day, use it to spread over toasted bread and top it off with sliced avocado for a delicious vegan breakfast.

How To Store, Freeze, and Thaw

  • To Store: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container (make sure that it is at room temperature)  and store in the fridge for upto 3 days. 
  • To Freeze: As long as it is kept in an airtight container, carrot hummus will keep fresh for upto a month.
  • To Thaw: Thaw in the fridge overnight. You may have to give it a stir before serving as ingredients tend to separate. Thawed out hummus is good for up to 5 days and should not be refrozen.

Expert Tips

  • Chunky or smooth: If you prefer chunkier hummus, keep an eye on the food processor and stop it before it becomes too well blended. For fluffy hummus with a smooth texture, allow the processor to mix the ingredients for a longer period of time. 
  • Scrape the bowl: Like it is with any dip recipe, it is a good idea to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times to make sure it is processing evenly.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste before serving and season accordingly.
  • Don’t have a food processor? While a food processor is your best option, a high speed blender (such as Vitamix) will work as well. However, since they are more powerful it is a good idea to keep a close eye on it as it blends.

FAQs

Do I have to peel the carrots when making this carrot hummus recipe?

This is a personal choice. If you wash it well and scrub it lightly with a kitchen brush to get rid of any of the debris, you do not need to peel the carrots, especially if your carrots are organic.

How many calories are in carrot hummus?

A serving of this carrot hummus is around 188 calories.

Is carrot hummus Keto-diet friendly?

Hummus is considered keto-friendly. However, due to the high carb content of chickpeas and carrots, they should be consumed in small amounts.

Other Carrot Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you are a fan of Food Network / Giada’s Carrot Hummus or have always loved Bon Appetite’s Roasted Carrot Hummus recipe, I hope you give my version a try. I know those are favorited by many people but I promise you that my version is just as good, if not better.

And if you have some leftover carrots, here are a few more recipes to try”

[/su_note]
roasted carrot hummus in a bowl close up from the top view
Print

Roasted Carrot Hummus Recipe

This Roasted carrot hummus has all of the creaminess of classic hummus, but with the volume turned up. The sweetnees coming from caramelized roasted carrots mixed with tahini and chickpeas take the simple hummus recipe to a whole new level. Serve this easy dip as an appetizer or as a part of your meat and cheese boards.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 188kcal

Ingredients

For the Roasted Carrots:

  • 8-10 medium carrots scrubbed well and cut into big chunks ( about 1 1/4 pounds)
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground

For the Hummus:

  • 2 tablespoons tahini sesame paste
  • 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoons water more if needed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¾ cup canned chickpeas rinsed and drained

Optional Garnish:

  • 1 teaspoon black or white sesame seeds
  • Drizzle of olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon chopped parsley

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Place the carrots and garlic onto the prepared sheet, drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with ground cumin, salt and pepper. Roast for 30 minutes. Let them cool for 10 minutes.
  • Whisk together the tahini, olive oil, lemon juice, water, salt and pepper in a bowl until thoroughly combined.
  • Transfer the roasted carrots and garlic into the bowl of a food processor. Add in the chickpeas. Pulse 4-5 times, scrape the sides of the bowl and then turn the processor on. As it runs, drizzle the tahini mix through the tube. Let it run until the hummus is creamy. You might have to stop and scrape the sides of the bowl a few times.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in more salt and pepper if necessary.
  • Garnish with a drizzle of olive oil, sesame seeds, and parsley if using.

Notes

  • This carrot hummus recipe yields 1 1/2 – 2 cups of carrot hummus.
  • To Store: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container (make sure that it is at room temperature)  and store in the fridge for up to 3 days. 
  • To Freeze: As long as it is kept in an airtight container, carrot hummus will keep fresh for up to a month.
  • To Thaw: Thaw in the fridge overnight. You may have to give it a stir before serving as ingredients tend to separate. Thawed out hummus is good for up to 5 days and should not be refrozen.

Nutrition

Calories: 188kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 503mg | Potassium: 330mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 13598IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-carrot-hummus/feed/ 29
Overnight Muesli – The Original Overnight Oats https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-apple-muesli/ https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-apple-muesli/#comments Wed, 15 Sep 2021 15:25:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=12054 Why You Should Try This Recipe? You won’t believe how much there is to love about this healthy overnight muesli.…]]>

Why You Should Try This Recipe?

You won’t believe how much there is to love about this healthy overnight muesli. Nutritious, fruity, and delicious to boot, this simple breakfast, adapted from my Homemade Muesli Recipe, is a great way to use uncooked oats. It is definitely worth adding to your collection of breakfast bowl recipes.

  • Only 10 minutes of prep and 3 simple steps are necessary to make this simple vegan breakfast.
  • Endlessly customizable, this easy recipe can be made in a thousand different ways. Whether you want to make dairy-free overnight oats or use a variety of fresh fruit, there’s a version for you!
  • This healthy breakfast recipe will keep you full and satisfied all morning, helping you feel full without sacrificing an ounce of flavor—just like my recipes for Fruit and Yogurt Parfait, Apple Cinnamon Oats and Chia Seed Oatmeal!
  • Packed with fiber and antioxidants, oats are healthy whole grains that have even been proven to lower cholesterol and improve blood sugar.
Overnight muesli in a glass garnished with fruit

What Is Bircher Muesli?

Bircher muesli is what many consider to be the first overnight oats recipe. Developed by 20th-century Swiss physician Maximilian Bircher-Benner, this dish was created to support the health of patients with an uber-nutritious mix of filling and natural ingredients.

The original Bircher muesli recipe calls for raw oats and grated apple, mixed with condensed milk, nuts, lemon juice, and honey. Since then, however, people have found hundreds of delicious ways to customize this popular breakfast, from making overnight muesli vegan to incorporating seasonal fruit, aromatic spices, and even homemade sweeteners!

Ingredient Notes

The traditional Swiss bircher muesli recipe consists of rolled oats, grated apple, condensed milk, nuts, lemon, and honey. However, use my simple muesli formula below for endlessly customizable (and always scrumptious!) flavor combinations:

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out
  • Oats: You’ll need old-fashioned rolled oats for this recipe. I would not recommend using other types of oats, like quick-cooking oats as it would deliver a mushy end product.
  • Seed and nuts: I used chia seeds and sliced almonds in my version. However, hemp seeds, flax seeds, and even leftover almond pulp are other delicious options.
  • Milk: You can choose your favorite milk to use in your muesli mixture. I made my Bircher oats with almond milk, though oat milk and cashew milk also work for dairy-free overnight oatmeal. And if you want you can have cow’s milk as well. 
  • Yogurt (optional): Vegan yogurt—such as almond yogurt—or Greek yogurt both work to give this dish its irresistible tanginess. Plus, you can play around with which flavors you use, like vanilla, peach, and raspberry.
  • Fruit: Any fruit will work for your Bircher muesli ingredients, whether it’s mixed in or added on top! I used shredded apple, but you can also use anything from fresh berries to a ripe banana, or even a few tablespoons of my homemade Unsweetened Applesauce.
  • Sweetener: Maple syrup, brown sugar, and a drizzle of honey are all options to give your overnight muesli recipe a sweet flavor.
  • Optional spices: I used ground cinnamon in my muesli. However, cardamom, nutmeg, and pumpkin pie spice can also give your oats a robust flavor.
  • Other optional toppings: Nut butter—such as peanut butter and almond butter—pack this dish with rich, creamy protein. You can also include fresh herbs, like mint, for color and taste.

How To Make

Effortless and budget-friendly, this soaked muesli recipe is just what you need on busy weekday mornings. In 10 minutes and 3 steps, your hearty breakfast will be ready to eat the next day!

Steps showing how to make overnight muesli in four images
  1. Combine the ingredients: In a large bowl, mix oats, shredded apples, chia seeds, sliced almonds, almond milk, almond yogurt, cinnamon, and maple syrup.
  2. Give it a stir: Stir to make sure all ingredients are fully incorporated.
  3. Refrigerate: Once the ingredients are fully combined, cover the bowl and refrigerate it overnight.
  4. Serve: The next morning, equally divide the soaked muesli among four bowls. If desired, top each off with berries, fresh mint leaves, and a drizzle of maple syrup.

How to Store?

  • Storage: To store your muesli yogurt breakfast, place the dish in a large airtight container and keep it in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. You can also store your muesli in mason jars for an easy grab-and-go option. 
  • Freeze: You can freeze this muesli recipe in an airtight container for upto a month.
Muesli yogurt breakfast in glass topped off with fruit from top view

FAQs:

Overnight muesli with almond milk is a cinch to make, but these helpful tips make it even easier. Turn your old-fashioned oats into a delicious breakfast every time without the extra guesswork.

Do you eat overnight oats cold?

Many prefer eating this dish straight from the fridge for a cold muesli breakfast. However, you can also make your morning extra cozy by heating this dish before you serve it.

Do you heat up overnight muesli?

It’s up to you whether you eat your muesli hot or cold. To heat it, either pour in some hot milk of your choice or microwave the dish for 30 seconds at a time until it reaches your desired temperature. Just remember to stir!

How long can you keep overnight muesli in the refrigerator?

Overnight muesli is good for up to 4 days in the refrigerator when stored in an airtight container.

What type of oats to use for overnight oats?

I recommend using old-fashioned rolled oats for this recipe. Because instant and quick oats are rolled extra-thin, they often get too mushy. And if you are following a gluten-free diet, be sure to purchase gluten-free certified oats.

Expert Tips:

  • Multiply the recipe: If you are serving this to a crowd feel free to multiply it as many times as you want. Or you can do what I do and make a few bacthes on Sunday night and enjoy it throughout the week.
  • Mason Jars to the rescue: For a quick grab&go breakfast divide your muesli in mason jars and be sure to tighten it with the lid.
  • Additional protein: For some extra protein, feel free to top it off with a dollap of your favorite nut butter.
  • Have nut alergies? Omit almonds and use sunflower seeds instead.

Other Healthy Breakfast Bowl Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Overnight Muesli recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Overnight Muesli in a glass topped off with fruit
Print

Overnight Muesli Recipe

This Overnight Muesli is the original overnight oats recipe. Made with almond milk, rolled oats, and chia seeds, it is endlessly customizable and easy to make. With only 5-minutes of hands on time, it makes a healthy, nutritious, and filling breakfast that you can serve your family.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Overnight rest 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 234kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Shredded apples from 1 large or 2 small apples
  • 1 cup old fashioned rolled oats gluten-free certified
  • 2 tablespoons chia seeds
  • 2-3 tablespoons sliced almonds or more if you want
  • 1 cup unsweetened almond milk or any other milk of your choice
  • 2/3 cup unsweetened almond yogurt or any other yogurt of your choice, like soy, coconut, milk, etc.
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • ½ cup mixed berries or any other seasonal fruit
  • a few fresh mint leaves as garnish optional

Instructions

  • Place the shredded apples, oats, chia seeds, sliced almonds, almond milk, almond yogurt, cinnamon, and maple syrup in a bowl. Mix to combine.
  • Cover and refrigerate overnight.
  • When ready to eat, divide the muesli in between 4 bowls, top them off with berries and garnish with a few fresh mint leaves.

Video

Notes

  • This recipe would serve 4 people in 1/2 to 2/3 cup portions. If you are serving a crowd, feel free to double the recipe.
  • The beauty of this recipe is that it is endlessly customizable. In place of milk and yogurt, you can use any plant-based milk or yogurt you like (or even cows milk and yogurt). Similarly, you can use any nuts and fruits. 
  • How long does muesli last? As long as it is kept in an airtight container, this healthy overnight muesli will keep fresh for up to 4 days.
  • Do you eat overnight oats cold? Many prefer eating this dish straight from the fridge for a cold muesli breakfast. However, you can also make your morning extra cozy by heating this dish before you serve it.

Nutrition

Calories: 234kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 140mg | Potassium: 263mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 49IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 203mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-apple-muesli/feed/ 24
Mexican Stuffed Peppers https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-stuffed-peppers/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-stuffed-peppers/#comments Tue, 13 Jul 2021 15:19:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25177 In today’s post, I am adding a new recipe to my collection of Easy Mexican Dishes with this Mexican Inspired…]]>

In today’s post, I am adding a new recipe to my collection of Easy Mexican Dishes with this Mexican Inspired Stuffed Peppers recipe. If you are like me, cook stuffed peppers regularly but in need of a bit of a new twist to jazz it up, you will like my Mexican twist to this summer classic.

They are stuffed with two of my favorite ingredients – black beans and corn. The addition of ground beef gives these Mexican-inspired stuffed peppers that extra boost of protein, while the cumin and coriander provide those Mexican flavors I’ve been craving! This is a great recipe that you can add to your collection of dinner and beef recipes as you are planning your weekly dinner menu.

Mexican Stuffed Peppers in a white skillet from top view

Plus, this post includes all my tips on how to pick, prepare, stuff, and cook bell peppers for the most delicious (and foolproof) stuffed bell pepper recipe.

Mexican Stuffed Peppers recipe photographed right after it came out of the oven.

Ingredients:

The ingredients list for this Mexican peppers recipe might look long at a first glance but they are simple every day ingredients you probably already have on hand.

Ingredients for stuffed capsium recipe
  • Sweet, Summer Yellow, Orange or Red Bell Peppers: While shopping for peppers, I recommend picking ones that are in similar size so that they will cook at the same time.
  • Yellow Onion
  • Ground Cumin and Coriander – I used two of my favorite Mexican spices but you can also use your favorite taco seasoning
  • Ground Beef, I used the 85% lean variety
  • Garlic
  • Canned, Diced Tomatoes
  • Canned Black Beans, rinsed and drained
  • Fresh Corn Kernels, but frozen can be substituted
  • Cooked White Rice or Quinoa
  • Fresh Cilantro, or Parsley if you don’t like the flavor of cilantro
  • Shredded Cheddar Cheese, I prefer White Cheddar, but any version will do

How To Make This Recipe?

This Mexican Stuffed Bell Pepper recipe can be made in 3 folds.

First, prepare the bell peppers.

How to Prepare The Bell Peppers?

To prepare bell peppers: 

  • Cut the tops of the peppers with a small paring knife and set aside. Remove the seeds and ribs (aka white membranes) with a large spoon and discard, as you will no longer need the insides. 
  • Lightly salt each pepper with a pinch of salt. Alternatively, you can brush the insights lightly with olive oil as well.
  • Chop the remaining tops to use in the filling. 
  • Place peppers cut side up in a baking dish or cast-iron skillet, fitting in as many as you can (my skillet only fit 9, but if you can get 10, go for it!).
person showing how to cut bell peppers for stuffing

Second, preheat the oven to 375 degrees and prepare the filling. In a large skillet, heat the oil over medium heat. Place the chopped onions, peppers, cumin, coriander, salt, and pepper in the pot, and cook, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables have softened, about 5-7 minutes. 

Stir in the ground meat, using a wooden spoon to break up any large pieces, and cook until everything is combined and meat is cooked, 6-8 minutes. Add the garlic and cook for 30 seconds. Stir in the diced tomatoes, black beans, and corn, put the lid on, bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, and let it cook for 3-4 minutes. 

Taste the beef mixture for seasoning and adjust, if necessary. Off the heat, add the cooked rice and cilantro and give it a gentle toss.

The filling made with ground beef, corn, and black beans for Mexican Stuffed Peppers

Finally, assemble the peppers. Divide the filling amongst the peppers, filling each pepper as evenly as you can, and top each pepper with a generous amount of shredded cheese.

Fill the bottom of the pan with a cup of water (more on that later), cover with aluminum foil (or parchment paper), and bake until the peppers are softened, the filling is heated through, and the cheese is melted about 50-55 minutes. 

Garnish with cilantro and enjoy!

How To Cook Stuffed Bell Peppers

After doing much research, I found several recipes that partially cook the peppers first and then bake them in the oven as I did with my Middle Eastern Stuffed Peppers recipe.

A properly cooked stuffed bell pepper is when the bell pepper is cooked all the way through while the filling is thoroughly warmed through, but still moist. There are techniques to par-boil them, pre-bake them, or even stick them in the microwave!

Mexican Style Stuffed Bell Peppers are filled with water to create steam in the oven.

However, with the help of this Kitchn’s post, I found the best way to cook bell peppers is by adding 1 cup of water to the bottom of the baking dish or skillet, cover, and simply bake in the oven. The water at the bottom of the dish provides moisture so that the peppers will steam and cook evenly all the way through.

Can I Make This Recipe Ahead Of Time?

Yes! These Mexican stuffed bell peppers with black beans and corn can be prepped 1-2 days in advance. Follow the recipe up to assembling the peppers, but do not add the water or top with the cheese. Cover and refrigerate until ready to bake. 

Once ready, remove from the fridge at least 30 minutes before baking. At this point, you can preheat your oven, add the water to the bottom of the pan, and top with the cheese. Cover and bake for 50-55 minutes, or until completely warmed through.

How To Freeze:

Freezing your Mexican stuffed peppers is a huge time saver and a smart way to enjoy meals throughout the week. Frozen stuffed bell peppers will last in the freezer for up to 3 months.

To freeze properly:

  1. Cook the stuffed peppers all the way through according to the recipe and cool completely.
  2. Place all of the stuffed peppers in a freezer-safe airtight container (a large casserole dish works well), cover with aluminum foil, and then wrap the entire dish in plastic wrap to completely seal, leaving no part of the peppers exposed, or you risk freezer burn. Label, date, and place in your freezer.
  3. Alternatively, wrap each individual pepper in plastic wrap and place in multiple freezer-safe plastic storage bags, making sure the bag is tightly sealed. Label, date, and place in your freezer.

How To Reheat:

To reheat leftovers from the fridge, preheat your oven to 350 degrees, place the peppers in an oven-safe baking dish, cover, and bake for 20-25 minutes, or until completely warmed through.

To reheat from frozen, preheat your oven to 350 degrees and remove all the wrapping, leaving the aluminum foil or parchment paper intact. Bake for 30-35 minutes, or until thoroughly warmed through. Alternatively, place the frozen peppers in the fridge to thaw overnight and follow the reheating instructions from the fridge, above.

Best Peppers To Use For This Recipe

The sweet red, orange, and yellow bell peppers you can find at the market or grocery store this time of year are the best.

If I had to choose, Mexican stuffed yellow peppers are my favorite, but I like to use a combination of colors to give it that special eye appeal. By all means, use any color combination that suits you!

PRO TIP: If you are on a budget, green bell peppers are always a good choice since they are usually cheaper at the market or grocery store.

Rice and bean filled Peppers topped off with cheese photographed before they went into the oven

Mexican Stuffed Pepper Variations

In my opinion, the beauty of this recipe is that it is so versatile. By making a few ingredient changes, you can alter it to your personal dietary needs.

While I think the version I shared below is more of an authentic Mexican Stuffed Pepper recipe, I also wanted to share a few ideas in case you have family members who may need a different variation of this recipe:

No Rice/Without Rice

Even though a recipe for stuffed bell peppers with rice is always fun, if you are trying to reduce your carb intake, stuffed peppers without rice is another way to go.

To still get the texture profile of rice and account for the volume, simply replace it with 1 cup of cooked quinoa (my preferred recipe) for an added boost of plant-based protein.

Low Carb

Low carb Mexican stuffed peppers can be made easy by swapping out the cooked rice or quinoa for 1 cup cauliflower rice or riced broccoli. Their textures are just about the same, so no one will ever know!

With Ground Turkey

Mexican stuffed peppers with ground turkey is a leaner variation as compared to stuffed peppers with ground beef. If you want a super lean stuffed pepper, use ground white turkey breast.

For a bit of a fattier version, go with the richer ground dark turkey thigh. You could also try a mix of each for the best of both worlds!

When I make it with ground turkey I also add a teaspoon of Italian seasoning to make it even more flavorful.

Tex Mex

Tex Mex stuffed peppers have a bit of a different flavor profile than the Mexican version. To change it up, substitute the diced tomatoes with a 12 oz jar of your favorite salsa, adding 2-3 Tablespoons water to the mixture to account for the smaller volume, and replace the shredded cheddar with shredded Pepper Jack cheeseyum! And if you want, top it off with a dollop of sour cream as well.

Slow Cooker Method

To make them in a crockpot:

  1. prep the peppers and place them in the bowl of your slow cooker.
  2. Assemble the filling and fill just as directed.
  3. Add the water to the bottom of the pan, and then cover with the lid of your slow cooker. Cook the peppers on LOW for 3-4 hours or HIGH for 2-3 hours. Top with shredded cheese, cover, and cook on LOW an additional 10-15 minutes, or until the cheese melts.
  4. Serve and enjoy!

PRO TIP: To ensure the peppers fit into the bowl of your slow cooker, you will need an 8-10qt size for this recipe. Just think of it like this – each pepper takes up 1 qt (9 peppers = 9 quarts). If your slow cooker is on the smaller size (5-6qt), simply halve the recipe.

Fresh out of the oven stuffed bell peppers recipe is being served on a table

A Few Helpful Expert Tips For Success:

  • Want to up the nutrition? Replace the cooked white rice with cooked brown rice instead.
  • Got bigger or smaller bell peppers? Keep in mind that the baking time might be slight shorter or longer depending on the size of your bell peppers.
  • Want spicy stuffed peppers? Add ¼ – ½ tsp Cayenne Pepper when you add the cumin and coriander.
  • Looking for an extra crispy topping? When the peppers are fully cooked, remove from the oven, uncover, and set your broiler to HIGH. Place under the broiler for 2-3 minutes, or until the cheese is golden brown. – just make sure to keep a close eye on it!

FAQs:

Do you have to boil peppers before stuffing them?

I found the best way to cook bell peppers is by adding 1 cup of water to the bottom of the baking dish, covering it with a lid (or foil), and then baking in the oven. The water at the bottom of the baking dish provides enough steam to cook the peppers and the meat evenly all the way through.

Why are my stuffed peppers watery?

As you are filling the peppers be sure to drain the juices of the ground beef mixture to prevent you peppers from turning soggy after they are baked.

What goes good as a side dish with stuffed peppers?

I really enjoy my taco stuffed peppers recipe with a simple vegetable salad for a well-balanced meal. A few options include 5 Bean Salad, Texas Caviar Salad, Mexican Street Corn Salad with Avocado. Alternatively, you can also serve it with a grain side dish like quinoa and wild rice.

Is it better to freeze stuffed peppers cooked or uncooked?

It is better to cook them all the way and bring to room temperature before freezing them.

Do you eat the pepper when you make stuffed peppers?

Yes, you do. The spicy ground meat mixture mixed with colorful and meaty bell peppers make a filling and visually appealing meal.

How long do I need to cook stuffed peppers?

Bake them in the oven at a 375 degrees F oven for 50-55 minutes in order for them to cook throughly.

Other Mexican Inspired Recipes You Might Like

MEXICAN STUFFED PEPPERS RECIPE IMAGE
Print

Mexican Stuffed Peppers Recipe

Make these Mexican Stuffed Peppers for an easy weeknight meal. Stuffed with a filling made with ground beef, beans, corn, and rice, they are healthy and delicious. Perfect for meal prep!
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 304kcal

Ingredients

To Prepare the Bell Peppers

  • 8-10 medium size bell peppers choose between red, yellow and orange
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

To make the filling:

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil I used olive oil
  • 1 medium-sized onion chopped
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 pound ground beef I used 85% lean
  • 3 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1 15 oz diced tomatoes, juices drained
  • 1 15 oz can black beans
  • 1 cup fresh corn
  • 1 cup cooked white rice or quinoa
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro or parsley chopped
  • 1 cup water
  • 1 cup shredded cheddar

Instructions

  • Prepare the peppers. Use a small knife to cut off the top of each bell pepper. Season the inside of each pepper with salt and pepper. Place peppers into a large baking dish (or a cast iron pan like I did), wedging them together as needed to fit in one layer. Set aside. 
  • Gently, cut the stems from the tops and discard them. Chop the tops to use in the filling.
  • Pre-heat the oven 375 F degrees. 
  • To make the filling: Heat oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add in the onion, chopped peppers, ground cumin, ground coriander, salt and pepper. Cook, stirring frequently, until onions and peppers are softened, 5-7 minutes.
  • Add in the meat. Using a wooden spoon break large pieces and cook until everything is combined and meat is cooked, 6-8 minutes.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Stir in the tomatoes, black beans, and corn. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, and then let it simmer for 3-4 minutes. Taste for seasoning and add in if needed. 
  • Off the heat add in the cooked rice and chopped cilantro. Give it a gentle stir.
  • To assemble the peppers: Divide the filling amongst the peppers. Top each pepper with a generous amount of shredded cheese.
  • Fill the bottom of the pan with a cup of water and cover the peppers with aluminum foil (or parchement paper).
  • Bake in the oven until the peppers are softened and the filling is heated through for about 50-55 minutes. 
  • If preferred, garnish with cilantro and serve.

Video

Notes

Notes:
  • I find that a large shallow cast iron pan with a lid works very well for a recipe like this. The one I am using in the pictures and in the video is this Le Creuset Braiser 5qt. (affiliate link)
  • While I listed 8-10 peppers in the ingredients list, the number of peppers you need will depend on their size. Obviously, the smaller the bell peppers the more you will need them. After cooked, the filling in this recipe is about 6 – 7 cups. During my recipe testings I found out that if you have 8-10 medium sized peppers you will have enough.
  • How To Freeze:  To freeze properly:
    1. Cook the stuffed peppers all the way through according to the recipe and cool completely.
    2. Place all of the stuffed peppers in a freezer-safe dish (a large casserole dish works well), cover with aluminum foil, and then wrap the entire dish in plastic wrap to completely seal, leaving no part of the peppers exposed, or you risk freezer burn. Label, date, and place in your freezer.
    3. Alternatively, wrap each individual pepper in plastic wrap and place in multiple freezer-safe plastic storage bags, making sure the bag is tightly sealed. Label, date, and place in your freezer.
  • How to Reheat: To reheat leftovers from the fridge, preheat your oven to 350 degrees, place the peppers in an oven-safe baking dish, cover, and bake for 20-25 minutes, or until completely warmed through.
    To reheat from frozen, preheat your oven to 350 degrees and remove all the wrapping, leaving the aluminum foil or parchment paper intact. Bake for 30-35 minutes, or until thoroughly warmed through. Alternatively, place the frozen peppers in the fridge to thaw overnight and follow the reheating instructions from the fridge, above.

Nutrition

Calories: 304kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 1008mg | Potassium: 503mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3901IU | Vitamin C: 155mg | Calcium: 132mg | Iron: 2mg

This recipe was originally published in July 2019. It is updated with additional helpful information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2021.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-stuffed-peppers/feed/ 34
Baked Zucchini Fritters with Breadcrumbs and Feta https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-zucchini-fritters-feta-dill/ https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-zucchini-fritters-feta-dill/#comments Fri, 25 Jun 2021 19:15:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9889 It is a shame that for as long as I have been blogging I haven’t shared a baked zucchini fritter…]]>

It is a shame that for as long as I have been blogging I haven’t shared a baked zucchini fritter recipe. Because growing up, baked courgette fritters (as my mom called them) were one of those dishes that my mother made very often during the summer months.

After receiving requests from many people asking for her zucchini feta fritters recipe, I knew that it needed to be added to my collection of Turkish recipes. So today, this healthy zucchini appetizer recipe comes to you directly out of my mom’s handwritten cookbook.

Baked Courgette Fritters on a plate served with yogurt sauce

Before I continue to explain the recipe, I want to clarify the terminology around it. Because if you do a quick search you will realize that people refer to this recipe in several different ways. Some examples are baked zucchini patties, baked zucchini latkes, baked zucchini cakes, baked zucchini puffs, zucchini bites, or baked zucchini pancakes. Essentially, they are all the same thing.

Got some extra zucchini to use? Check out our reader favorites Zucchini Noodles and Low-Calorie Zucchini Soup recipes.

Why I Love This Recipe:

Whether you refer to them as fritters, cakes, puffs, pancakes, or patties, they are good. Here are a few reasons why this recipe is better than any other:

  1. It is healthier compared to the classic fried zucchini fritters: If you were asking yourself, can I bake zucchini fritters? this recipe is your answer. There is no frying happening here. Instead, we mix everything in a bowl, portion them out on a sheet pan, and bake in the oven. And surprisingly, this healthy version is just as good in terms of taste.
  2. A great way to use leftover shredded zucchini: If you have some leftover shredded zucchini from making zucchini bread (like my Almond Flour Zucchini Bread or Vegan Zucchini Bread recipes), you can use the leftover zucchini to make these zucchini patties.
  3. The Perfect Side Dish: When summer rolls around and fresh zucchini is in abundance, these summery baked vegetable fritters make the best vegetable side dish to serve with breakfast eggs or chicken, meat, and vegetarian dinner recipes.
  4. Easy To Customize: My mom flavored her baked courgette fritters with dill and feta cheese but you can use other types of cheeses and herbs, ie. parmesan cheese and parsley.
  5. No Flour: This recipe uses breadcrumbs instead of flour, which gives it a nice body and texture. Also, if you are following a keto diet, you can use almond flour instead of breadcrumbs.

Ingredients:

As I mentioned earlier, this baked zucchini pancakes recipe has a lot of Turkish/Greek influences. The combination of zucchini-dill-feta is truly delicious and a very easy way to flavor what could otherwise be quite boring a baked zucchini appetizer. The rest is a bunch of simple ingredients you probably have in your fridge/pantry.

Ingredients for the recipes are placed in individual cups on a marble backdrop

In terms of ingredients, you will need medium-size zucchini, fresh garlic, baking powder, large eggs, feta cheese, panko bread crumbs (or regular bread crumbs), scallions, and fresh dill.

Substitutions & Helpful Notes on Ingredients:

  • Zucchini: You will need 2 1/2 cups (packed tightly) of shredded zucchini. I used 2 medium-sized zucchinis (about 1 1/2 lbs in total) but if yours are smaller or larger adjust the number of zucchinis you use accordingly. You do not have to peel them, especially if it is during the summer months when they are in season.
  • Breadcrumbs: I use panko breadcrumbs (aka Japanese breadcrumbs) that have a crunchier and lighter texture. However, you can use regular (or gluten-free) breadcrumbs as well. The texture will be a little bit heartier but still good.
  • Baking Powder: I know that baking powder is an unusual ingredient here, but using a little bit of baking powder helps them keep their shape and also rise a bit.
  • Feta Cheese: As it is with any recipe with feta cheese, make sure to taste the cheese before adding salt to the recipe. In this dish, I used only a ½ teaspoon of kosher salt to help extract the juices from the zucchini. My feta cheese was quite salty so I didn’t add any more salt. But if yours is less salty, adjust the amount of salt accordingly.
  • Topping for Baked Fritters: I used my yogurt sauce, but you can also serve it with my easy tzatziki recipe.

How to Make Oven Baked Zucchini Fritters:

  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
Person showing how to remove the excess liquid from the shredded zucchini
  1. Prepare the zucchini: Shred the zucchini using the large holes of a box grater. Place the shredded zucchini in the middle of a clean tea towel, collect it from the sides and squeeze as much liquid as possible. You should have about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of zucchini. Set it in a large bowl.
Four images showing how to make courgette patties
  1. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in garlic, olive oil, baking powder, black pepper, eggs, feta cheese, Panko bread crumbs, scallions (green onions), and fresh dill in the bowl with zucchini.
  2. Scoop onto a baking sheet: Using a spoon or medium-sized ice cream scoop, scoop out about 2 tablespoons of the batter and drop onto the prepared baking sheet. Continue until you run out of the batter. Gently press each fritter with your fingers (or back of a spoon) to make flatten.
  3. Bake in the oven: Bake in the preheated oven for 22-25 minutes or until they turned golden brown on the outside. Take it out of the oven and let it cool for 5 minutes before serving.
  4. Make the yogurt sauce: If using, make the Greek yogurt sauce by mixing all ingredients in a bowl.
  5. Serve: Place a few of the freshly baked zucchini bites on a plate and top them off with the sauce. Serve.

Variations:

  • Gluten-free: If you want to make them gluten-free, be sure to use gluten-free breadcrumbs.
  • Use different kinds of cheese: You can change it up by using shredded cheddar or parmesan instead of feta cheese. I promise parmesan zucchini bites are just as good as its version with feta cheese.
  • Low Carb Keto Zucchini Fritters: If you want to make this recipe low-carb/keto-friendly, use 1/2 cup almond flour or almond meal instead of 1 cup of breadcrumbs.
  • Use different fresh herbs: The classic Greek zucchini fritters recipe uses dill, but you can swap dill with fresh parsley as well. And if you are not a fan or have no herbs on hand, feel free to omit using them.

Make Ahead, Storage & Freezing Instructions:

  • Make ahead: You can prepare all the ingredients in advance to save on time. However, I recommend mixing the batter right before baking so you won’t end up with soggy fritters.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can serve them cold or warm them up in a low-heat 280-300 degrees F oven for 5-7 minutes.
  • Freezing Thawing: While I personally liked the freshly baked version the most, you can freeze these fritters. Before freezing, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then place in an airtight container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight and warm up in a low heat oven until warmed thoroughly, 5-10 minutes.
A plate with Baked courgette Fritters with Feta and Dill are served with yogurt sauce and photographed from the front.

Expert Tips:

  • Do not skip the process of squeezing the juices out of the zucchini: I know it is extra work, but it is an important step to help fritters to hold their shape and not be soggy.
  • Use an ice cream scoop for even fritters: An ice cream scoop is a really helpful tool to use here as it will help to get equal-sized zucchini balls, which in turn will help them bake at the same time and evenly. So if you have one, I would highly recommend using it.
  • Use a box grater instead of a food processor: While a food processor might be easier and quicker to shred the zucchini, I find that grating it in a box grater does a better job. Mainly because the food processor makes the shredded zucchini pieces too thin.

FAQs:

Can you bake zucchini fritters?

Yes, you can. If you are used to eating the fried version of zucchini bites you might be surprised to hear that you can totally cook them in the oven with a few minor changes. And the baked version of this recipe is not only healthier but also doesn’t taste much different than its fried version.

Do I need to peel the zucchini to make fritters?

If I am making it in the summer time during the zucchini season I do not peel the skin. I make sure to give it a through wash though. However, this is a personal preference. You can make this recipe both ways, with or without the skin on.

Can I make Baked Zucchini Fritters batter in advance?

I would not recommend making this batter in advance. The reason is because of the high water content of zucchini. As the batter sits in the fridge, the shredded zucchini releases more of its juices and the excess water turns to batter into a very soggy mixture. I have tried this twice and in both cases thought that the end product was not ideal.

Can I freeze these Baked Zucchini Pancakes?

Yes, you can. However, I recommend baking them first. You also want to make sure that they are at room temperature before freezing. When ready to serve, simply place them in a 350-degree oven for 8-10 minutes. No need to thaw beforehand. I also recommend keeping a close eye on them as they bake because they warm-up (and burn) pretty quickly.

Can I pan-fry these zucchini fritters instead of baking them in the oven?

Yes, you can. Heat a tablespoon of vegetable oil in a large 12-inch non-stick skillet. Scoop 3-4 fritters at a time making sure not to overcrowd the pan. They should be on a single layer without touching each other. Cook 3-5 minutes on one side and flip to cook the other side. Store the cooked zucchini pancakes in a low heat (200 F oven) while working on cooking the rest with adding more oil to the skillet after each batch.

Other Recipe Ideas for Shredded Zucchini:

Think about what else you can make with grated zucchini? I’ve got you covered. Here are a few more ideas to put that leftover shredded zucchini to good use:

Other Zucchini Recipes You Might Like


Baked Zucchini Fritters placed on a plate served with yogurt sauce on the side
Print

Baked Zucchini Fritters Recipe

These Baked Zucchini Fritters are flavored with feta cheese, fresh dill, and scallions. In my version, instead of using flour I used Panko breadcrumbs and ground oats as well as eggs to bind all the ingredients. You can serve them with fried eggs or as a side dish with any of your meat and vegetable dishes.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 10 fritters
Calories 107kcal

Ingredients

For the Zucchini Fritters

  • 2 medium-sized zucchini (1 1/2 pounds) – 2 1/2 cups after shredded, peeled and grated
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 large eggs
  • ¾ cup crumbled feta cheese
  • 1 cup Panko Bread Crumbs
  • 2 scallions chopped thinly
  • 2 tablespoons fresh dill chopped – plus more as garnish

For the Yogurt Sauce: (optional)

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Prepare the zucchini: Shred the zucchini using the large holes of a box grater. Place the shredded zucchini in the middle of a clean kitchen towel, collect it from the sides and squeeze as much liquid as possible. You should have about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of zucchini. Set it in a bowl.
  • Mix together the grated zucchini, garlic, olive oil, baking powder, black pepper, eggs, feta cheese, Panko bread crumbs, scallions, and dill in a bowl.
  • Using a spoon or medium-sized ice cream scoop, scoop out about 2 tablespoons of the batter and drop onto the baking sheet. Continue until you run out of the batter. Gently press each fritter with your fingers to make flatten.
  • Bake for 22-25 minutes or until golden. Take it out of the oven and let it cool for 5 minutes before serving.
  • To make the yogurt sauce: Whisk together all the ingredients in a bowl.
  • Serve zucchini fritters with the yogurt sauce and more dill on the side.

Video

Notes

  • If you watch the how-to video above, you will see that I placed the shredded zucchini in a colander and sprinkled it with salt to get its juices out. You can use both the cloth method or the colander method. The reason why I changed it is that I want to make sure I am not adding too much salt into the recipe, especially because I am using feta cheese. 
    While you can use both methods to get the juices out, I highly recommend giving a taste to your feta cheese and adjusting the amount of salt you put in the recipe accordingly.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare all the ingredients in advance to save on time. However, I recommend mixing the batter right before baking so you won’t end up with soggy fritters.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can serve them cold or warm them up in a low-heat 280-300 degrees F oven for 5-7 minutes.
  • Freezing Thawing: While I personally liked the freshly baked version the most, you can freeze these fritters. Before freezing, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then place in an airtight container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight and warm up in a low heat oven until warmed thoroughly, 5-10 minutes.
  • Can I pan-fry these zucchini fritters instead of baking them in the oven?Yes, you can. Heat a tablespoon of vegetable oil in a large 12-inch non-stick skillet. Scoop 3-4 fritters at a time making sure not to overcrowd the pan. Cook 3-5 minutes on one side and flip to cook the other side. Store the cooked zucchini pancakes in low heat (200 F oven) while working on cooking the rest by adding more oil to the skillet after each batch.
  • An earlier version of this recipe listed 2 tablespoons of ground oats in the list of ingredients. After testing the recipe a few more times, I decided that this recipe can also be made without oats. You can still add them but it is an optional ingredient.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 469mg | Potassium: 178mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 203IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg

This Easy Baked Zucchini Fritters Recipe was originally published in 2016. It is updated with additional helpful information in June 2021. A few minor changes to the originally published recipe were made.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-zucchini-fritters-feta-dill/feed/ 18
Heirloom Tomato Galette https://foolproofliving.com/tomato-galette/ https://foolproofliving.com/tomato-galette/#comments Wed, 26 May 2021 09:07:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=35201 This post is sponsored by Vermont Creamery. As always, all opinions are my own. Today, we are putting delicious fresh…]]>

This post is sponsored by Vermont Creamery. As always, all opinions are my own.

Today, we are putting delicious fresh summer tomatoes to good use in a savory tomato galette recipe. This is one of my go-to recipes that I make during the summer months when fresh tomatoes are in abundance. 

Tomato Galette recipe sliced fresh out of the oven from the top view.

If you are like me, a fan of sweet galette recipes like my Peach Galette, you will love this savory version made with heirloom tomatoes, a simple goat cheese spread and a flaky crust.

What Is Galette?

If you are not familiar with a galette, it is a free-form pie (or tart). However, instead of filling and baking the dough in a pie plate, you do all of that on a sheet pan.

The process is simple; roll the dough, spread it with whatever you want, arrange the toppings in the middle, roll the dough’s edges towards the middle, and bake on a sheet pan.

There is no stressing about fitting the dough into the tart pan or cramping the sides to make it look picture perfect. 

In addition to being easy to make, you end up with a rustic tart that is as delicious as a tomato tart that takes quite a bit of effort to make.

Easy tomato galette fresh out of the oven garnished with herbs from the top view

Quick Trivia: 

The term galette comes from the Norman word gale, a term used in French cuisine to identify a flat round cake made of pastry dough or bread. (Source

While the French call this free-form single-crust pastry Galette, Italians call it Crostata. 

Homemade Galette Dough

I suspect that you might think that tomato galette with puff pastry, similar to my Asparagus Tart (made with puff pastry), might be easier and quicker to make. 

While I understand that making the galette crust is an additional step, I promise you that nothing beats the deliciousness of homemade galette dough. And with my Galette Dough recipe, you have nothing to worry about because my method here is as foolproof as it can be.

How To Make Galette Dough?

To make the galette dough:

Prepare The Ingredients:

Ingredients for homamade galette dough

All you need is all-purpose flour, cold butter (cut into small pieces), ice water, and salt. I use Vermont Creamery’s unsalted butter and add my own salt, but you can always omit salt and use their salted butter. 

As it is with every pie dough recipe, to get that flaky delicious buttery dough, your butter and water must be cold. 

Process Everything in a Food Processor:

galette dough in food processor step by step photos
  • Place flour and salt in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse to combine.
  • Add the butter into the processor and pulse 8-10 times until butter resembles small clumps.
  • Turn the machine on and add in 4 tablespoons of ice-cold water in one tablespoon increments. At this point, it should start to come together and form into a ball. If not, add in the rest of the water in one tablespoon increments until it does. 
person shaping the galette dough
  • Transfer onto a lightly floured surface, form it into a 4-inch disk, and wrap with plastic. Place it in the fridge for at least an hour or overnight.

Tomato Galette Ingredients

Once you have your galette dough ready, the rest is a breeze. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view

Goat Cheese Mixture:

In terms of the ingredients, you will need to make a goat cheese mixture to spread on the galette dough. While you can spread the fresh goat cheese all by itself, I chose to flavor with a little bit of lemon zest, lemon juice, and thinly sliced scallions. 

I used Vermont Creamery’s plain fresh goat cheese that has a nice mild flavor and smooth texture. If you are a fan of goat cheese, be sure to check out my library of Goat Cheese Recipes to learn more creative ways to use it in your cooking.

Fresh Tomatoes:

As you can see in the pictures, I used fresh, colorful heirloom tomatoes as they are currently in abundance to make this roasted tomato galette recipe. I prefer semi ripe tomatoes as they are easier to work with and taste delicious.

Heirloom tomatoes from the top view with goat cheese mixture on the side.

However, you can use whatever tomatoes you have on hand. Roma tomatoes and cherry tomatoes would also work. 

How to make It?

The steps to making this fresh tomato galette recipe are six folds:

Person making the goat cheese mixture
  1. Make The Goat Cheese Mixture: Place goat cheese, scallion, lemon zest, lemon juice, kosher salt, and pepper in a bowl. Give it a mix until thoroughly combined.
Person salting tomatoes placed on a sheet of paper towel
  1. Prepare The Tomatoes: Line a small sheet pan with a sheet of paper towel. Place tomato slices on top. Sprinkle tomatoes with salt and pepper. Let it sit for 10 minutes.

PRO TIP: I learned the trick of lightly salting the tomatoes from Bon Appetit’s tomato galette recipe. It is such a quick and easy way to get rid of some of their juices (the excess moisture.)

The following is from their site:

“Salting the tomatoes ahead of time and letting them release some of their liquid is essential. It will allow the tomatoes to caramelize and ensures that the bottom of the crust stays flaky.” 

A woman rolling out the galette dough
  1. Roll Out The Galette Dough: Bring in a sheet of parchment paper and sprinkle it with a little bit of flour. Roll dough to a 12-inch circle. Transfer the dough onto a rimmed baking sheet to start assembling the galette.

PRO TIP: I find it easier to roll out the galette dough on a parchment sheet. It helps with preventing the dough from sticking to the surface. It also makes it easier to transfer the dough onto the baking sheet in one piece.

Person showing how to assemble goat cheese tomato galette
  1. Assemble The Galette: To assemble this tomato cheese galette recipe, spread the creamy goat cheese mixture evenly over the galette dough (leaving a 2-inch border), arrange the tomatoes in a single layer over the cheese. It is okay if they overlap as they will shrink as the tomato galette bakes. Roll the sides of the dough overlapping as you go around and pleating the dough.
    Finally, brush the outer crust (or the folded edges of dough) with egg wash (one large egg mixed with a tablespoon of water).
Freshly baked tomato goat cheese galette
  1. Bake & Serve: Bake galette in a preheated 400 degree F oven for 40-45 minutes or until the crust turns golden brown. Transfer the galette onto a wire rack to cool before serving. If you have it, garnish it whatever fresh herbs you have on hand. Fresh basil leaves, dill, parsley, etc. would all work. If preferred, finish it off with a drizzle of olive oil.

How To Store Leftovers?

As it is the case with most pies and tarts, this tomato cheese galette is best on the day it is baked. However, if you place it in an airtight container after it is fully cooled down and keep it in the fridge it would still be good the next day.

When you are ready to serve, warm it in a low heat (250 to 300 F degree) oven for 8-10 minutes so it is nice and warm.

Fresh Tomato Galette Sliced with a knife on the side from the front view

Tips for the Best Tomato Galette Recipe:

  • Make the galette dough a day in advance:  If you want to make this recipe quickly, I recommend making the galette dough a day in advance and keeping it in the fridge. You can also make a few batches and keep them in the freezer for up to a month.
  • It is okay if the tomato slices overlap as you arrange them on top: As you will see in the how-to video below, I used only three heirloom tomatoes that are sliced in ½ inch thick slices. However, you can use one or two more small tomatoes and overlap the pieces for a more tomato-ey galette recipe. They do shrink quite a bit, so it shouldn’t be a problem.
  • Can I use other types of tomatoes? As you can see in the pictures, I used beautiful heirloom tomatoes, but Roma tomatoes or even cherry tomatoes would also work.
  • Ensure that the goat cheese is at room temperature: I find that it is much easier to mix and spread soft cheeses like goat cheese when it is at room temperature. Take it out of the fridge 30 minutes before you are ready to assemble your galette.
  • Top it off with pesto for breathtaking colors and deliciousness.
  • Customize the goat cheese mixture with whatever herbs you have on hand: You can add whatever fresh herbs you have on hand into the goat cheese mixture. I had some chives on hand, but fresh basil, parsley, and dill would also work. If you don’t care for herbs, you can omit it altogether as well.

What To Serve It With?

While this heirloom tomato galette is perfect by itself, I usually serve it with a simple green salad on the side. Below are a few favorites:

More Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

Got more tomatoes to use? Here are a few creative ideas to try:

Tomato Galette Recipe sliced and photographed with a knife on the side
Print

Tomato Galette Recipe

Tomato Galette Recipe: A free form galette spread with fresh sliced summer tomatoes, herbed goat cheese and baked in a homemade galette dough. It is great as a breakfast or a brunch dish when you want to impress.
Course Baked Goods, Breakfast
Cuisine American/French
Prep Time 1 hour
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 354kcal

Ingredients

For The Galette Dough:

  • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour (213 gr.) – more to flour the surfaces
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 10 tablespoons unsalted butter (142.5 gr.) – Cold – cut into small cubes
  • 4-5 tablespoons ice-cold water

For The Goat Cheese Mixture:

  • 4 oz. fresh goat cheese at room temperature
  • 1 scallion sliced thinly both white and green parts
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • ½ teaspoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Tomato Galette:

  • 3 tomatoes sliced ½ inch thick – medium sizde
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 egg large
  • 1 tablespoon water
  • Fresh herbs

Instructions

To make the galette dough:

  • Place flour and salt in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse for a few times to mix. Add in the cold butter cubes. Pulse 8-10 times until butter resembles small clumps.
  • Turn the machine on and add in 4 tablespoons of ice-cold water in one tablespoon increments.
  • At this point, it should start to come together and form into a ball. If not add in the rest of the water until it does.
  • Transfer onto a lightly floured surface, form it into a 4-inch disk, and wrap with plastic. Place in the fridge for at least 1 hour or overnight.
  • Take it out of the fridge 10 minutes before you are ready to roll it out.

Preheat the oven:

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set it aside.

To make the goat cheese mixture:

  • Place goat cheese, scallion, lemon zest, lemon juice, kosher salt, and pepper in a bowl. Give it a mix until thoroughly combined.

To prepare the tomatoes:

  • Line a small sheet pan with a sheet of paper towel. Place tomato slices on top. Sprinkle it with salt and pepper. Let it sit for 10 minutes.

To assemble:

  • Sprinkle your work surface with a little bit of flour. Roll the galette dough to a 12- inch circle.
  • Spread the goat cheese mixture evenly over the galette dough leaving a 2-inch border.
  • Arrange the sliced tomatoes over the cheese. It is okay if they overlap as they will shrink as the tomato galette bakes.
  • Roll the sides of the dough overlapping as you go around and pleating the dough.
  • Brush the outer crust with egg yolk.

To bake:

  • Bake 40-45 minutes or until the crust turns golden brown. Transfer the galette onto a wire rack to cool before serving.

Video

Notes

  • To Store leftovers: As it is the case with most pies and tarts, this tomato cheese galette is best on the day it is baked. However, if you place it in an airtight container after it is fully cooled down and keep it in the fridge it would still be good the next day. When you are ready to serve, warm it in a low heat oven for 8-10 minutes so it is nice and warm.
  • It is okay if the tomato slices overlap as you arrange them on top? As you will see in the how-to video below, I used only three heirloom tomatoes that are sliced in ½ inch thick slices. However, you can use one or two more small tomatoes and overlap the pieces for a more tomato-ey galette recipe. They do shrink quite a bit, so it shouldn’t be a problem.

Nutrition

Calories: 354kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 86mg | Sodium: 669mg | Potassium: 189mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1350IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/tomato-galette/feed/ 14
Asian Sesame Chicken Salad Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/almond-and-sesame-asian-chicken-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-and-sesame-asian-chicken-salad/#comments Sat, 08 May 2021 13:10:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3671 As many of you may know, I am a huge fan of salad recipes for dinner. Fresh, crunchy, colorful, creative…]]>

As many of you may know, I am a huge fan of salad recipes for dinner. Fresh, crunchy, colorful, creative – they are delicious. And I must say, this Asian chicken salad recipe (similar to those served at Panera and Chick-Fil-A) is a great way to pack a ton of fresh vegetables in your diet.

Much like my Creamy Avocado Chicken Salad, Greek Yogurt Chicken Salad and Waldorf Chicken Salad recipes, this Asian-style chicken salad is packed with vibrant, crunchy ingredients. And has become one of my favorite chicken recipes so far.

A big bowl of Asian Sesame Chicken Salad garnished with tangerines and cilantro

More than anything, I think this warm sesame chicken salad is a great meal-worthy dinner salad recipe you can make on a Tuesday night.

But I haven’t even gotten to the best part – the Asian sesame ginger salad dressing! This delicious dressing is the reason my husband and I loved this salad.

The Asian-style sauce is flavored with almond butter, which is then topped off with sliced crunchy almonds. If you are not a fan of almond butter, feel free to substitute it with peanut butter and chopped peanuts – but more on that later.

Ingredients

The simple ingredients for this Asian sesame chicken salad recipe comes in three parts – the chicken, the homemade almond sesame dressing and the salad.

Ingredients: Cabbage, romaine, edamame, almonds, cilantro

For the chicken, you will need chicken breasts (I used Bone-in chicken breasts), vegetable oil (grapeseed or olive oil will work), kosher salt, and black pepper.

For the Asian sesame dressing recipe, gather together unsweetened almond butter, honey, rice vinegar, soy sauce, toasted sesame oil, garlic, fresh ginger, chile pepper sauce (my favorite is Sriracha) and coarse sea salt.

And for the salad, get ready to shred green and red cabbage (aka purple cabbage), carrots, romaine lettuce (or curly salad greens), edamame beans, sesame seeds, sliced almonds, and fresh cilantro.

Ingredients for the salad including the salad dressing is laid out

A Few Helpful Notes About The Ingredients

  • Chicken: This is a great recipe to use leftover or store-bought rotisserie chicken if you don’t have time to roast your own. Or you can even try this super flavorful Baked Chicken Thighs.
  • Cabbage: This is a heartier version of the popular Panera Asian Chicken Salad as it contains cabbage, both green and red, in addition to the romaine. Don’t be tempted to use more cabbage than the recipe states (which I usually do) as you won’t have enough sauce to coat the greens.
  • Pan roast sliced almonds: If you have a few extra minutes, toast the sliced almonds in an empty skillet over medium heat for 3-4 minutes while stirring constantly. Doing so brings out their nutty flavor and take this easy salad recipe to a whole new level.

PRO TIP: As is the case with my No-Mayo Coleslaw (and most cabbage salads), it is imperative that the cabbage is as thinly sliced as possible so the Asian sesame vinaigrette will wilt the vegetable. If the cabbage is cut too thick, it will not be able to soak in all those wonderful flavors.

  • Additional Sweetness/Citrus: Following in the footsteps of the Panera Bread version, I topped it off with a few slices of tangerines (a type of Mandarin oranges). However, you can use sliced orange as well. The fresh citrus fruit adds beautiful color and a pop of fresh flavor.
  • With or Without Almond Butter: The Asian sesame chicken salad dressing I used here includes 3 tablespoons of almond butter (peanut butter would also work). I find that almond butter makes it heartier with its earthy flavors. However, if you are going after a copycat Panera Asian chicken salad recipe, you can use 3 tablespoons of olive oil instead.

How To Make Asian Sesame Chicken Salad

This Oriental chicken salad recipe can be prepped and ready in a few easy steps. Simply:

Asian Sesame Chicken Salad recipe in a large bowl with the dressing on the side
  1. Roast the chicken: Start with roasting a couple of bone-in chicken breasts in the oven. Pat the skinless chicken breasts dry with paper towels and place on a baking sheet. Brush both sides of the chicken with vegetable oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Roast in a 425-degree oven for 30-35 minutes, or until the thickest part of the chicken registers 165 degrees on an instant-read thermometer. Let chicken rest for 5 minutes before slicing.
  2. Mix the dressing: In a small mixing bowl (or mason jar), whisk together the almond butter, honey, rice vinegar, soy sauce, toasted sesame oil, garlic, ginger, Sriracha and sea salt. Allow it to sit for 10 minutes.
  3. Toss the shredded vegetables and cooked chicken: In a large bowl, pour in half the dressing, then add the green and red cabbage, carrots, romaine, and sliced chicken breast strips. Gently stir to equally distribute, then pour the remaining dressing on top and toss to combine. Allow to sit for 5-10 minutes for the cabbage to wilt and flavors to combine.
  4. Garnish and Serve. Stir in the edamame, then sprinkle with sesame seeds, sliced almonds, chopped cilantro, and tangerine slices. Enjoy!

Variations

Even though I love this Asian sesame salad as is, a few fun twists and variations include:

  • With Peanut Butter: Replace the almond butter with unsalted and unsweetened creamy peanut butter. Need more peanut flavor? Use roasted peanuts instead of sliced almonds.
  • With Wonton Strips: Replace the roasted sliced almonds with an equal amount of crispy wonton strips. A little more indulgent, but incredibly delicious!
  • Without Edamame: The edamame beans take this Asian salad to a whole new level, but they are optional. Feel free to omit them if you don’t have any on hand.
  • Whole30: To compliment a Whole30 diet, simply omit the edamame beans and honey, replace the soy sauce with gluten-free coconut aminos, replace the rice vinegar in the salad dressing with fresh citrus juice (lemon, lime, orange or tangerine will all work) and use your favorite Whole30 approved (no added sugar) chili sauce.
The salad is being drizzled with the dressing from the front view

Make-Ahead, Storage & Storage Instructions:

To Make Ahead: If this Asian chicken salad is a part of your meal prepping or want to make it ahead, you can:

  • Make the sesame salad up to a week in advance and keep it in a jar (tightly sealed) in the fridge.
  • Slice the cabbage and shred the carrot as a part of your meal preparation. Keep them in airtight containers.
  • Roast the chicken a day before, slice and store in airtight containers.
  • Prep the rest of the ingredients right before you are ready to assemble it

Storage: What I love the most about this Sesame Asian Salad is that the leftovers make the best lunch/dinner the next day. Simply place the leftovers in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 2 days.

To Meal Prep: Prep every component of the recipe separately. Store them in separate airtight containers and assemble right before serving.

Got Some Extra Cabbage? Try These Recipes:

If you liked this cabbage packed Chinese chicken salad and/or have some extra cabbage left on hand, here are a few more recipes you can try:

A bowl of Asian Sesame Chicken Salad is being placed on a table
Print

Asian Sesame Chicken Salad Recipe

This Asian Sesame Chicken Salad Recipe is a great way to secretly pack your family’s diet with a ton of vegetables. Drizzled with quick almond sesame dressing this Asian-flavored chicken salad is a scrumptious meal worthy dish you will make over and over again.
Course Salad
Cuisine Asian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 524kcal

Ingredients

For the chicken:

  • 2 bone-in chicken breasts (12-13 oz each)
  • 4 teaspoons vegetable oil
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground

For the salad dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons natural almond or peanut butter, (unsweetened/unsalted)
  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • 1/4 cup rice vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
  • 2 teaspoons toasted sesame oil
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
  • 1 teaspoon chili pepper sauce I used Sriracha – optional
  • 1/4 teaspoon coarse sea salt

For the salad:

  • 4 cups green cabbage, shredded (1/2 head)
  • 2 cups red cabbage, shredded (1/4 head)
  • 1 medium-size carrot (½ cup, shredded)
  • 2 cups romaine lettuce or curly salad greens, shredded (1 medium head)
  • 1 cup edamame beans shelled
  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
  • 3 tablespoons sliced almonds
  • 3 tangerines peeled and sliced
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • To Roast The Chicken: Pre-heat the oven to 425 F Degrees. Pat-dry the chicken breasts with paper towels. Place them on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper.
  • Brush both sides of each chicken breast with the 2 teaspoons of oil and sprinkle evenly with salt and pepper. Bake in the oven for 35-45 min or until a thermometer inserted in the center registers 165 F degrees. Take it out of the oven, cover with aluminum foil, and let it sit for 10 minutes before slicing.
  • Slice chicken into small bite-size cubes, place it in a bowl and set aside.
  • To make the dressing: Place almond butter and honey in a mixing bowl. Whisk in the rice vinegar, soy sauce, sesame oil, ginger, garlic, Sriracha, and sea salt. Allow it to marinade on the kitchen counter for 10 minutes.
  • To make the salad: Pour half of the dressing at the bottom of a large bowl. Add in green cabbage, red cabbage, shredded carrot, and romaine lettuce in the bowl. Toss to coat. Add the sliced chicken. Pour in the rest of the dressing over and toss to combine. Allow the salad to sit on the kitchen counter for 5-10 minutes for all the flavors to combine.
  • Stir in the edamame. Garnish with sesame seeds, sliced almonds, tangerine slices and fresh cilantro. Serve.

Video

Notes

Variations

  • With Peanut Butter: Replace the almond butter with unsalted and unsweetened creamy peanut butter. Need more peanut flavor? Use roasted peanuts instead of sliced almonds.
  • With Wonton Strips: Replace the roasted sliced almonds with an equal amount of wonton strips. A little more indulgent, but incredibly delicious!
  • Without Edamame: The edamame beans take this Asian salad to a whole new level, but they are optional. Feel free to omit them if you don’t have any on hand.
  • Whole30: To compliment a Whole30 diet, simply omit the edamame beans and honey, replace the soy sauce with gluten-free coconut aminos, replace the rice vinegar in the salad dressing with fresh citrus juice (lemon, lime, orange or tangerine will all work) and use your favorite Whole30 approved (no added sugar) chili sauce.

Make-Ahead Instructions:

If this Asian chicken salad is a part of your meal prepping, you can:
  • Make the sesame salad up to a week in advance and keep it in a jar (tightly sealed) in the fridge.
  • Slice the cabbage and shred the carrot as a part of your meal preparation. Keep them in airtight containers.
  • Roast the chicken a day before, slice and store in airtight containers.
  • Prep the rest of the ingredients right before you are ready to assemble it.

Storage Instructions:

Place the leftovers in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 524kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 58mg | Sodium: 1356mg | Potassium: 1008mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 23g | Vitamin A: 5704IU | Vitamin C: 74mg | Calcium: 210mg | Iron: 4mg

This post was originally posted in August 2014. It has been updated with new information and minimal edits to the original recipe in June 2020.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/almond-and-sesame-asian-chicken-salad/feed/ 24
Almond Flour Chocolate Cake https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-chocolate-cake/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-chocolate-cake/#comments Fri, 07 May 2021 13:02:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14763 Chocolate cake is one of those life luxuries that need no introduction. And if you know me well, you know…]]>

Chocolate cake is one of those life luxuries that need no introduction. And if you know me well, you know I am a fan of baking with almond flour. I had originally shared this Maple-Sweetened Almond Flour Chocolate Cake recipe back in 2017, and it has been a reader favorite ever since. 

Since then, I have also created other almond flour cakes like Almond Flour Carrot Cake, Strawberry Almond Flour Cake, Almond Flour Apple Cake, Lemon Almond Cake, and Almond Flour Brownies. I based all of these recipes on this cake made with almond flour with minor ingredient changes.

Almond Flour Chocolate Cake topped off with strawberries on a plate

With this update, I am answering all the questions I have received over the years and even showing you how to turn this healthy flourless cake into a birthday cake. If you need a dark, decadent and elegant cake recipe, you are in for a treat, even if you are new to making a cake with almond flour.

Why You Should Make This Recipe

If you ever needed an excuse to make this chocolate almond cake recipe, then this one’s for you!

I love it because it’s:

  • Mixed in just one bowl with a whisk in under 10 minutes using only 7 simple ingredients. No other equipment is needed.
  • Can be served in several ways: Serve it by itself, spread it with frosting or whipped cream, or make two batches and make a layered cake.
  • Perfect for parents who are looking for a chocolate cake recipe made without processed sugars for their children. My recipe here is mildly sweetened with less than a cup of maple syrup.
  • Flourless, low carb, gluten-free, refined sugar-free, paleo-friendly.
  • Super forgiving and can be made with a number of substitution swaps – keep reading to learn more!

Ingredient Notes:

The ingredient list is short and sweet, with only 7 pantry staples. Gather together coconut oil, almond flour, unsweetened cocoa powder, baking soda, kosher salt, large eggs, maple syrup, and vanilla extract. It is best if they are all at room temperature.

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out

Below are a few helpful notes, including a few substitutions:

  • Almond Flour: Almond flour and almond meal can be used interchangeably in this recipe. You can also make your own almond flour 
  • Make it with honey: Use ½ cup of any light-colored honey instead of maple syrup 
  • Make it with agave nectar: If you want to substitute maple syrup with agave, be sure to use an equal amount of it
  • Cocoa Powder: This recipe uses Unsweetened Cocoa Powder, and it will not taste good if you use its Dutch Processed version. 

How to Make

This low carb chocolate cake recipe comes together in minutes in one large bowl. Simply;

person greasing pan with oil
  1. Preheat the oven to 325 F degrees. Line an 8-inch* springform pan with parchment paper and grease it generously with melted coconut oil using a pastry brush. Set aside.
Person showing how to make gluten free chocolate with almond flour in 4 steps
  1. To make the cake batter: Mix the almond flour, cocoa powder, baking soda, and salt in a large mixing bowl. Add the eggs, maple syrup, and vanilla extract into the almond flour mixture and whisk until thoroughly combined. You can whisk wet ingredients and dry ingredients in separate bowls, but I have found success in mixing them in the same bowl, so I no longer bother dirtying two bowls.
person pouring chocolate cake batter to the pan and leveling it
  1. Pour the batter into the prepared pan. Bake for 35 minutes, or until a toothpick or a cake tester inserted in the middle comes out clean.
  2. Let it cool on the kitchen counter for 10 minutes. Gently run a knife over the edges and transfer the cake onto a cake plate. Let it cool to room temperature.
Person spreading cake with chocolate frosting

How to Serve / Topping Ideas:

My favorite thing about this almond flour chocolate cake recipe is that it is so versatile. Here are a few ways to serve it:

  • Serve it by itself: This is one of those incredible chocolate cakes that can stand on its own with a cup of coffee, tea, or even a glass of almond milk. You can lightly dust it with powdered sugar (if you must) or top it off with ice cream as well.
Maple Sweetened Almond Flour Chocolate Cake photographed from the top
  • Spread it with Whipped Cream: Make a batch of my Maple Whipped Cream and spread a generous amount on top. Garnish it with fresh berries or any other seasonal fruit.
Almond flour chocolate cake spread with chocolate frosting with a knife on the side
  • Frost it with Chocolate Frosting: If you’d rather have a dairy-free alternative as a spread, use my Healthy Chocolate Frosting recipe made with almond butter, cocoa powder, and maple syrup.

How to Turn it Into a Paleo Birthday Cake?

If you want to take it a bit further, you can turn it into a celebratory layer cake. How to do this was one of the most asked questions I received, especially from young moms (with children with strict dietary restrictions) looking for a low sugar and low carb birthday cake recipe.

A slice of cake pulled out

To make a layered chocolate birthday cake (or a cake that would work for any celebration), simply:

  1. Make two batches of the same cake (aka double the recipe)
  2. Place them on a wire rack and let cool to room temperature.
  3. Place the first layer of cake in the middle of a large plate (or a cake platter), spread half of the chocolate frosting evenly over the top. Place the second layer on top. Spread the rest of the chocolate frosting and garnish with strawberries (or any seasonal fruit would also work)

Because I like that deep chocolate flavor, I used chocolate frosting, but you can use whipped cream to layer as well.

How to Store & Freeze

  • Storage Instructions: The cake can be stored, unfrosted, and without the fruit in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Freezing Instructions: To freeze, I recommend first slicing the cake into eight pieces. Place on a parchment-lined baking sheet and freeze for 1 hour. Transfer the now frozen cake slices to an airtight container or large plastic freezer storage bag with small squares of parchment between each piece. Seal tight, label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thawing Instructions: To thaw, leave it out on the kitchen counter for about 15 minutes for the cake to loosen up, then enjoy!

If you make the layered version, I recommend keeping it in an airtight container in the fridge. It should keep fresh up to 2 days.

Tips for Success:

  • Cocoa Powder: Use natural cocoa powder rather than Dutch-processed cocoa. The baking soda needs the acidity in the cocoa to react and add lift while baking. Dutch-processed cocoa would result in a flat cake.
  • Cake Pan: Both an 8-inch or 9-inch round cake pan or springform pan will work. The baking time remains relatively the same, but I would start checking the 30-minute mark for the best results.
  • Coconut Flour? Do not replace almond flour with coconut flour. Coconut flour is super absorbent and bakes up entirely different. Stick to blanched almond flour or almond meal.
  • Use different fruit depending on the season: I am a big fan of berries but come the holiday season, I use pomegranate seeds. I also love decorating it with fresh mint. If you love the combination of chocolate and mint, it works wonderfully in this almond chocolate cake recipe.
  • Love dark chocolate? If you want a cake with a deeper chocolate flavor (more of an Almond Flour Dark Chocolate cake), melt a teaspoon of espresso powder in two teaspoons of water and add that in the batter.
  • Want to turn this into cupcakes instead? No problem, try my Almond Flour Chocolate Cupcakes recipe instead (Hint: It’s the same recipe!)

Equipment Used:

More Chocolate Recipes:

I have heard so many of my readers refer to this as the best chocolate cake recipe that they have ever made. I hope you get to try for yourself and feel the same way. And if you cannot get enough of chocolate, here are a few more reader favorites that you might also like:

Want more recipes made with almond flour?

Here are a few of my favorites:

If you try this Chocolate Almond Flour Cake recipe or any other one of my Almond Flour Cake recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Almond flour chocolate cake garnished with strawberries on top
Print

Almond Flour Chocolate Cake Recipe

Imagine a chocolate cake without butter and processed sugar that is made with whole ingredients. This Almond Flour Chocolate Cake is that cake. It is made with almond flour and naturally sweetened with maple syrup. Gluten-free & Paleo Friendly
Course Cake
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 8 slices
Calories 306kcal

Ingredients

For The Cake:

  • 1 tablespoon coconut oil to grease the pan
  • 1 ¼ cups almond flour or almond meal (5.25 oz. or 148 gr.)
  • ½ cup unsweetened cocoa powder (1.5 oz. or 43 gr.)
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 large eggs at room temperature
  • ¾ cup + 2 tablespoons maple syrup (approximately 230 ml)
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract

As Topping (optional)

  • 1 cup maple whipped cream or healthy chocolate frosting
  • 1 cup fresh berries and other seasonal fruits
  • 3-4 leaves of fresh mint thinly sliced (julienned)

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the oven to 325 F degrees. Line an 8-inch* spring form pan with parchment paper and grease it generously* with coconut oil. Set aside.
  • To make the batter: Mix together the almond flour, cocoa powder, baking soda, and salt in a bowl. In a separate mixing bowl, beat the eggs. Add in the maple syrup and vanilla extract and whisk until fully combined.
  • Pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients and whisk until thoroughly combined.
  • Pour the batter into the greased pan. Bake for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the middle comes out clean.
  • Let it cool on the kitchen counter for 10 minutes. Gently run a knife over the edges and transfer the cake onto a cake plate. Let it cool to room temperature.
  • When ready to serve, spread the maple whipped cream or chocolate frosting over the top and decorate it with fruit and mint. Slice and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Make sure to grease the pan well. Otherwise it might not come off easily.
  • This recipe makes one 8-inch cake. You can serve it as it is or spread it with maple whipped cream or healthy chocolate frosting
  • To Make it a Layered Cake: If you want to turn it into a layered cake make two batches of this cake. Let them fully cool to room temperature. If you want to follow my footsteps (like I did in the photos), use my healthy chocolate frosting recipe in between the layers and on top. Garnish it with fresh strawberries or any other seasonal fruit.
  • Cake Pan: If you do not have an 8-inch spring form pan, a 9-inch pan would work as well.
  • Honey instead of Maple Syrup: If you want to use honey instead of maple syrup, simply use 1/2 cup light flavored honey and follow the rest of the recipe as it is.
  • Storage Instructions: The one layer cake can be stored, unfrosted, and without the fruit in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Freezing Instructions: To freeze, I recommend first slicing the (one layer) cake into eight pieces. Place on a parchment-lined baking sheet and freeze for 1 hour. Transfer the now frozen cake slices to an airtight container or large plastic freezer storage bag with small squares of parchment between each piece. Seal tight, label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thawing Instructions: To thaw, leave it out on the kitchen counter for about 15 minutes for the cake to loosen up, then enjoy!
 

Nutrition

Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 102mg | Sodium: 255mg | Potassium: 191mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 345IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 101mg | Iron: 2mg

This recipe was originally published in August 2017. It has been updated with new photos and helpful information in May 2021 based on comments and questions I received throughout the years. 

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-chocolate-cake/feed/ 240
Mexican Street Corn Salad (Esquites) https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-salad/#comments Thu, 22 Apr 2021 08:49:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=24538 This Mexican Street Corn Salad, a riff off my Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad recipe, takes inspiration from the traditional…]]>

This Mexican Street Corn Salad, a riff off my Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad recipe, takes inspiration from the traditional Mexican street food known as Esquite. An esquites recipe is a roasted corn salad smothered in a spicy, tangy, lime-scented dressing.

In other words, it is the salad version of those famous elotes you can find on the streets of Mexico, or in your home kitchen with my recipe for Mexican Street Corn. Can’t get enough? If you love this Elote salad recipe, be sure to also try our Elote Street Corn Dip and Mexican Street Corn Soup recipe.

Mexican Street Corn Salad is placed in a plate and photographed from the top view.

As a huge Mexican food lover, I could not resist the add this Mexican salad/salsa recipe into my collection of easy side dishes and salads.

What is Esquites?

The word “Esquites” means toasted corn.

Esquites (Mexican street corn salad) is the salad form of elotes (Mexican Street Corn served on the cob). The salad version is made by removing corn from the kernel and mixing it with a creamy sauce usually flavored with chile powder, lime juice, and cilantro and then topped with Cotija, an aged Mexican cheese.

Mexican Street Corn Salsa with Avocados and chips photographed from the top view.

Ingredients

There are three sets off ingredients for this Mexican corn side dish:

Ingredients for the recipe photographed from the top view.
  1. Corn: You can use fresh corn on the cob or off the cob during the months that sweet corn is available. If it is not available, then you can also make this spicy corn salad using canned or frozen corn as well.
  2. The Creamy Dressing: To me, this is the best part. It is made up of mayonnaise, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, and salt and pepper. If you want this to be more of an authentic Mexican corn salad and can get your hands on it, feel free to use Mexican crema instead of sour cream and some lime zest.
  3. The Salad: To turn this into more of a salad, I added some chopped red onion, jalapenos, cotija cheese (the traditional Mexican cheese used in the original esquites recipe), and cilantro

How To Make Esquites (aka Elote Salad)

This recipe has 3 folds.

Step 1: Cook the corn

I find that the ideal way to cook corn is on the grill. However, I wanted this recipe to be one that you can make throughout the year. So, here are two of my favorite ways to cook the corn for this corn salad recipe.

Corn on the cobb the grill
corn off the cob in a skillet
  • How To Cook Corn On The Grill: To cook the corn on the grill, first prep your corn. Holding onto the ear of corn in the palm of your hand, simply pull back the husk, tie it with kitchen twine, and lightly brush it with oil (vegetable oil or a little bit of butter).
    Meanwhile, heat an outdoor grill or grill pan over medium-high heat. Grill the corn, turning occasionally with a set of tongs until charred in spots.
    This happens rather quickly, about 2 minutes on each side, so be sure to keep an eye on it. Cut the corn kernels off the cob and transfer to a large bowl to cool.
  • How To Cook Corn In A Skillet: If the weather does not permit, you can cook the corn in a skillet. To do so, cut the corn kernels from the cob. Heat 1 tablespoon of oil over medium-high heat in a large skillet.
    Saute the corn for 5-7 minutes, in batches if necessary (more on that later), turning occasionally, but also allowing some of the kernels to get a deep, brown char. Transfer to a large bowl to cool.

Step 2: Make The Dressing

Make the creamy corn salad dressing by mixing together the mayonnaise, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt, and pepper in a small bowl. Taste and adjust your seasonings as necessary.

A woman is mixing the Mexican Corn Salad ingredients in a bowl.

Step 3: Assemble

Assemble the Mexican Sweet Corn Salad by tossing the dressing with the cooled, charred corn, then add the chopped jalapeno, onion, and cilantro, and gently toss to distribute evenly. Transfer to a large salad plate and garnish with crumbled Cotija cheese and more fresh cilantro!

PRO TIP: According to Cook’s Illustrated, to achieve a nutty and slightly bitter flavor on your charred corn cooked in a skillet, cook the corn in batches, in a small amount of oil, with the cover on.

The more contact the corn kernels have with the skillet, the greater the amount of smoky, charred goodness. Even more so, the longer you leave the corn kernels in contact with the hot skillet, the more the sugars will caramelize, giving you a deep, dark char.

And if done right, the kernels will start to pop! Covering the skillet prevents the kernels from popping out and the trapped steam ensures the corn kernels cook all the way through.

Ingredient Substitutions and Variations:

  • Make it spicier and/or hot: You can add various spices such as smoked paprika, ground cumin, and ground coriander to the dressing to make it spicier. You can also add a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce into the creamy sauce if you like it hot.
  • Change up the fresh veggies: You can swap red onions (or Mexican Pickled Onions) with green onions. If you are not a fan of jalapenos, you can use bell peppers instead.

How To Serve & Store:

  • To Serve: I usually serve it as a salsa with tortilla chips and lime wedges on the side along with my 4-ingredient guacamole recipe. It also makes a delicious topping for my favorite, baked chicken breasts, flank steak tacos, and brisket tacos.
  • To store leftovers: Place leftovers in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 3 days.
Esquites (or elotes salad) in a plate with a spoon on the side

A Few Tips For The Best Mexican Street Corn Salad Recipe:

  • Bloom your chili powder in 1 teaspoon of olive oil in a small skillet over low heat for about 30 seconds to bring out the natural aromas in the spices.
  • Don’t like it too spicy? Be sure to remove the seeds and ribs from the jalapeno before chopping, or simply swap the jalapeno with small green bell pepper, seeded and chopped.
  • Can’t find Cotija cheese? Half a cup of cotija cheese is all you need but if you can’t find it you can use crumbled feta, grated parmesan, or Romano cheese instead.
  • A word on adding garlic: As I was working on this recipe I was told that the authentic Mexican street corn salad recipe does not include garlic. However, when I make this at home for my family I usually mix a clove of minced garlic in the dressing. If you are a lover of garlic, feel free to do so. 
  • Don’t care for cilantro? Swap it with parsley or simply omit it.
  • Want to even more seasonal flavor? Add 1 pint of halved grape or cherry tomatoes to make a Mexican Corn Tomato Salad. Or if you want to add some greens, go for arugula or butter lettuce salad greens.
  • Make Mexican street corn salad with avocado by adding 1 cubed avocado to add a pop of color and silky butteriness.
  • Serve it with corn chips to turn it into a Fiesta Corn Salad!

FAQs:

What Is Mexican Street Corn?

Mexican Street Corn, also known as elotes, is basically grilled corn-on-the-cob that has been smothered in a mayo-sour cream sauce and generously sprinkled with Cotija cheese and fresh cilantro! We are taking it a step further by turning the street corn into an easy Mexican corn salad, also known as esquites.

How To Make Mexican Corn Dressing?

The dressing comes together quick and easy, with just a few simple ingredients. The traditional base is mayonnaise and sour cream (you can also use Mexican crema in place of sour cream). Chile powder turns it into a spicy Mexican corn salad, along with the jalapeno, and lime juice is there for acidity and brightness.

This is one of those salad dressings that you need to taste as you go, especially when it comes to seasoning it with salt and pepper. I usually like my corn dressing to be on the saltier side, but I was intentionally conservative in the amount I listed in the recipe below to give you a good starting point. That is why it is essential that you taste it as you mix it to adjust to your liking.

How Can I Make A Healthy Corn Salad?

Rather than mayonnaise, a vegan mayo works wonders – and I actually prefer the flavor of this spicy Mexican street corn salad with my favorite veganaise (affiliate link).

Sour cream can also be swapped out for plain Greek yogurt, which will add a nice bit of protein, too! I think that’s the best part of this corn salad recipe. By swapping out a few ingredients, it is effortless to turn it into a healthy one.

What If Sweet Corn is Not Available? Or I Want to Make This In The Colder Months?

I’m glad you asked! Canned or frozen corn make the perfect substitution to make this Mexican sweet corn salad recipe any time of year!
Canned Corn Salad Recipe: If you choose to use canned corn, you will need 2 (15 oz) cans of corn. And make sure to drain and rinse to get rid of the extra salt and starch.
Frozen Corn Salad Recipe: If you opt-out for frozen corn, you will need 3 (10 oz) bags or 2 (16 oz) bags. And no need to thaw – simply remove it from the freezer.
Follow the directions for the skillet method for both canned and frozen corn kernels.

Is this recipe served hot or cold?

This Mexican corn salad is traditionally served cold but it can be served warm or at room temperature.

Why should you make this recipe?

  1. Ready in 30 min: My version of the Elote Salad recipe you see here can be ready in 30 minutes.
  2. Can be served warm or cold: I love the fact that you can serve it both warm or cold, which makes it a perfect side dish for any summer picnic or BBQ.
  3. Sweet, savory and tangy all at the same time: I love this grilled Mexican street corn salad recipe because it is so well-balanced and easy to make! The corn adds a touch of sweet, the char adds a touch of savory, and the creamy corn salad dressing adds a burst of tang and spice.
  4. Works with all kinds of corn: Whether you choose to cook the corn outdoors on the grill (or grill pan) or indoors in a large skillet or use frozen or canned corn, this Easy Mexican Salad recipe works with all kinds of corn. So you can make it all year round.

Other Mexican-Inspired Recipes You Might Like:

Other Corn Side Dishes You Might Like:

If you try this Mexican Street Corn recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mexican Street Corn Salad Recipe Image
Print

Mexican Street Corn Salad Recipe

This Mexican Street Corn Salad recipe (aka Esquites or Elote salad) is tangy, spicy, and deliciously creamy. Whether you cook the corn on the grill or in a skillet, this easy Mexican corn salad is guaranteed to be a hit for all your summer gatherings.
Course Salad, Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 178kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn:

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil or melted butter
  • 6 ears of corn kernels cut from cobs – Approximately 4 ½ to 5 cups
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Mexican Corn Dressing:

  • 2 tablespoons mayonnaise I prefer vegan mayo – affiliate link
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 3 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Mexican Corn Salad:

  • 1 medium-size jalapeno seeded and sliced/chopped
  • ¼ cup red onion chopped finely
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped – more to use as garnish
  • ½ cup cotija cheese crumbled

Instructions

For The Grilled Mexican Street Corn Salad Recipe:

  • To prep the corn: Fold the husk of each corn back leaf by leaf and tie them with kitchen twine. Lightly brush corn on the cub with oil.
  • Heat a grill pan or an outdoor grill. Grill corn, turning occasionally until it is charred in spots. Keep an eye on it as this happens rather quickly.
  • Cut the corn off the cob and place the corn in a large bowl. Set aside to cool.
  • To make the Mexican Corn Dressing: Mix together mayonnaise, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt and pepper in a small bowl.
  • To assemble the Mexican Corn Salad: Pour the corn dressing over the corn. Add in jalapeno, onion, and cilantro. Give it a gentle toss. Make sure that the dressing is distributed equally throughout the salad.
  • Transfer the salad to a salad plate and top it off with cotija cheese and garnish with cilantro.

For The Skillet Roasted Mexican Street Corn Salad Recipe:

  • To prep the corn: Cut the corn off the cob. I used 6 ears to get about 4 ½ to 5 cups. Alternatively, you can also use canned corn or frozen corn. If using frozen, you do not need to thaw it out.
  • Heat oil in a skillet over medium-high heat. Stir in the corn, and stirring frequently, sauté for 5-7 minutes until it starts to get (lightly) chared. If you are using frozen corn, you might need to cook a few minutes longer. Transfer to a bowl and set aside.
  • To make the Mexican Corn Dressing: Mix together mayonnaise, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt and pepper in a small bowl.
  • To assemble the Mexican Corn Salad: Pour the corn dressing over the corn. Add in jalapeno, onion, and cilantro. Give it a gentle toss. Make sure that the dressing is distributed equally throughout the salad.
  • Transfer the salad to a salad plate and top it off with cotija cheese and garnish with cilantro.

Video

Notes

  • A word on adding garlic: As I was working on this recipe I was told that the authentic Mexican street corn salad recipe does not include garlic. However, when I make this at home for my family I usually mix in a clove of minced garlic in the dressing. If you are a lover of garlic, feel free to do so.
  • Add in an avocado: If you are a lover of avocado, add in a small cubed avocado into the salad. I usually do this if I am serving this as a salsa with tortilla chips on the side.
  • To make it with canned corn: Use 2 (15 oz) cans of corn. And make sure to drain and rinse to get rid of the extra salt and starch. Follow the rest of the directions for the skillet method to make it with canned corn.
  • To make it with frozen corn: If you opt-out for frozen corn, you will need 3 (10 oz) bags or 2 (16 oz) bags. And no need to thaw – simply remove from the freezer. Follow the rest of the directions for the skillet method to make it with frozen corn.

Nutrition

Calories: 178kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 575mg | Potassium: 278mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 346IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 70mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in May 2019, but updated with more information in April 2022 with no changes to the original recipe.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-salad/feed/ 41
Asparagus Tart with Goat Cheese and Mushrooms https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-tart/ https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-tart/#comments Mon, 15 Mar 2021 20:21:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=23875 This post has been sponsored by Vermont Creamery, but all opinions are my own. Today’s recipe, Puff Pastry Asparagus Goat…]]>

This post has been sponsored by Vermont Creamery, but all opinions are my own.

Today’s recipe, Puff Pastry Asparagus Goat Cheese Tart, is a celebration of the new season with my favorite spring produce, asparagus. If you are a lover of this delicious vegetable like I am, you are in for a treat. Because this super easy to make appetizer/brunch recipe is quick to make and oh so delicious.

If you are a fan of asparagus be sure to also check out my Roasted Asparagus, Asparagus Salad, Air Fryer Asparagus, Steamed Asparagus, and Simple Sauteed Asparagus.

Asparagus Tart with puff pastry sliced with a knife on the side

LOVE GOAT CHEESE? Get all my best creamy and tangy Goat Cheese Recipes.

Ingredients You’ll Need:

To make it easier, I will divide the ingredients into 2 parts. The toppings and the tart.

Ingredients: Scallions, asparagus, goat cheese, butter, mushrooms photographed from the top view

The Toppings:

  • Mushrooms: I used pan-fried shiitake mushrooms, but any mushroom would work here. If you are new to preparing them, here is how to clean shiitake mushrooms.
  • Use other types of mushrooms, such as roasted portobello mushrooms.
  • Asparagus: I recommend buying asparagus that is not too thin as the cooking time will be different.
  • Goat Cheese: In terms of goat cheese, I used my favorite Vermont Creamery’s fresh goat cheese. I love them, not only because they are a Vermont-based company, but also because I have been so lucky to have attended one of their cheese camps years ago and experienced the awesomeness of their products first hand by eating my weight in goat cheese. Make sure that it is at room temperature.
  • Other toppings for flavoring: You will need garlic, scallions, and other optional toppings like prosciutto and arugula.

Puff Pastry:

I used a 9X9 sheet of store-bought puff pastry in this recipe. Make sure that it is thawed in the fridge overnight so that it will be easy to roll out when you are ready to assemble your asparagus tart.

How to make Asparagus Tart?

The process of making this asparagus cheese tart has 3 parts.

The filling ingredients (asparagus, scallions, goat cheese, garlic, and mushrooms) are photographed from the top view
  1. Make the mushroom filling: As the name of the recipe suggests, this recipe uses mushrooms and asparagus as the filling. Simply saute shiitake mushrooms and asparagus with a little bit of butter until they are softened, and set them aside to cool. Alternatively, you can roast shiitake mushrooms in the oven.
  2. Prepare the asparagus: Trim the ends of the asparagus spears and cut them into smaller, ¼-inch thick pieces. Then, mix it with thinly sliced scallions, olive oil, and salt and pepper.
  3. Make the Goat Cheese Spread: Mix olive oil with the goat cheese.
  4. Prepare the puff pastry: Lay out a thawed (store-bought) puff pastry sheet onto a lightly floured surface. Roll it out to a square using a rolling pin and spread it evenly with the goat cheese leaving one inch on each side.
A woman is photographed as she is making adding ingredients onto the puff pastry from the top view
  1. Assemble the asparagus puff pastry recipe: Spread mushrooms and asparagus mixture on top. Roll each side onto itself towards the middle to create a frame and transfer it to a baking sheet
  2. Bake in a 425 F degree oven for 15 minutes or until the sides turn golden brown. Slice and serve while it is still warm.
Asparagus and Cheese Tart Recipe is photographed as it is being sliced

Faqs:

Here are a few of your FAQs answered for the best goat cheese and asparagus puff pastry tart recipe:

  • Can I make this asparagus appetizer in advance? Yes, you can. However, I recommend getting all the ingredients ready a day before, storing them separately, and assembling it right before you are ready to bake it.
  • How much time do I need for the frozen puff pastry to thaw? It depends on the brand of puff pastry you are using, but usually, 30-40 minutes on the counter should be more than enough. If it is too soft, feel free to pop it back in the freezer for a few minutes before rolling it out.
  • What do I do with the leftovers? You can store leftovers in an airtight container for 1 more day. However, as in most recipes made with puff pastry sheets, I think this asparagus tart is the most delicious right after it comes out of the oven.
  • Can I used other cheeses than goat cheese? Yes, you can. However, while you can make this tart with other cheeses like gruyere, ricotta, blue cheese, parmesan cheese, etc. , I highly recommend trying this version made with fresh goat cheese. In my opinion, there is something so magical in the tart and earthy flavors of goat cheese when it is mixed in with the woodsy and fresh flavors of mushrooms and asparagus.
a slice of Asparagus Tart with puff pastry and goat cheese

A Surprising Topping You Should Try:

In preparation for this post, I made this asparagus tart recipe several times. On the day that I photographed it, as we were getting ready to eat it, my husband suggested that we top them off with some thinly sliced prosciutto. Luck would have it, we had some in the fridge so we went ahead and put some on top of each slice.

Oh my! We were both like, how is it that we didn’t think of this before??

It was SO delicious. I took the photo below at the last minute. So keep in mind that you can also serve this easy asparagus appetizer with puff pastry with a slice of prosciutto if you are not serving it to a vegetarian crowd.

Asparagus Puff Pastry Prosciutto and Goat Cheese placed in a tray and photographed from the top view.

If you liked this recipe you might also like:

GOAT CHEESE AND MUSHROOM ASPARAGUS TART Recipe image
Print

Easy Asparagus Tart Recipe with Goat Cheese and Mushrooms

A delicious and easy to make Goat Cheese and Mushroom Asparagus Tart with Puff Pastry: Goat cheese spread on a buttery puff pastry sheet, topped off with mushrooms and asparagus and baked for perfection. Ready in less than 30 minutes, this easy to make asparagus puff pastry appetizer is perfect for any of your upcoming spring picnic, potluck, and dinner parties.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4 servings – One 10-inch square tart
Calories 601kcal

Ingredients

For The Mushrooms:

  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 6 ounces shiitake mushrooms thinly sliced
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Asparagus Topping:

  • 6 ounces asparagus trimmed and sliced ¼ inch thin (approx. 1 cup)
  • 2 scallions both white and green parts thinly sliced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Tart:

  • 4 oz. goat cheese at room temperature – divided
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 sheet of puff pastry 9×9 ½, thawed

Optional Toppings:

  • Handful of fresh arugula
  • 9 slices Prosciutto

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the oven to 425 F degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • Melt butter in a skillet. Add in the mushrooms. Cook, stirring frequently, until they are softened and reduced in size. Season with salt and set aside to cool.
  • To make the asparagus topping: Gently mix asparagus, scallions, garlic, salt and pepper in a bowl.
  • Reserve 1 tablespoon of the goat cheese and set aside.
  • Mix the rest of the goat cheese and olive oil in a bowl.
  • To assemble the tart: Carefully unfold the puff pastry on a lightly floured surface. Using a roller, roll it into a 10×10 square dough. Transfer it onto the parchment lined sheet.
  • Spread goat cheese-oil mixture over the puff pastry leaving 1-inch border throughout the sides. Top it off with mushrooms and asparagus mixture making sure that they are evenly distributed throughout the tart.
  • Brush sides with a little bit of water and fold it onto itself, towards the middle, on all sides.
  • Bake in the oven for 15 minutes or until the sides of the tart turn golden brown.
  • Let it cool for 5 minutes. Scatter the reserved goat cheese in small chunks all over the tart.
  • If using, garnish with arugula and prosciutto.
  • Slice it into smaller pieces and serve while it is still warm.

Video

Notes

  • The nutrition values below assumes that you slice this tart into 9 pieces. However, you can cut into 4 squares as well.
  • Can I make this asparagus appetizer in advance? Yes, you can. However, I recommend getting all the ingredients ready a day before, storing them separately, and assembling it right before you are ready to bake it.
  • How much time do I need for the frozen puff pastry to thaw? It depends on the brand of puff pastry you are using, but usually, 30-40 minutes on the counter should be more than enough. If it is too soft, feel free to pop it back in the freezer for a few minutes before rolling it out.
  • What do I do with the leftovers? You can store leftovers in an airtight container for 1 more day. However, as in most recipes made with puff pastry sheets, I think this asparagus tart is the most delicious right after it comes out of the oven.

Nutrition

Calories: 601kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 47g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 673mg | Potassium: 305mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 762IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-tart/feed/ 20
Chicken Lo Mein (30-Minute Recipe) https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-lo-mein/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-lo-mein/#comments Sun, 28 Feb 2021 12:15:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20511 Ready to up your stir-frying game? If so, you need this easy and better than take out Homemade Chicken Lo Mein Recipe. It is veggie-packed and ready in 30 minutes! This Asian favorite take out food is a quick and easy chicken dinner perfect for any night of the week. ]]>

We all have our go-to favorite Chinese takeout recipes. This Chicken Lo Mein recipe packed with vegetables and creamy Asian-style noodles is mine. Packed with veggies and quick and easy-to-make lo mein noodle sauce, it comes together in about 30 minutes in one skillet.

And if you are a fan of weeknight Asian dinner recipes, be sure to also check out my Sesame Chicken Salad, Teriyaki Chicken Stir Fry recipe as well.

Chicken Lo Mein Recipe photographed in a large pot from the top

Ingredients:

This homemade lo mein noodle recipe has 3 sets of ingredients:

  1. Quick Lo Mein Sauce: Made by mixing soy sauce, hoisin sauce, sesame oil, and honey.
  2. Chicken Marinade: Made by marinating pieces of chicken thighs in a sauce made by mixing soy sauce, fresh garlic and fresh chicken.
  3. Chinese Style Egg Noodles: While the authentic recipe is made with chow mein or lo mein noodles, you can use any noodles you have on hand. We will cover this in detail more below.
  4. Vegetables: Shredded cabbage and broccoli
Two bowls of Homemade Chicken Lo Mein photographed from the top

The Noodles: What Kind of Noodles Should I Use?

Truth be told, if you are not a stickler for the authentic chicken lo mein recipe, you can use any noodles you have on hand (including spaghetti and linguini). However, if you want to make the “real” thing, then go with Asian-style egg noodles like lo mein, chow mein, and ramen noodles.

You can find different kinds of egg noodles in the Asian section of your supermarket. They come in various thickness levels. I find that the best noodles for lo mein are the super-thin egg noodles (almost like Angel hair pasta) as they cook quicker than most other ones.

If you want you can order the noodles that I used here (affiliate link).

If you can get your hands on it, you can use fresh egg noodles as well.

With all this being said, as I mentioned earlier, any noodles you can get your hands on would work for this Chinese chicken noodles recipe.

Substitutions:

  • Chicken: I used thighs as I find them more flavorful. However, you can also use chicken breast in this recipe.
  • Toppings: I topped my lo mein with scallions, sesame seeds, and fresh cilantro. However, you can also use snow peas, snap peas, and red peppers. I also like to serve it with lightly sauteed baby bok choy if I have some on hand.
  • Cabbage: I used green cabbage but Napa cabbage can also be used
  • Soy Sauce: Light soy sauce can also be used
Sauce Ingredients are photographed from the top view

How To Make It Like Chinese Restaurants

This Chinese lo mein recipe has 4 folds.

  1. Make the magical sauce
  2. Marinate the Chicken
  3. Cook the Vegetables and Noodles
  4. Assemble it all together

I know it sounds like too many steps, but once you have the ingredients out, it comes together in no time. Let’s look into every step one by one:

How To Make The Sauce

If you ask me, the best part of this easy chicken lo mein recipe is the sauce. It has all the characteristics of Chinese flavors and comes together in 2 minutes.

Lo Mein Noodle Sauce Ingredients:

If you are someone who cooks Asian meals regularly, you probably already have all the ingredients already in your fridge. If not, you can easily find them in the Asian section of your supermarket.

To make the lo mein sauce, simply mix all the ingredients below in a mason jar or a bowl.

  • Soy sauce
  • Honey (or brown sugar)
  • Hoisin sauce
  • Sesame Oil

Give it a good shake and set it aside. You’ll use it at the very end.

Ingredients are laid out and photographed from the top

Marinate The Chicken

In terms of the chicken, I used boneless and skinless chicken thighs. Simply cut them into small cubes and mix them with some fresh ginger, garlic, and soy sauce. I usually do this at first so that it will have a chance to marinate for a few minutes as I am working on the rest of the ingredients.

A bowl of restaurant style homemade Chines chicken noodle bowl

If you are wondering how to cook noodles for this stir fry dish, I am going to have to refer you to the package instructions as it depends on the kind you are using. The one I used cooked in less than 5 minutes.

To cook the chicken lo mein, heat vegetable oil in a large skillet or large wok over medium-high heat. Add in onion and bell pepper. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes. Add in the chicken and cook until it starts to brown for 4-5 minutes.

Stir in the green cabbage, cooked noodles, and broccoli, and stir in the prepared sauce. Cook for 2-3 minutes while gently tossing everything around using tongs.

Easy Chinese Chicken Lo mein dish garnished with lime and cilantro photographed from the front view.

Vegetables and The Assembly

The best part of this easy chicken recipe is that it is so versatile, especially when it comes to vegetables. In terms of vegetables, I used cabbage, broccoli, onion, and bell peppers. However, you can use whatever vegetable you have on hand. Other veggies like carrots, bean sprouts, and even mushrooms would also work.

As you can see in the recipe card video below, I precooked the broccoli for a few minutes with the noodles so that they will be soft when mixed in with the rest of the vegetables. If you are using a similar vegetable, feel free to use the same method.

The rest of the recipe is pretty straightforward. If you need a visual of how I made it be sure to watch the quick how-to video I made in the recipe card.

What to do with leftovers?

  • Storage: I doubt that you will have leftovers, but if you do they make the best lunch on the next day. Simply place your chicken and broccoli lo mein in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 2 days.
  • Freezing: I tried freezing some of this dish and it ended up being okay. However, I can’t say the same thing about the way it looked after it was thawed. It looked mushy. Unless you have to, I do not recommend freezing this dish.

A Few Helpful Tips:

Having been cooking this dish for years, I have wanted to provide you with a few tips for the best Chicken Lo Mein recipe:

  • The Toppings: I topped my noodles with green onions, sesame seeds, and some chopped cilantro. You could certainly serve this dish without the toppings, but if you are like me, live for the toppings, go for it.
  • To make this even quicker make the sauce in advance and store it in the fridge upto 3 days.
  • Most chicken lo mein recipes use corn starch to thicken the sauce but the lo mein sauce I made here is thick enough so you do not need to use cornstarch.

There you have it. If you were wondering how to make lo mein like Chinese restaurants, now you know. Next time you crave Chinese food, give this recipe a try. Making this hearty one-pot meal at home is much healthier than its restaurant version, and with this recipe, it is now easier too.

FAQs

What is Chicken Lo Mein?

Lo mein stands for the Chinese dish made with egg noodles. It is usually served with some sort of meat (like shrimp, chicken, beef, or pork) and vegetables. It can also be served with only vegetables.
Some people also refer to it as Chinese noodles with chicken and vegetables. Simply put, chicken is marinated in a ginger-garlic sauce and then mixed with cooked noodles and a quick lo mein sauce made by mixing classic Chinese ingredients like sesame oil, hoisin, and soy sauce. Some recipes also use oyster sauce, but my version of the Chicken Lo Mein recipe is made without oyster sauce.

What is the difference between lo mein and chow mein?

According to this site, essentially they are both egg noodles made from wheat. Which one you use is actually a personal preference as lo mein egg noodles uses soft noodles while chow mein uses crispy fried noodles. I made this recipe with both types of noodles and it was good both times.

  • How Many Calories in Chicken Lo Mein?
  • While calorie count depends on the noodles and vegetables you use, this dish serves four people and each serving is 462 calories.
  • Do I really need a wok to make this dish?
  • No, you do not. But whichever pan you use, the trick is to make sure that the pan is not overcrowded and all the meat and veggies have enough space to cook thoroughly.

    What can I substitute for lo mein noodles?

    If you can’t get your hands on lo mein noodles, you can use linguine or spaghetti noodles as they can hold up better to the lo mein sauce. If you go with rice noodles I recommend using a thicker variety rather than the thin ones.

    You Might Also Like:

    Similar Weeknight Dinners You Might Like:

    Like Cabbage? Here Are A Few More Recipes Made with Cabbage:

    If you try this Chicken Lo Mein recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    Recipe for Chicken Lo Mein
    Print

    Chicken Lo Mein Recipe

    Ready to up your stir frying game? If so, you need this easy and better than take out Chicken Lo Mein Recipe. It is veggie packed and ready in 30 minutes!
    Course Main Dish
    Cuisine Asian
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 462kcal

    Ingredients

    For Sauce

    • 3 tablespoons of soy sauce
    • 2 tablespoons hoisin sauce
    • 1 tablespoon rice wine vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
    • 1 tablespoon honey

    For Chicken

    • 1 1/2 pounds chicken thighs or breasts, cut into small cubes or strips
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • 1 teaspoon fresh ginger minced
    • 3 cloves of garlic minced

    For Veggies and Noodles:

    • 6 oz. egg noodles chow-mein, lo-mein, or any other Asian style noodles
    • 1 large head of broccoli approximately 2 cups – broken into pieces
    • 2 tablespoons vegetable sesame, olive, or canola oil
    • 1 medium sized onion sliced thinly
    • 1 bell pepper cut into small pieces
    • 1 ½ cups cabbage sliced thinly

    As Garnish:

    • ¼ cup scallions chopped
    • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
    • 2 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped (optional)
    • sliced lime optional

    Instructions

    • To make the sauce: Place all ingredients in a small bowl and give it a whisk. Set aside.
    • To prep the chicken: Place chicken thighs, soy sauce, ginger, and garlic into a bowl. Give it a mix. Cover it with stretch film and set aside while you are prepping the veggies.
    • To cook the noodles: Cook the noodles based on the packaging instructions. 2 minutes before the noodles are fully cooked add in the broccoli florets. Rinse and set aside.
    • To cook the chicken lo mein: Heat vegetable oil in a large skillet or wok over medium-high heat. Add in onion and bell pepper. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes. Add in the chicken and cook until it starts to brown 4-5 minutes.
    • Stir in the cabbage, cooked noodles and broccoli, and stir in the prepared sauce. Cook for 2-3 minutes while gently tossing everything around using tongs.
    • Garnish with scallions, sesame seeds and cilantro if using. 
    • Serve with a wedge of lime.

    Video

    Notes

    Notes:
    • What to do with the leftovers: I doubt that you will have leftovers, but if you do they make the best lunch on the next day. Simply place your chicken lo mein in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge up to 2 days.
    • Freezing Chicken Lo Mein: I tried freezing some of this dish and it ended up being okay. However, I can’t say the same thing about the way it looked after it was thawed. It looked mushy. Unless you have to, I do not recommend freezing this dish.
    • The Toppings: I topped my noodles with scallions, sesame seeds, and some chopped cilantro. You could certainly serve this dish without the toppings, but if you are like me, live for the toppings, go for it.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 462kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 142mg | Sodium: 1560mg | Potassium: 1023mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 2468IU | Vitamin C: 188mg | Calcium: 114mg | Iron: 3mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-lo-mein/feed/ 24
    Healthy White Chicken Chili https://foolproofliving.com/healthy-white-chicken-chili/ https://foolproofliving.com/healthy-white-chicken-chili/#comments Wed, 03 Feb 2021 07:06:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22719 This post has been sponsored by Swanson®. All thoughts and opinions are my own. I am not going to lie,…]]>

    This post has been sponsored by Swanson®. All thoughts and opinions are my own.

    I am not going to lie, I did not grow up eating chili. The Turkish cuisine equivalent of chili was beef stew. That is what we ate in the thick of winter when we couldn’t put on any more layers to feel warm. But after living in the US for almost 10 years now, I find so much comfort in chili recipes and this Healthy White Chicken Chili recipe is one that I make often.

    Healthy White Chicken Chili recipe placed in a bowl and garnished with avocado and cilantro.

    My mother used to call it “warming yourself inside out.” Eating a big bowl of her beef stew was the only way to beat the cold winters of my childhood.

    Fast forward to today, 19 years of living in the US and being married to an American man, and I am now finding comfort in various chili recipes during the coldest days of winters.

    Though once again, I am realizing that eating a big bowl of this healthy white chicken chili is the only way to handle this -2 F degree weather. So, if you are in the same boat, let’s warm ourselves inside out, like my mother used to say, and make a big pot of chili.

    two bowls of healthy and delicious white chicken chili photographed from the top view

    I love this Easy White Chicken Chili recipe because

    1. It is made with rotisserie chicken, canned beans, and Swanson® Chicken Broth: America’s #1 broth and trusted for 70 years. In other words, you can easily grab everything from the supermarket on your way back home from work.
    2. The whole recipe comes together in less than 45 minutes, and it easily feeds a family of 4.
    3. It freezes well. If you are a small family like us, you can easily freeze the leftovers and serve them later.
    4. It can also be made in a pressure cooker if that is what you prefer. If you need a good recipe for it, be sure to check out my Instant Pot White Bean Chicken chili recipe.

    What is white chili?

    Before I continue to explain how I make this easy white bean chicken chili recipe, I want to go back to the basics and explain the difference between regular chicken chili (like I made in this Easy Chicken Chili Recipe) and white chicken chili.

    The traditional chili recipe is usually made with ground beef mixed in with chili powder (made from roasting chili peppers and grinding them), ground cumin and ground coriander, jalapeno pepper, tomato paste, crushed tomatoes, and various cooked beans like black beans and red kidney beans, depending on what you have on hand. Obviously, the end result is a thick chili that is dark red.

    On the other hand, white chili (some also call it white bean chili) is made with ground coriander, ground cumin, white beans (either Navy or Cannellini beans), mild green chiles, corn, and chicken (or turkey and pork). Since there are no tomatoes or chili powder, it ends up being a white chili.

    Though, I have to say, as you will see in the white chicken chili recipe below, I added a teaspoon of chili powder as I love its taste. And since it is much less compared to the regular chili recipe (as opposed to ¼ cup), it doesn’t change the color of the overall dish.

    Ingredients for healthy white chili recipe

    How to make?

    When it comes to making this low fat white chicken chili, you have a few options. I made the recipe on the stove top as I wanted this to be a quick and easy weeknight chili recipe.
    However, I will outline a few other methods below:

    Stove top method

    First method is the stove top method. Like I mentioned earlier, I wanted this recipe to be one that you can make on a Tuesday night.

    To do so, I picked a small rotisserie chicken, a can of green peppers, some canned Cannellini beans, and Swanson® ’s chicken stock from the store.

    I love Swanson® products, not only because they taste good but also because they are made without the use of artificial flavors or preservatives.

    I also love that they have a wide collection of broths and stocks that you can pick from. I opted for their unsalted chicken stock as I wanted to adjust the seasoning myself, but you can pick whichever works for you and your recipe.

    The process of making this healthy white chicken chili recipe has 2 parts.

    1. Cook the aromatics & add in the rest of the ingredients: Cook a chopped onion along with spices, green peppers, and garlic. Then add in the beans, shredded chicken, corn, and chicken stock.
    2. Let it simmer: Bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 20-25 minutes. After a good 20-25 minutes of simmering on the stove top, you end up with a healthy and delicious pot of white chicken chili.
    healthy chicken chili recipe ingredients

    Crockpot Method

    If you have more time, then you can easily make it in your slow cooker. Though, for this method, I recommend using uncooked chicken and letting the crockpot (and time) do its magic.

    To make healthy crockpot chicken chili, you add in onion, spices, green chiles, garlic, corn, beans and chicken stock in your slow cooker. Then, nestle the chicken (I recommend using 1 ¼ pounds of chicken thighs) into the mixture.

    Put the lid on and cook for 4-6 hours on low or 3-4 hours on high heat setting. Once it is cooked, all you have to do is to fish out the cooked chicken, shred it, and add them back into the mixture.

    Some people use an immersion blender to blend some of the mixture (half of the chili mixture) to make it thicker. While it is an extra step, it does a really good job of making your white chili thicker with chunks of shredded chicken with every bite.

    This Crockpot Chicken Tomatillo Soup I shared a while back is a great example of using this technique.

    However, please know that you would totally be fine if you skip this step.

    A bowl of healthy white chili photographed from the front view.

    Low calorie white chicken chili

    Okay, this one is not quite a “method” per se. However, I wanted to include it just in case you are calorie conscious and prefer a skinny white chicken chili instead.

    While I am a big fan of dark chicken meat, by using chicken breasts or chicken tenders, you can easily cut down on calories.

    If you are using rotisserie chicken (like I did), you can just shred the chicken breasts and add them into the chili.

    If you are using the crockpot method, then you can swap chicken thighs with chicken breasts.

    A big pot of healthy chicken chili recipe photographed from the front

    What to serve with white chicken chili?

    When it comes to serving chili, I usually go for a lot of toppings. Chopped red onion, cubed avocados, fresh cilantro, pickled jalapeños, Mexican (or cheddar) cheese, tortilla chips, and a dollop of sour cream are a few that comes to mind.

    However, this is the part that you can get as creative as you like and add in whatever you have on hand.

    Additionally, if I have time to make it, I serve my chili with Homemade Cornbread Muffins or my Cast-Iron Jalapeno and Scallion Cornbread.

    A Few tips for the best healthy chicken chili recipe

    • Freezing Instructions: Like I mentioned earlier, this white chicken chili recipe freezes well. To do so, simply let it come to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and freeze up to 2 months. A day before serving, let it thaw in the fridge.
    • Love your chili spicy? If you are a lover of spicy chicken chili, you can use sliced jalapeños (with the seeds intact) instead of canned green chiles and add hot pickled jalapeños on your toppings list. Though some of those are really hot so be careful.
    • Can I use ground chicken or ground turkey? Absolutely. I have swapped rotisserie (or leftover) chicken with ground chicken many times in the past and it worked perfectly. The good thing is that ground chicken (or turkey) cooks fast, so it wouldn’t take much longer for you to be able to put your chili on the table.
    • Is Chicken Chili healthy? While I think this white bean chicken chili is a healthy dish, I can see myself getting in trouble with toppings. If you are trying to watch your waistline or simply trying to eat healthy, I recommend avoiding tortilla chips, cheese, and sour cream as toppings.

    Whether you are looking for a chili recipe you can make on a Tuesday night or feeling under the weather during these cold days of winter, I hope this chicken chili recipe will come handy.

    Other chili recipes you might also like

    Other chicken recipes you might also like

    healthy white chicken chili in two bowls side by side
    Print

    Healthy White Chicken Chili Recipe

    Made with rotisserie chicken and canned beans, this Healthy White Chicken Chili Recipe is a one-pot dish that is ready in less than 45 minutes. Whether you serve it to a crowd or make a big batch to freeze for later, it is a great crowd pleaser to keep you and your family warm during the cooler months of the year.
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine Mexican
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes
    Servings 6 servings (6 cups)
    Calories 372kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Chili:

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 large onion chopped
    • 1 tablespoon ground cumin
    • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
    • 1 teaspoon chili powder
    • 1 can of green peppers or 1 large jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
    • 2 cloves of garlic
    • 2 15-oz. cans of Cannellini beans, drained and rinsed
    • 1 small rotisserie chicken deboned and shredded (approximately 4 cups)
    • 1 cup whole corn kernels plus more as garnish
    • 4 cups Swanson® unsalted chicken stock
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • 1/4 tsp ground black pepper
    • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped

    As Garnish (Optional)

    • 1 ripe avocado cut into small pieces
    • 1 jalapeno sliced
    • 4 tablespoons of sour cream

    Instructions

    • Heat oil in a heavy bottom pot (with a lid) on medium-high heat. Add in the onion, ground cumin, ground coriander, and chili powder. Cook, stirring frequently, until onion is translucent—4-6 minutes.
    • Stir in the green peppers and garlic. Sautee for 30 seconds.
    • Add in the white beans, shredded chicken, corn, Swanson® chicken stock, salt and pepper. Give it a stir.
    • Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. Then, turn the heat down to medium and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes or until it is slightly thickened.
    • Add in the chopped cilantro and give it a stir.
    • When ready to serve, divide it amongst 4 bowls and garnish with cubed avocado and sliced jalapeños if preferred.

    Video

    Notes

    To make healthy crockpot chicken chili:
    1. Add in onion, spices, green chiles, garlic, corn, beans and chicken stock in your slow cooker. Then, nestle the chicken (I recommend using 1 ¼ pounds of chicken thighs) into the mixture.
    2. Put the lid on and cook for 4-6 hours on low or 3-4 hours on high heat setting. Once it is cooked, all you have to do is to fish out the cooked chicken, shred it, and add them back into the mixture.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 372kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 105mg | Sodium: 594mg | Potassium: 449mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 373IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg

    This healthy white chicken chili recipe was originally published in March of 2019. It has been updated in February 2021 with more helpful information and no changes to the originally published recipe.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/healthy-white-chicken-chili/feed/ 24
    Pressure Cooker Pot Roast https://foolproofliving.com/pressure-cooker-pot-roast-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/pressure-cooker-pot-roast-recipe/#comments Fri, 08 Jan 2021 08:14:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25689 Sunday Pot Roast was never a recipe my mom ventured to make when I was growing up. It wasn’t until…]]>

    Sunday Pot Roast was never a recipe my mom ventured to make when I was growing up. It wasn’t until I met my husband and moved to the States when I was introduced to the traditional Pot Roast dinner (thanks to Ina Garten’s Pot Roast recipe). And since my husband loves it so much, it has become a staple recipe in my house. It’s also a hearty and comforting recipe to share with family and friends during those cold winter months.

    Pressure Cooker Pot Roast recipe served with potatoes and carrots over a bed of bulgur pilaf and garnished with fresh parsley photographed from the top view.

    But the thing is… it just takes So. Much. Time. Until now!

    If you feel the same way and want to figure out how to cook a chuck roast fast, you are in the right place, my friend.

    This Instant Pot Pot Roast Recipe can be made in half the time as compared to the traditional Dutch oven method! And it tastes just as hearty and delicious, if not better! So long are the days slaving over the stove to get Sunday dinner on the table.

    Easy Instant Pot Pot roast and potatoes recipe is photographed from the front view as a woman drizzles it with gravy.

    How To Cook A Roast In A Pressure Cooker

    The method for electric pressure cooker pot roast comes together in 3 folds.

    First, preheat the pressure cooker by selecting Saute on HIGH and add the vegetable oil. While the oil is heating, season the beef chuck roast with salt and pepper. Add to the Instant Pot and brown the meat for 3-4 minutes on each side. Transfer the meat to a plate and cover with foil (or parchment paper) to keep warm.

    3 lb chuck roast is being seasoned with salt and pepper by a woman

    PRO TIP: If your meat is large and/or uneven in size make sure to follow the directions I used in Ina’s Pot Roast recipe and tie the beef chuck roast before seasoning and placing it in your Instant Pot. This will prevent it from spreading too much and losing those valuable juices.

    If you watch the how-to video in the recipe card below you will see that I failed to do that. The end product was still good, but it would have been easier to manage in the end if I had tied it at the beginning. Here is a helpful video to show you how to tie beef.

    Ingredients: Onion, chicken stock, oil, carrots, potatoes, parsnips, and beef chuck, are photographed from the top view.

    Second, add the onion, garlic, broth, and thyme, and give it a stir making sure to scrape the brown bits at the bottom. Put the meat back into the pot and secure the lid. Select Manual, making sure the steam release handle is set to Sealing position, and cook at HIGH pressure for 60 minutes.

    When cooking is complete, use natural release for 10 minutes and then quick release the remaining steam. Add in potatoes, carrots, and parsnips, making sure to submerge them in the cooking liquid. Select Manual and cook at HIGH for 10 minutes. When cooking is complete, use a natural release for 10 minutes and then release the remaining steam.

    Finally, remove the roast and shred it with 2 forks. Place the vegetables on a serving plate and top them off (or place on the side) with shredded beef. If preferred, use a spoon and scrape the excess fat in the leftover juices and use an immersion blender to mix the juices to use as gravy to drizzle on top. Garnish with chopped fresh parsley and serve!

    Need ideas to put your Instant Pot to good use? Check out all my Instant Pot recipes that are perfect for beginners like me.

    Cooking Times

    I found the ideal beef roast pressure cooker time per pound is 20 minutes. I cooked my 3 lb chuck roast recipe for 60 minutes, and it was the most perfect, fall apart chuck roast I’ve ever had!

    Pot Roast in Pressure cooker- Cooked meat dish is in the instant pot

    Pot Roast Variations

    Cooking pot roast in a pressure cooker for a traditional Sunday roast is always a hit, but there are a few variations to make it more interesting:

    Change up the seasoning: Along with the salt and pepper, add some dried herbs and spices to the surface of the beef roast. Add 1 teaspoon each of dried oregano, rosemary, and thyme for a more savory kick. A few bay leaves added to the cooking liquid add a lovely, slightly aromatic flavor, too!

    Blend or strain gravy: I found there are two methods to make the gravy.

    How To Make Roast Gravy

    • To blend (preferred method): Remove the beef roast and vegetables from the pressure cooker and scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot. Then, simply use your immersion blender to blend the sauce together, creating an emulsified gravy.
    • To strain: Remove the beef roast and vegetables from the pressure cooker and scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot. Then, strain through a fine-mesh sieve into a saucepan over medium heat and simmer until reduced and slightly thickened, about 10-15 minutes.

    PRO TIP: For a thicker gravy, make a roux in the saucepan by cooking 2 Tablespoons each butter and flour over medium heat for about 1 minute. Then, scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot and strain into the saucepan with the roux. Cook until slightly thickened, 4-5 minutes.

    What Can I Serve it With

    As you can see in the pictures, I served my pressure cooker pot roast recipe with bulgur pilaf. However, you can also serve it with various whole-grain side dishes and/or one of my creative and easy vegetable side dishes (such as Whole Roasted Carrots, Sauteed Asparagus and Mushroom or Garlic Green Beans) or salads (like Asparagus Salad or Butter Lettuce Salad).

    Need more inspiration for pot roast sides? Be sure to check out our post on What To Serve with Pot Roast for even more recipe ideas.

    Shredded Instant Pot Chuck Roast (aka London Broil) placed on a plate along with potatoes and carrots photographed from the top view.

    Expert Tips & Tricks:

    • Want to ensure this quick chuck roast recipe is cooked evenly? Allow the meat to rest on the kitchen counter for 30 minutes before cooking. This helps take the chill off.
    • For the best sear, pat the beef chuck roast dry with paper towels prior to seasoning. The dry surface and hot oil give you that extra crispy brown crust, which packs in so much flavor.
    • Looking for pot roast with potatoes and carrots? Simply omit the parsnips and replace them with an equal amount of carrots.
    • Beef Broth vs. Chicken Broth: As you’ll see in the recipe below, I used chicken broth as the liquid in the recipe. I personally find that my homemade chicken stock produces a lighter pot roast recipe. However, if you prefer beef broth feel free to swap an equal amount of it in place of chicken broth.
    A cow showing the best cuts of meat for pot roast
    • Best Cuts of Beef for Pot Roast: For this easy Instant Pot chuck roast I’ve got some help from this post on TheKitchn. Feel free to refer to the image below for a visual to help you guide through the best cuts to use to make this instant pot roast recipe.
      • Chuck – The top pick for pot roast! It is cut from the shoulder, making it the toughest and most affordable piece of meat. The marbling (aka fat) is outstanding, which makes a fall apart chuck roast. Also called Chuck Roast, Arm Roast, Shoulder Roast, or Cross Rib.
      • Round – Cut from the back leg of the steer, this is actually a tough, but lean cut of meat. Even though lean meat is a good thing on occasion, that’s not what we want for a pot roast. Fat helps the meat breakdown into a more tender dish, giving you that silky, delicious texture. Also called Eye Round Roast, London Broil, or Round Tip Roast.
      • Sirloin – Cut from the back, near the hip bone all the way down to the belly (or flank), it is a bit tougher. Top sirloin is good for steaks and grilling, but it’s the bottom sirloin we are looking for, which is better for roasting. Also called Beef Rump Roast, Bottom Round Roast, Tri-Tip Roast, Ball Tip Roast, or Flap Roast.
      • Brisket – Cut from the breastbone, this is another very tough piece of meat, yet one of the most flavorful. When cooked the right way, it breaks down into a delicious dish. Although popular for BBQ or smoking, it makes a beautiful Sunday roast, too.
    • What pressure cooker should I use? I prefer to use my Instant Pot (affiliate link), but any pressure cooker you own will work. Feel free to use your Electric Pressure Cooker, Power Cooker, Presto, Power Cooker XL, or Crock-Pot Express. Just make sure to follow the manufacturer’s cooking technique, as it varies between each brand.

    FAQs

    What is Pot Roast?

    Pot roast is simply a braised beef dish made by browning a roast size piece of meat and slow-cooking it for hours on the stovetop in a flavorful liquid, with or without vegetables. Tough cuts are preferred, because of the long cooking time, meaning the meat has a chance to become mouth-watering tender. But this slow cooking time gets cut in half with my Instant Pot.

    What If My Beef Chuck Roast Is Too Big To Sear in One Piece?

    If your chuck roast is too big to fit into your pressure cooker and to sear in one piece, you can cut it into 2 or 3 pieces and sear them individually.

    How To Cook A Frozen Roast In An Instant Pot?

    Cooking a frozen roast in an Instant Pot is actually quite easy. Place the frozen roast in the pressure cooker with the trivet underneath, to allow the heat to penetrate the entire surface of the roast, and add an additional 20 minutes to the cooking time. Frozen to pull-apart tender in no time!

    When To Add Potatoes To Pot Roast?

    The best time to add the potatoes and additional vegetables is at the end of the pot roast cooking time, which will prevent the vegetables from overcooking and turning to mush. After the 1 hour cook time, add the vegetables and continue to cook on HIGH for an additional 10 minutes. Perfectly cooked Instant Pot pot roast and potatoes every time!

    Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like

    If you try this Pressure Cooker Pot Roast recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    This recipe has been adapted (with changes) from The Instant Pot Electric Pressure Cooker Cookbook (affiliate link).

    Pressure Cooker Pot Roast with Potatoes and Carrots served over a bed of bulgur pilaf
    Print

    Pressure Cooker Pot Roast Recipe

    Learn how to cook a roast in an instant pot using my foolproof method! Ready in less than 2 hours, this easy Pressure Cooker Pot Roast Recipe is perfectly tender and juicy.
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Diet Gluten Free
    Prep Time 30 minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour 50 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 623kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 3-pound beef chuck roast, pat dry with paper towels on both sides
    • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
    • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil I use grapeseed oil
    • 1 large onion halved and sliced
    • 4 cloves of garlic peeled and minced
    • 1 ¾ cups chicken stock preferably homemade (or beef stock)
    • 4 fresh thyme sprigs more as a garnish
    • 1 pound baby potatoes halved
    • 5 large carrots cut into 3/4-inch pieces
    • 3 large parsnips cut into 3/4-inch pieces*
    • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley

    Instructions

    • Season the meat with salt and pepper on both sides.
    • Preheat the pressure cooker (I used my Instant Pot – affiliate link), select saute on high. Add in the oil.
    • Once the pot is hot, brown the chuck roast, 3-4 minutes on each side. Transfer the meat onto a plate and cover with foil (or parchment paper) to keep warm. 
    • Add in the onion, garlic, chicken stock, and thyme and give it a stir. 
    • Put the meat back into the pot and secure the lid.
    • Select manual, make sure that the steam release handle is turned to sealing position, and cook at high pressure for 60 minutes.
    • When cooking is complete, use natural release for 10 minutes and then release the remaining steam.
    • Add in the potatoes, carrots, and parsnips. Be sure to submerge them in the cooking liquid.
    • Select manual and cook at high for 10 minutes.
    • When cooking is complete, use a natural release for 10 minutes and then release the remaining steam.

    Video

    Notes

    • Don’t have parsnips on hand? Use 2 more large carrots instead.
    • Can I cook a frozen pot roast in my pressure cooker? You sure can. Cooking a frozen roast in an Instant Pot is actually quite easy. Place the frozen roast in the pressure cooker with the trivet underneath, to allow the heat to penetrate the entire surface of the roast, and add an additional 20 minutes to the cooking time. Frozen to pull-apart tender in no time!
    • Two options for making gravy:
      • TO BLEND (preferred method): Remove the beef roast and vegetables from the pressure cooker and scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot. Then, simply use your immersion blender to blend the sauce together, creating an emulsified gravy.
      • TO STRAIN: Remove the beef roast and vegetables from the pressure cooker and scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot. Then, strain through a fine-mesh sieve into a saucepan over medium heat and simmer until reduced and slightly thickened, about 10-15 minutes.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 623kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 159mg | Sodium: 1496mg | Potassium: 1640mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 8666IU | Vitamin C: 36mg | Calcium: 107mg | Iron: 6mg

    This recipe was originally published in September 2019. It has been updated with additional helpful information on Jan 2021 with no changes to the original recipe.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/pressure-cooker-pot-roast-recipe/feed/ 20
    Almond Flour Chocolate Chip Cookies (Vegan) https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-cookies/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-cookies/#comments Mon, 30 Nov 2020 16:35:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=26715 It’s one of the most fun and festive times when a simple cookie can bring such joy. And let me…]]>

    It’s one of the most fun and festive times when a simple cookie can bring such joy. And let me tell you, this Almond Flour Cookies recipe is definitely simple. With only six ingredients (most of them probably already in your pantry) and one bowl (no stand mixer needed), you can have these almond flour chocolate chip cookies whisked together in under 30 minutes!

    And if you are a fan of the chocolatey almond flour desserts, be sure to try our Almond Flour Brownies recipe as well.

    almond flour cookies with chocolate chips (Healthy, vegan and gluten free) are photographed from the front view on a plate.

    My husband and I just couldn’t get enough! One bite and you’ll know why!

    Made with simple ingredients, it’s also the perfect nut flour cookie to bring to your next holiday cookie exchange. Quick, easy, low carb, glutrn-free, refined sugar-free and delicious, it’s one of the best cookie recipes for the holiday season or any time of the year!

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients are photographed from the top view
    • Almond Flour – Also known as almond meal, fine almond flour, ground almonds, or almond powder, it is a protein-rich flour made from ground almonds. I like to use DIY Almond Flour, but store-bought (affiliate link) will work just as well. Nowadays, most grocery stores carry almond flour in their specialty or gluten free section. There are two varieties, made blanched almonds, meaning the skins have been removed, and made with unblanched, which still have the skins intact. I like the aesthetic look of blanched almond flour since it produces a golden brown cookie, but feel free to use either variety.
    • Kosher SaltDiamond Crystal (affiliate link) is my favorite kosher salt since the salt granules are just the right size to dissolve into the almond flour cookie dough. If you use fine sea salt, reduce the salt to ¼ teaspoon.
    • Baking Soda – A small bit of baking soda helps give these crispy almond flour cookies a golden brown color, special crunch and just a bit of lift.
    • Coconut Oil – The subtle, sweet flavor of coconut oil blends perfectly with the nutty almond flour. Make sure to melt the coconut oil and cool completely before adding to the batter. I have also tested these nut flour cookies with grapeseed oil and it worked just as well. 
    • Maple Syrup – A bit of sweet, smoky goodness is what makes these cookies shine. Since it is late in the maple season here in Vermont, I like to use Dark Amber, Grade A, which has a more robust maple flavor. But feel free to use a light amber maple syrup for a more delicate flavor.
    • Semi-Sweet Chocolate Chips – I used vegan semi-sweet chocolate chips (affiliate link), but you can also use any chocolate chips you have on hand. We will touch more on chocolate in a bit!

    How To Make Almond Flour Cookies?

    This recipe for almond powder cookies comes together in 3 folds.

    First, preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.

    The dough is photographed from the top view as a woman is mixing it.

    Second, in a large mixing bowl, whisk the dry ingredients: almond flour, salt, and baking soda. Pour in the melted coconut oil and maple syrup and mix until just combined.
    As you mix the batter you might feel like the amount of liquid is not enough, but believe me, it will come together as you continue to mix it.

    Fold the chocolate chips into the batter and mix until they are equally distributed.

    paleo chocolate chip cookies made with almond flour are portioned on a cookie sheet and decorated with an almond photographed from the top view.

    Lastly, scoop onto the prepared baking sheet using a tablespoon cookie scoop (affiliate link) and flatten gently with your hands. I got 15 cookies, but you should get a range between 12-15. Bake for 12-14 minutes, or until lightly brown.

    Let them cool on a wire rack for 10-15 minutes and serve.

    FAQs

    Can I Make This Cookies With Almond Butter?

    Please note, this recipe is based on almond flour, not almond butter. Almond butter (any nut butter in general) tends to be a bit too expensive and you can get so much more use out of almond flour, so I thought it best to create a super simple recipe that helps this nut flour shine. However, if you want a version of this cookie made with almond butter (and grain free flours and other gluten free ingredients), be sure to check out my almond butter cookies recipe. And if you are more of a fan of peanut butter, you might also like my almond peanut butter cookie recipe.

    What is the best chocolate for no flour shortbread cookies?

    These almond cookies with almond flour are plant-based, low carb, and refined sugar-free. I used this vegan and paleo certified semi-sweet chocolate chips (affiliate link) but you can use whatever you have on hand. If you are more of a dark chocolate lover, you can totally swap them with bitter-sweet chocolate chips as well. Either way, this is a simple and healthy almond flour cookie recipe that you can make for any occasion. If you buy a pack and end up with leftover chocolate chips, be sure to try and use them in my Almond Flour Banana Bread recipe.

    Why Did My Cookies Turn Out Flat?

    Made with only 6 basic ingredients, these cookies are as basic as it gets. They do not spread, but they can turn out dry and flat, if the temperature of your oven is too low or too high.

    What Can I Do To Prevent My Cookies From Being Crumbly?

    During our testing, we never had this issue so if you follow the recipe to a t and your oven works well, you should not have this problem. However, we recommend letting them cool completely before serving as they may get crumbly if you serve them while they are still hot.

    Can I use coconut flour instead?

    We wouldn’t recommend substituting almond flour with coconut flour in this recipe as they don’t behave similarly due to the different levels of fat content in each flour.

    Tips for the best almond meal cookies

    • No almond flour in the store? Make your own. Whether you call it almond flour, almond meal or almond powder, the choice is up to you. But one tip I highly recommend is to make your own almond flour at home. Yes, it is a bit of an additional task to make a simple cookie, but I think it is good to know that you can easily make your own in your food processor or blender.
    • Can I swap maple syrup with coconut sugar? This recipe actually requires maple syrup as the sweetener because you need that extra bit of liquid to get the right consistency. However, if you are in need of a coconut sugar-sweetened almond flour cookie recipe, feel free to check out my almond flour coconut sugar cookies flavored with warm winter spices. They are paleo-friendly and sweetened with coconut sugar. Oh and perfect for the holiday season!
    • For an extra special touch, place a whole almond in the center of each cookie before baking. This way people will easily know that this is an almond cookie.
    • Can’t get enough of the almond flavors? Mix in ¼ teaspoon of almond extract to the batter when you add the wet ingredients for even more almond flavor.
    • How long do these no flour shortbread cookies good for? As long as they are kept in an airtight container, these cookies will last for 3-4 days.
    • Got some vanilla extract? If so, add in 1/2 teaspoon vanilla extract for a subtle vanilla flavor.
    • It is traditional to serve cookies with milk. While a cup of cow’s milk work perfectly, if you are following a plant-based diet, I would recommend serving it with homemade almond milk.

    How To Store & Freeze?

    What I love most about these vegan almond flour cookies is that they store well so you can make a batch, bake some right away and store the rest for later.

    • Storage: Leftover cookies can be store in an airtight container on the kitchen counter after they come to room temperature. They should be fresh for up to 3 days.
    • Freezing: Unbaked cookies can be stored in an airtight container in the freezer. Simply place them on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Place in the freezer for at least four hours. When it is hardened, cover it tightly with plastic wrap or place it in an airtight container on a single layer.
    • Thawing & Baking: You do not need to thaw these almond flour cookies in advance as ground almonds do not freeze (thanks to their high fat content). Instead, take them out of the freezer, place on a sheet pan or cookie sheet (as directed in the recipe), and bake as directed in the recipe. It might take a few extra (no more 2 or 3) minutes for them to bake. You will know that they are fully baked when they turn (lightly) golden brown.
    Cookies are placed on a plate and served with a glass of milk on the side.

    Here are a few other cookie recipes to help you with your sweet tooth.

    Other almond flour desserts you might like:

    [/su_note]
    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
    Gluten free and Paleo Almond Flour Cookies with Chocolate Chips
    Print

    Almond Flour Cookies Recipe

    Recipe for the best Almond Flour Cookies with Chocolate Chips. This gluten-free, refined-sugar free, paleo and vegan cookie recipe is the easiest one you could ever make. All you need is 6 ingredients, one bowl and 30 minutes (from start to finish.)
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 14 minutes
    Total Time 29 minutes
    Servings 12 cookies
    Calories 212kcal

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups almond flour 220 g.
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
    • ¼ cup coconut oil melted and cooled
    • ¼ cup maple syrup
    • ½ cup vegan/paleo semi-sweet chocolate chips
    • 12-14 whole almonds as garnish (optional)

    Instructions

    • Pre-heat oven to 350 F degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set it aside.
    • Mix together almond flour, salt, and baking soda in a bowl. 
    • Stir in the oil and maple syrup into the batter. 
    • Fold in the chocolate chips.
    • Using a tablespoon-size measuring spoon, scoop the dough onto the prepared sheet pan. Gently press down to flatten. If preffered, place an almond in the center of each cookie.
    • Bake for 12-14 minutes until it is lightly browned on top. Serve.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Calories: 212kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 121mg | Potassium: 65mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Calcium: 54mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-cookies/feed/ 152
    Cauliflower Curry With Coconut Milk (Vegan) https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-curry-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-curry-recipe/#comments Fri, 04 Sep 2020 09:42:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=24802 Ever since I fell in love with Golden Turmeric Milk and started making my own Turmeric Paste, I have been…]]>

    Ever since I fell in love with Golden Turmeric Milk and started making my own Turmeric Paste, I have been trying to create recipes to allow turmeric and all its health benefits shine. This has also allowed me to incorporate more vegetables into my diet and put my focus on “meatless” meals.

    That was the inspiration for this Indian Cauliflower Curry. It is a simple cauliflower curry recipe for those of you who want to add a punch of plant-based flavor and nutrition into your weeknight meals. I know you might be intimidated by the long list of spices, but I can assure you, this vegetable curry with coconut milk is 100% foolproof!

    Cauliflower curry with coconut milk and sweet potatoes is placed in a copper pan and photographed from the top view

    How to prepare?

    The actual cooking time for this vegan chickpea curry is less than 30 minutes, but with the preparation of the ingredients included, it can be ready in under 45 minutes.

    As soon as I get home from the market, the first step I take is to wash all my produce and prep it according to the recipe. The onion chopped, the cauliflower cut into florets, and the sweet potatoes cubed. This ensures a seamless cooking process from start to finish.

    How to cook gobi curry?

    Indian Cauliflower curry placed in an oval tin on top of rice and photographed from the front view.

    Cauliflower curry, also known as Gobi curry in India, comes together in 3 folds.

    First, prep your ingredients. I will admit, there is a little bit of chopping involved, but it is totally worth it. I would recommend getting everything ready before starting the cooking process.

    To start cooking, add the oil and add the spices coriander, cumin, curry powder, turmeric, and cinnamon (more on these later!), along with the onion in a large dutch oven set over medium heat. Constantly stir the mixture, to prevent the spices from burning, until the onion has softened, about 4-5 minutes. Add in the ginger, cook for 1 minute, then finish with the garlic, and cook for 30 seconds.

    Don’t be alarmed if the mixture looks like it needs some liquid. This is a part of the process of building flavor, so it is normal.

    Second, add the tomatoes, coconut milk, vegetable broth, cauliflower florets, sweet potatoes, chickpeas, and salt.

    Scraping the bottom bits of the pot give it a stir, cover, and bring it to a boil. Once it comes to a boil, reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer until the sweet potatoes are softened about 20-25 minutes.

    Finally, stir in the green peas and cilantro at the very end. Serve in shallow bowls over a bed of rice ( I used basmati rice, but brown rice would also work) and garnish with fresh cilantro and lightly salted cashews.

    PRO TIP: Adding the green peas and fresh cilantro at the very end of cooking will help to preserve their bright green color and fresh flavor.
    Only have frozen blanched peas on hand? The heat from the cauliflower curry will gently warm the green peas from frozen, which means there is no need to thaw!

    A Quick How To Video:

    Ingredients:

    I know some of you may be wondering, what exactly goes into a vegan cauliflower curry recipe? The truth is, every Indian curry recipe is different based on the region of India it stems from.

    Spices, onion, and garlic for this recipe are laid out and photographed from the top view

    However, every curry recipe includes warm, fragrant spices with the inclusion of aromatics such as onions, ginger, and garlic. The spices in our cauliflower coconut curry include:

    • Coriander – the seed of cilantro, with a bright, citrus flavor
    • Cumin – a small seed that is smokey and robust
    • Curry Powder – an essential mix of fragrant Indian spices, with the inclusion of turmeric, that comes in mild, medium, or hot varieties
    • Turmeric Powder – slightly bitter and aromatic with a high amount of antioxidants and health benefits (With the help of the curry powder, turmeric is what gives this curry dish its beautiful yellow color, which is why some people also refer to this dish as yellow cauliflower curry)
    • Cinnamon – slightly sweet and warm to give it that special touch

    But these are just a few of the spices in the vast array of Indian spices. If you were interested in adding more fragrant spices, you could also try:

    • Garam Masala – a sweeter mix of aromatic Indian spices that includes cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamom, but no turmeric, transforming this dish into a gobi masala curry recipe
    • Allspice – a small berry that is slightly sweet and warm
    • Cardamom – a staple in Indian cuisine with a citrusy, minty, and herbal flavor
    Cauliflower curry bowl Ingredients for the curry dish are placed in bowls and photographed from the top view

    For the vegetable ingredients in this gobi curry recipe (gobi means cauliflower in India), the sweet potato and cauliflower florets are the stars. We also add in chickpeas and green peas to make it even more nutritious and colorful.

    With that being said, if you don’t like any of these ingredients, simply omit them. Or swap in an equal amount of any of your favorite vegetables such as green beans, eggplant, or carrots. That’s what makes this easy curried cauliflower with coconut milk so versatile!

    Is curry vegan?

    Yes, this cauliflower chickpea curry recipe is vegan. But the real answer to this question really depends on what you put in it. Because we are using tomatoes, coconut milk, and vegetable broth as the base, this is an entirely meatless meal.

    Looking for a coconut milk substitute? I know some of you are allergic to coconut. If this is you, simply replace it with 1 cup Plain, Whole Milk Yogurt. Obviously, adding yogurt will no longer make this dish vegan, but the taste indifference will be minuscule.

    Is this recipe healthy?

    Yes, this cauliflower coconut curry is extremely healthy with the abundance of spices and produce all packed into one pot. Not only does turmeric provide anti-inflammatory and antioxidant benefits, but it transforms this vegetable curry with coconut milk into a creamy vegan yellow curry that is so pleasing to the eye. Serve this to your family, and they won’t be able to get over that bright yellow color!

    Cooked dish is photographed from the front view in a big pot.

    Is it spicy?

    Our Indian style cauliflower curry is not spicy, but the spice factor can certainly be enhanced with the right ingredients. To make a creamy, spicy curry, there are a few options:

    • Purchase the hot variety of your favorite store-bought curry powder blend.
    • Add ½ tsp Cayenne Pepper when you add the spices.
    • Add 1 sliced Indian green chile or Thai Bird chile when you add the vegetables.

    PRO TIP: The spice in fresh chiles lies mostly in the seeds and ribs. Since Indian green chiles and Thai Bird chiles are long and slender, it is hard to remove the seeds and ribs to dial down the spice factor.
    If you still want some heat, but not too much, simply use half the chile. Save the remaining half as a garnish, for more spice, or the next time you make this cauliflower curry bowl.

    When working with fresh chiles, don’t forget to wash your hands, cutting board, and knife immediately after slicing the chile. It’s not so fun when you wipe your eye with chile hands – ouch!

    Indian Style cauliflower curry spread over rice and photographed from the top view as a woman is placing it on the table.

    What to serve it with?

    I find the best way to serve this cauliflower coconut curry is over a bed of freshly made basmati rice (or brown rice for greater nutrition). I also love serving it with my mom’s bulgur pilaf.

    The sauce from the cauliflower turmeric curry seeps into the rice, creating a luscious, comforting meal. And if you find you still have some leftover yellow curry sauce in the bottom of your bowl, warm, toasted Naan bread acts as the perfect utensil to sop up all those juices!

    A Few tips and variations:

    Here are a few helpful tips and a few recipe variations you can follow for making the best cauliflower curry

    • Don’t have sweet potatoes, but still want the naturally sweet flavor? Use an equal amount of regular potatoes + 1-2 tsp maple syrup.
    • Add 1 Tablespoon of Homemade Turmeric Paste when you add the liquid ingredients to make it an even brighter Indian yellow curry.
    • Want to make this cauliflower curry recipe low carb? Omit the green peas for a simple sweet potato chickpea curry.
    • Want a Cauliflower Chickpea Spinach Curry? Add in 1-2 cups fresh spinach leaves at the end of cooking for additional flavor and nutrition.
    • Looking to enjoy this vegan cauliflower curry throughout the week? Reheat individual portions in a microwave-safe bowl on HIGH in 1-minute intervals, stirring in between, until thoroughly warmed through.
      Alternatively, reheat over medium heat in a small saucepan with the lid on until it reaches a gentle boil. If the Indian cauliflower dish seems a bit too thick, add 1-2 Tablespoons water to loosen it up.
    • Want to freeze the leftovers? Go for it! This cauliflower sweet potato curry freezes beautifully. As a matter of fact, I use my favorite 2-compartment meal prep containers (affiliate link) to fill one side with this curry and the other (smaller) side with rice and freeze it to serve later when I don’t feel like cooking.

    Other veggie-packed vegan dinner recipes you might like:

    • Vegan Chili Recipe – Warm chili spices mixed in with beans, bulgur, and other veggies make this big pot of heartwarming chili.
    • Stuffed Acorn Squash Vegan – While most people serve acorn squash during the holidays, I cook it throughout the year. This stuffed acorn squash is my go-to recipe for an easy weeknight dinner.
    • Vegan Quinoa Recipes – I incorporate quinoa in our diet often because of its high protein content. This recipe is my favorite to make on a Tuesday night.
    • Vegan Mushroom Ragout – This dish is for those who are mushroom lovers. Mixed with earthy and nutty, this recipe is perfect for a luxurious dinner.
    • Slow Cooker Butternut Squash Stew – This butternut squash stew is as easy as it gets! Place everything in your slow cooker and enjoy dinner in 3-4 hours.
    • Butternut Squash Noodles – A low-carb dinner you can make on a Tuesday night by swapping spaghetti with squash noodles. Only 6 ingredients.
    • Need more inspiration? Check out all our Vegetarian Meal recipes.

    Other curry recipes you might like:

    • Thai Green Beef Curry in Slow Cooker – Eastern flavors mixed in with stew meat mixed in with fresh lemongrass and ginger cooked in the slow cooker.
    • Chicken and Chickpea Curry – Learn to make chicken curry from the pros. This recipe features a technique I learned while I was living in the Caribbean.
    • Tomato Curry Soup – Garnished with cumin roasted shrimp this curried tomato soup is a meal-worthy dish you can make on a weeknight.
    • Brown Rice Curry – A basic brown rice recipe packed with veggies and curry flavors.

    Cauliflower Curry Recipe Image
    Print

    Vegan Cauliflower Curry With Coconut Milk

    This Indian Cauliflower Curry Recipe is an easy, vegan, one-pot meal that can be ready in under 45 minutes. The warm, Indian spices and creamy coconut milk transform this vegan curry into a vibrant and flavorful dish. Serve it over rice for a complete meal to enjoy any night of the week.
    Course Weeknight Dinner
    Cuisine Indian
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 420kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil
    • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
    • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
    • 1 tablespoon curry powder
    • 1 teaspoon ground turmeric
    • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • 1 medium sized onion chopped (approximately 1 cup)
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ginger minced
    • 3 cloves of garlic minced
    • 1 15 oz. can diced tomatoes
    • 1 15 oz. can unsweetened coconut milk (or 1 cup plain whole milk yogurt)
    • ¾ cup vegetable broth
    • A small head of cauliflower cut into 1-inch florets (approximately 3-4 cups)
    • 1 large or 2 small sweet potato, cubed (approximately 2 cups)
    • 1 cup cooked chickpeas
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¾ cup green peas frozen or fresh (no need to thaw if using frozen)
    • 1 tablespoon cilantro chopped - more as a garnish
    • A handful of salted cashews as garnish optional

    Instructions

    • Heat oil in a large heavy bottom pan (such as a Dutch Oven) over medium heat. Add in the ground coriander, ground cumin, curry powder, ground turmeric, ground cinnamon, and onion. Sauteé, stirring constantly, until onion is softened, 4-5 minutes.
    • Add in the ginger and cook for 1 minute or until fragrant.
    • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds. At this point, it should be a thick mixture that looks like it needs some liquid.
    • Add in the tomatoes, coconut milk, vegetable broth, cauliflower florets, sweet potatoes, chickpeas, and salt. Give it a gentle stir.
    • Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to medium low and let it simmer for 20-25 minutes or until sweet potatoes are softened.
    • Stir in the green peas and cilantro.
    • Garnish with cilantro and chopped cashews (if using). Serve over rice.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Calories: 420kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 24g | Sodium: 784mg | Potassium: 916mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 712IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 5mg

    This Indian Cauliflower Curry Recipe was originally published in June 2019. It has been updated with additional helpful information and no changes to the originally published recipes in September 2020.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-curry-recipe/feed/ 31
    Mexican Quinoa Recipe – One Pan https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-quinoa/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-quinoa/#comments Wed, 05 Aug 2020 06:22:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=21725 This post is sponsored by Circulon, but as always all opinions are mine. Today I come to you with one…]]>

    This post is sponsored by Circulon, but as always all opinions are mine.

    Today I come to you with one of my favorite quinoa recipes that happens to be easy to make, clean, healthy, wholesome, vegan, and gluten-free. If you are with me, you are in for a treat today because we are making an incredibly delicious and versatile (more on that in a minute) Mexican Quinoa Recipe that is made in one pan and ready in 30 minutes.

    Mexican Quinoa Recipe served in a bowl photographed from the top view

    This is yet another recipe I am adding to my collection of easy quinoa recipes.

    Now, I know most of you are big fans of Mexican rice, and believe me, I am no different. However, I think it is fun to switch things up every once in a while. I think we can all agree that using (plant) protein-packed quinoa instead of rice is a great and healthy alternative to our favorite Mexican dish.

    Easy Quinoa Recipes - Quinoa with black beans is photographed in a pan from the top view

    What I love the most about this Mexican quinoa bowl is that it all comes together in one pan, which makes the cleaning part so much easier for later. It is as simple as putting everything in one pan and letting it do its thing. Speaking of pans, I partnered up with my friends at Circulon to bring this recipe to you.

    To make this One Pan Mexican Quinoa, I used their 12-inch Circulon Symmetry Merlot pan, the newest addition to the Circulon Symmetry family. It is a great pan that you can use for any dish (including soups). Though I think the best part is pan is that it is both oven and dishwasher safe.

    Onto the recipe…

    Ingredients for Mexican Quinoa Recipe

    For this recipe, you will need an onion, bell peppers, spices (cumin and coriander), garlic, uncooked quinoa, black beans, corn, tomatoes, water (or vegetable broth), and cilantro.

    Plus, though they are optional, you can top it off with avocado, pumpkin seeds, and scallions.

    To make this one pot quinoa dish a quick Tuesday night dinner, I used canned beans, diced tomatoes, and corn. I also used vegetable stock, but water would also work.

    Ingredients: Corn, peppers, spices, black beans, peppers, and onion are photographed from the top view
    One Pan Mexican Quinoa photographed from the top view as it is mixed

    How To Cook Quinoa On The Stove

    I wrote a detailed post on how to make quinoa but below is a quick explanation.

    When I am cooking quinoa by itself, the water to quinoa ratio that I use is 1 cup quinoa to 2 cups water.

    If I have it on hand, I sometimes switch it up and use vegetable or chicken stock instead of water. I think it is such an easy way to make quinoa taste good.

    In the recipe, however, it is a little bit different because we are cooking our quinoa with some vegetables. Since vegetables release some of their juices during the cooking process, we do not need as much water. Therefore, we use only 1 cup of liquid to make this Mexican style quinoa recipe.

    How To Make

    The process of making this one pan Mexican quinoa bowl has 2 folds.

    1. Sauté aromatics: onions, peppers ( I used bell peppers, but you can also use jalapeños), ground cumin, ground coriander, and garlic for a few minutes.
    2. Add in the rest of the ingredients and cook: Stir in the black beans, tomatoes, corn, quinoa and your liquid into the mixture. You let it cook for 20-25 minutes with the lid on, and voila, dinner is ready!

    RELATED: Need some inspiration for recipes with quinoa? If so, I’ve got you covered! Below are a few of the best quinoa recipes that I make over and over again with both vegan and vegetarian options.

    Step By Step Recipe How-To Video:

    Creative Ways To Use This One Pan Mexican Quinoa Recipe

    As I mentioned at the beginning of this post, this Mexican style quinoa dish is so versatile. Even though I served it by itself here, you can use this basic recipe to create different dishes. Here are some creative ideas:

    A woman is photographed from the top view as she is serving food from the top view
    Easy Mexican Quinoa recipe photographed from the front view

    Serve it as a savory breakfast bowl with an egg on top:

    This makes a great protein-packed breakfast, especially if you work out in the morning and need a healthy breakfast to start the day.

    Turn it into a Vegan Mexican Quinoa Salad:

    The beauty of this recipe is that you can serve it both warm and cold. I usually serve it as a warm meal on the day off. Then on the next day, I add in some chopped red onion, cilantro, avocados, radishes, and lime juice to turn it into a salad.

    Serve it as a filling for a taco:

    This quinoa and black bean recipe is perfect as a taco filling. Depending on the dietary restrictions of your family, you can roast some vegetables (cubed sweet potatoes are my favorite) and add them into the Mexican quinoa to make it flavorful and filling.

    If you have meat eaters in the family, you can fill your tacos with the quinoa and then top it off with cooked ground beef or shredded chicken as well.

    Serve it as a side dish:

    While I am perfectly fine with serving this gluten-free Mexican quinoa bowl recipe by itself, I also think that it makes a great vegetarian side dish. Especially, if you are serving other Mexican dishes like Slow Cooked Beef Brisket Tacos, Grilled Flank Steak Tacos, or not so Mexican but still delicious Chicken and Potato Bake.

    Two bowl of Mexican Style Quinoa photographed from the top view

    A Few Tips for The Best Mexican Quinoa Recipe

    • Spices: Do not skip on sautéing ground cumin and coriander at the beginning. They are both oil-soluble spices, which means in order for them to release their flavors they need to interact with oil. If you want to make this recipe spicier, you can swap bell peppers with sliced jalapeños.
    • Top it off with a dollop of sour cream or Mexican cotija cheese: I wanted to keep this recipe basic and vegan so I just garnished it with avocado slices and some fresh cilantro. However, if you don’t mind it being vegetarian, you can (in true Mexican fashion) top it off with some sour cream or cotija cheese as well.

    How to store this Mexican Quinoa Bowl:

    If you have leftovers you can place them in an airtight container. It should keep fresh up to 3 days in the fridge.

    Other Mexican Recipes You Might Like

    Mexican Quinoa Recipe Image
    Print

    Mexican Quinoa Recipe

    Whether you serve it as a weeknight dinner or a healthy breakfast with an egg on top, this vegan and gluten free One-Pan Mexican Quinoa Recipe is an easy meal you can make for your family. It is ready in 30 minutes and can alternatively be served as a side dish or just by itself for a protein-packed nutritious meal.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine Mexican
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 346kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Mexican Quinoa:

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 medium-sized onion chopped
    • 2 small bell peppers chopped (or 2 jalapeno peppers, seeded and chopped)
    • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
    • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
    • 2 cloves garlic peeled and minced
    • 1 cup quinoa rinsed and drained
    • 1 15 oz. can black beans, drained and rinsed
    • 1 cup corn kernels fresh or frozen
    • 1 can diced tomatoes with all their juices (15 oz.)
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 cup water or vegetable broth
    • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped – plus more as garnish

    As Garnish:

    • 1 ripe avocado
    • 2 stalks of scallions chopped
    • 1 lime cut into wedges
    • Handful of pumpkin seeds optional

    Instructions

    • Heat oil in a 12-inch pan with a lid over medium heat. Add in the onion, peppers, cumin, and coriander. Cook, stirring occasionally, until onions are translucent, 7-8 minutes.
    • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
    • Add in the quinoa, black beans, corn kernels, tomatoes, and salt and pepper. Give it a large stir.
    • Pour in the liquid, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil. Then turn the heat down to low and let it simmer for 20-23 minutes or until all the liquid is absorbed.
    • Let it sit for 5 minutes or so and fluff with a fork. Right before serving stir in the fresh cilantro.
    • Spoon the Mexican quinoa into bowls and garnish with fresh cilantro, avocado, and scallions. Serve with wedges of lime.

    Video

    Notes

    A few notes for the best results:
    • Spices: Do not skip on sautéing ground cumin and coriander at the beginning. They are both oil-soluble spices, which means in order for them to release their flavors they need to interact with oil. If you want to make this recipe spicier, you can swap bell peppers with sliced jalapeños.
    • Top it off with a dollop of sour cream or Mexican cotija cheese: I wanted to keep this recipe basic and vegan so I just garnished it with avocado slices and some fresh cilantro. However, if you don’t mind it being vegetarian, you can (in true Mexican fashion) top it off with some sour cream or cotija cheese as well.
    • Want to make this in a pressure cooker instead? Try my Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa recipe.
    • You can follow the recipe as written and cook your quinoa with the vegetables. Doing so takes about 20-25 minutes. However, if you are short on time and have some leftover cooked quinoa, you can add that in after the vegetables are cooked. This way you do not have to wait for the quinoa to cook. Once it is warmed throughly your meal will be ready.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 346kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 388mg | Potassium: 845mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 778IU | Vitamin C: 42mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 4mg

    This post was originally published in January 2019. It has been updated with additional information and no changes to the originally published recipe in August 2020.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-quinoa/feed/ 84
    Almond Flour Banana Bread (Gluten-Free) https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-banana-bread/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-banana-bread/#comments Mon, 18 May 2020 09:41:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27444 It is no secret that banana bread is a classic. But what about banana bread made with almond flour? If…]]>

    It is no secret that banana bread is a classic. But what about banana bread made with almond flour?

    If you have been around for a while you know that I love baking with almond flour and have already featured similar almond flour quick bread recipes like Almond Flour Pumpkin Bread, Almond Flour Zucchini Bread, and my savory Almond Flour Bread recipe.

    A sliced almond flour banana bread recipe photographed from the top view.

    Don’t get me wrong, I am already a fan of regular banana bread. But after enjoying one too many banana bread slices, I knew I had to come up with a version that omitted the regular all-purpose or whole wheat flour, dairy, and refined sugar. That was the inspiration for this gluten-free banana bread made with almond flour.

    Upon all the recipe testing, I discovered two tricks:

    1. Getting the right ratio of almond flour to mashed bananas.
    2. Adding a secondary “binder” to ensure the banana loaf is baked until light and springy, rather than dense and sunken.

    The bonus is that this almond banana bread is naturally low-carb, paleo, gluten-free, grain-free, wheat-free, dairy-free, and with the right adjustments, keto-friendly, too!

    How To Bake Bread With Almond Flour

    This is a question I get a lot from readers. I finally was able to answer it with this Almond Flour Bread recipe. But today, I wanted to take it a step further and create a recipe for banana bread using almond flour that could be enjoyed as a sweet breakfast treat, afternoon snack, or even dessert.

    It’s also another sweet treat I can add to my library of almond flour recipes.

    Recipe Ingredients

    All you need is a few healthy simple ingredients to make this banana almond loaf. As with all quick bread recipes, the following are broken down into two categories – wet ingredients and dry ingredients. You will need:

    Wet ingredients for this banana bread recipe photographed from the top view
    A woman is photographed as she is whisking the wet ingredients

    Wet Ingredients:

    • Vegetable Oil – I used grapeseed oil, but avocado or coconut oil would also work. If you decide to go with coconut oil, melt the amount you need in a microwave-safe bowl in the microwave on HIGH for 30 seconds and allow it to cool as you prepare the rest of the ingredients.
    • Very-Ripe, Brown-Speckled Bananas – The more brown spots your bananas have, the better! This is an indication of overripe, naturally sweet bananas. As long as your bananas are sweet going into the batter, there is no need to add a ton of sugar. Either purchase yellow bananas a few days in advance and allow them to ripen on your kitchen counter or ask a grocery store salesman if they have a reduced produce rack. This is an underrated area of the grocery store where they place the produce that is past its prime – brown-speckled bananas included!

    PRO TIP: Rather than relying on the number of bananas called for in the recipe, use a digital kitchen scale (affiliate link) or measuring cups for the mashed bananas. Since bananas vary so much in size, weighing or properly measuring out the mashed bananas will ensure accuracy and consistency every time.

    • Eggs – Three large eggs is the first binding ingredient. Make sure to bring them to room temperature.
    • Coconut Sugar – The only added sugar in this recipe is coconut sugar – no refined sugar in sight. I love baking with coconut sugar because it does not spike your blood sugar like conventional granulated sugar and includes an added dose of fiber, vitamins, and minerals.
    • Apple Cider Vinegar – The acid in the apple cider vinegar reacts with the baking soda to create carbon dioxide, which helps give this healthy gluten-free banana bread an extra lift.
    • Vanilla Extract – Make sure to use pure vanilla extract for a floral sweetness that brightens up all the flavors.

    Dry Ingredients:

    Dry ingredients for the best healthy banana bread with almond flour are laid out and photographed from the top view.
    A woman is photographed from the top view as she is mixing the dry ingredients
    • Almond Flour – My favorite brand is Blue Diamond (affiliate link) and the one I recommend for all of my almond flour recipes. It is blanched almond flour that is light golden in color and subtly sweet in aroma, making it my go-to choice. If you prefer to use almond meal (almond flour with the skins still intact), I really like Barney. If all else fails, you can always make almond flour at home with raw, unsalted almonds.
    • Ground Flaxseed – This is the secondary “binder” and the second trick I learned when baking this easy banana bread recipe. Just like when you make a flax egg, the ground flaxseed naturally gels when mixed with the wet ingredients. This creates a better structure overall. Ground golden flaxseed will also work.
    • Ground Cinnamon – I first tested this almond flour banana cake with 2 teaspoons of cinnamon, but I felt the cinnamon overpowered all the other flavors. I found 1 teaspoon to be just the right amount while still being able to taste the banana flavor.
    • Baking Soda – As mentioned before, the alkaline properties of baking soda react with the apple cider vinegar to produce carbon dioxide bubbles. It also creates a darker, golden brown color.
    • Baking Powder – Flourless banana bread needs as much help as it can get in the leavening department to ensure a proper rise. Baking powder helps to make this possible. For the paleo version, in place of 1 teaspoon of baking powder, you can mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar.
    • Fine Sea Salt – Fine sea salt or kosher salt will do. I find the fine sea salt granules dissolve better into the batter.
    • Semi-Sweet Chocolate Chips (optional) – The chocolate chips are optional, especially if you are watching your sugar or following a Low-Carb, Paleo, or Keto diet. Enjoy Life (affiliate link) makes delicious dairy-free chocolate chips that I simply adore.
    • If you decide to opt-out of chocolate chips, you can also decorate the top with a few tablespoons of sliced almonds.
    A woman is photographed from the top view as she is folding the dry ingredients into the wet ones
    A woman is photographed from the top view as she is adding chocolate chips into the batter

    How To Make Banana Bread with Almond Flour

    You will need two bowls, a whisk, and a spatula to make this healthy banana bread with almond flour. Simply:

    1. Prepare the loaf pan. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees and grease a 9×5 inch or 8×4 inch loaf pan with 1 teaspoon oil. Line the center with a piece of parchment paper hanging off the sides, as this helps for easy removal.
    2. Whisk the wet ingredients. In a medium bowl or large measuring cup, whisk together the coconut oil, mashed bananas, eggs, coconut sugar, apple cider vinegar, and vanilla extract.
    3. Whisk the dry ingredients. In a larger bowl, whisk together the almond flour, ground flaxseed, cinnamon, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.
    4. Combine the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients. Mix until just combined.
    5. Optionally, add the chocolate chips (or mix-ins). If using, gently fold in the chocolate chips (or any other mix-in) until just combined. Transfer to the prepared loaf pan and top with an additional 2 Tablespoons of chocolate chips or mix-in, gently pressing into the surface.
    6. Bake. Baking time is between 55 to 60 minutes, or until golden brown and a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean. Allow to cool in the pan for 15 minutes, then gently transfer to a cooling rack to cool completely.

    PRO TIP: I recommend allowing the almond banana bread to cool completely, at least 1-2 hours. The almond flour and banana provide a lot of fat and moisture, so it will be very soft and gooey while still warm. The longer it sits, the more the ingredients can marry together, creating a balanced, flavorful banana bread.

    A sliced almond banana bread photographed from the front view and served with a few cups of coffee.

    Variations:

    This flourless banana bread can be made with a few variations:

    • Banana Nut Bread: Add ½ cup unsalted, lightly toasted nuts, such as walnuts or pecans.
    • (Flourless) Banana Bread with Dried Fruit: Add ¼ – ½ cup dried cranberries, raisins or diced Turkish apricots.
    • (Gluten-Free) Banana Coconut Bread: Add ½ cup unsweetened, shredded coconut to really bring out all that coconut flavor!
    • Banana Spice Bread: As I mentioned before, I only used 1 teaspoon of cinnamon to keep the flavors cleaner. But if you enjoy banana bread with a kick of warming spices, add another 1 teaspoon cinnamon or mix it up with ¼ teaspoon each ground allspice, nutmeg and cloves.

    How To Store, Freeze, & Thaw

    For best results, store the wheat-free banana bread in an airtight container or wrapped in parchment paper on the kitchen counter for up to 3 days or in the fridge for up to one week.

    I would not recommend wrapping this banana nut bread in plastic wrap, as this method will trap moisture and make the bread too soggy.

    For longer storage, slice and place into a large plastic freezer storage bag with small squares of parchment between each slice. Alternatively, you can also wrap them individually with pre-cut parchment paper. Seal tight, label, date, and store in the freezer for up to 3 months.

    To enjoy, simply thaw to room temperature or pop a slice in your toaster!

    Expert Tips

    Here are a few tips that will help you get the best almond flour banana bread on your first try:

    • Place a thin piece of parchment paper in the center of your loaf pan. This makes it easier to remove the banana bread from the pan without ruining those delicate chocolate chips on top.
    • For Paleo Banana Bread: For the paleo version, in place of 1 teaspoon of baking powder, you can mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar.
    • Weigh or use measuring cups after mashing the bananas. I mention this tip again because it is the key to baking this quick bread recipe to the right texture.
    • If you do not have Apple Cider Vinegar on hand, replace it with an equal amount of freshly squeezed lemon juice.
    • For an alternative sweetener, try a mix of 2 Tablespoons coconut sugar and 2 Tablespoons maple syrup, honey or agave nectar. If you would prefer to use only a liquid sweetener (maple syrup, honey, agave), I would reduce it down to ¼ cup, to account for the added liquid.
    • For a Keto-friendly version, I read a few recipes that included no added sugar and relied only on the sweetness of the bananas. You can also replace the coconut sugar with 1/4 teaspoon of stevia powder for a keto banana bread recipe.

    FAQs

    How many calories is a slice of this gluten-free banana bread?

    This banana nut bread yields 10 slices of banana bread, and according to my nutrition calculator, each slice is 254 calories. For more information, please see the recipe card.

    Can I use coconut flour in place of almond flour in this recipe?

    I would not recommend using coconut flour as it behaves differently. Since coconut flour requires more liquid, if you use it in place of almond flour you might end up with dry banana bread.

    How to store almond flour banana bread?

    Store almond flour bread in an airtight container or wrapped in parchment paper on the kitchen counter for up to 3 days or in the fridge for up to one week.

    Can I Make Banana Muffins Using The Same Batter for this banana bread with almond flour?

    You sure can. Simply divide the batter equally in a 12-cup muffin tin and bake in a pre-heated 375 F degree oven for 30-35 minutes.

    Similar Baked Goods You Might Also Like:

    Other Almond Flour and Banana Recipes You Might Like:

    Other Almond Flour Cakes/ Quick Bread Recipes:

    There you have it, friends. An absolutely delicious easy banana bread recipe with almond flour that you can serve everyone in your family. If you are in need of a quick visual, watch the quick how-to video I made for you in the recipe card.

    Almond flour banana bread sliced on a plate with coffee on the side
    Print

    Almond Flour Banana Bread Recipe

    The one and only Almond Flour Banana Bread recipe you need. Sweetened with a little bit of coconut sugar and ripe bananas, this low-carb banana almond loaf is gluten-free, dairy-free, wheat-free, and paleo friendly.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour
    Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
    Servings 10 slices
    Calories 254kcal

    Ingredients

    Wet Ingredients:

    • 1 Tablespoon vegetable Oil, plus 1 teaspoon for greasing the pan (coconut oil, avocado oil, grapeseed oil would all work) (14g)
    • 2-3 Ripe Bananas Brown-Speckled, Medium Bananas, mashed, about 1 ¼ cups (300g)
    • 3 large eggs at room temperature
    • cup (70g) Coconut Sugar OR ¼ cup (84g) Maple Syrup/Honey
    • 1 Tablespoon Apple Cider Vinegar (15g)
    • 1 teaspoon Vanilla Extract (4g)

    Dry Ingredients:

    • 2 cups Almond Flour (240g)
    • ¼ cup Ground Flaxseed (28g)
    • 1 teaspoon Ground Cinnamon (3g)
    • ¾ teaspoon Baking Soda (4g)
    • 1 teaspoon Baking Powder* (4g)
    • ½ teaspoon Fine Sea Salt (2g)
    • ¼ cup Semi-Sweet Chocolate Chips 60g plus 2 Tablespoons (30g) extra for sprinkling on top

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Grease an 8X4 or 9×5 inch loaf pan with 1 teaspoon oil and line with a piece of parchment paper in the middle, with excess hanging out of the sides (this helps for easy removal).
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the oil, mashed bananas, eggs, coconut sugar OR maple syrup/honey, apple cider vinegar and vanilla extract.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the almond flour, flaxseed, cinnamon, baking soda, baking powder and salt. 
    • Mix dry and wet ingredients together. Fold in the chocolate chips, if using.
    • Transfer to the prepared loaf pan, smooth the top and sprinkle with chocolate chips, if using, gently pressing them onto the surface. Bake 55-60 minutes, or until golden brown and a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean. 
    • Let cool in the pan for 15 minutes, then transfer to a cooling rack to cool completely.
    • Slice and serve.

    Video

    Notes

    • Want to turn these into muffins instead? If so, simply divide the batter equally in a 12-cup muffin tin and bake in a pre-heated 375 F degree oven for 30-35 minutes.
    • For the paleo version, in place of 1 teaspoon of baking powder, you can mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar.
    VARIATIONS:
    • Banana Nut Bread: Add ½ cup unsalted, lightly toasted nuts, such as walnuts or pecans.
    • (Flourless) Banana Bread with Dried Fruit: Add ¼ – ½ cup dried cranberries, raisins or diced Turkish apricots.
    • (Gluten-Free) Banana Coconut Bread: Add ½ cup unsweetened, shredded coconut to really bring out all that coconut flavor!
    • Banana Spice Bread: As I mentioned before, I only used 1 teaspoon of cinnamon to keep the flavors cleaner. But if you enjoy banana bread with a kick of warming spices, add another 1 teaspoon cinnamon or mix it up with ¼ teaspoon each ground allspice, nutmeg, and cloves.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 254kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 277mg | Potassium: 161mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 86IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 94mg | Iron: 2mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-banana-bread/feed/ 48
    Deviled Eggs Without Mayo https://foolproofliving.com/avocado-deviled-eggs/ https://foolproofliving.com/avocado-deviled-eggs/#comments Tue, 07 Apr 2020 13:31:05 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=13788 I have always had a love and hate relationship with mayonnaise. It’s one of those condiments that I can only…]]>

    I have always had a love and hate relationship with mayonnaise. It’s one of those condiments that I can only consume in small doses. If you are like me, not a fan of mayo, I have some good news for you. I finally figured out the best substitute for mayo in deviled eggs and how to make deviled eggs without mayo (or sour cream).

    The answer is simple: Use creamy avocados in place of mayonnaise. Inspired by my homemade avocado salad dressing, the avocado filling is a great mayonnaise alternative that surprisingly tastes like mayonnaise. Not to mention, it makes a guilt-free and healthy deviled eggs recipe with a modern twist. It is also a tasty appetizer to serve everyone in your family or any of the mayo haters in your life.

    A plate filled with deviled eggs without mayo are photographed from the top view.

    As we are getting closer to the Easter weekend, I plan on serving them along with my Five Bean Salad, No Mayo Coleslaw, and Deviled Egg Potato Salad.

    These healthy avocado deviled eggs are perfect for potlucks, picnics, game day, and even as a protein-pack snack or an easy appetizer. If you are looking for an alternative to classic flavors and want to try something new, make this your new Easter eggs recipe.

    Recipe Ingredients

    The main ingredients for this avocado deviled eggs recipe are large eggs, avocado, olive oil, white wine vinegar, capers, dijon mustard, jalapeno, garlic, fresh cilantro, paprika, radishes, and chives.

    Ingredient Notes Substitutions:

    • Ripe Avocados: Be sure to pick out a ripe avocado. Softer, ready-to eat avocados make the most delicious creamy avocado filling
    • Vinegar: You can use apple cider vinegar in place of white wine vinegar. If you do not have vinegar, you can use an equal amount of the pickle juice of capers as well.
    • Not a fan of cilantro? Either omit it or use fresh parsley or chives instead
    • Mustard: I like the kick that I get from Dijon mustard but yellow mustard can also be used
    • Additional seasoning: I used the good old salt and black pepper here, but feel free to season it with your favorite spices. A sprinkle of paprika, cayenne pepper, ground cumin, or Everything but the bagel seasoning are a few good examples.

    How To Make Deviled Eggs Without Mayo?

    Start by cooking eggs:

    Before I talk more about how to make this easy recipe, I want to talk about how I cook my eggs. Because as you know, the backbone of deviled eggs is perfectly cooked hard boiled eggs. As someone, who had her fair share of overcooked eggs (with black spots around the edges of the egg yolks), I feel like I nailed it down.

    First, make sure that your eggs are at least a week old. If you use freshly picked eggs, it will be really hard to peel them later. Second, make sure that your pan is big enough to accommodate all of the eggs in a single. If your pan is too small the eggs will not cook evenly.

    Place the eggs in a pan and cover them with 2-inches of water. Bring them to a full boil (or some people call it, rolling boil).

    As soon as it does, take your eggs off the heat, put the lid on, and let them sit for 10-12 minutes. Meanwhile, prep an ice water bath by placing cold water in a bowl with a few ice cubes. Using a slotted spoon fish out the eggs and place them into the ice bath to stop the cooking process.

    Crack each hard boiled egg and peel it under running water: Simply, crack the egg, roll it on the counter and peel it under cold running water.

    How To Make The Egg Filling:

    The secret to the most delicious deviled eggs without mayonnaise is the creamy avocado filling. The ingredient list might look long, but I bet you already have everything in the pantry. Follow the basic steps below to make it:

    Two photos showing how to make deviled eggs without mayo
    1. Get the ingredients ready: Place the cooked yolks, a ripe avocado, seeded jalapenos, fresh cilantro, capers, dijon mustard, and a splash of vinegar in the bowl of a food processor.
    2. Process in the food processor: Give it a few pulses, stop the machine, and scrape the sides. Continue to do this until the avocado filling is nice and smooth.
    3. Prep for assembly: Once the mixture is ready, use a disposable piping bag (affiliate link) or a plastic bag with a star tip to fill the white halves.

    How To Pipe Deviled Eggs

    My favorite part of making deviled eggs for Easter is the assembly. To pipe deviled eggs to create your masterpiece follow the steps below (or watch the video in this post for a visual):

    1. Use a disposable piping bag with a star tip: Cut the bottom part of a disposable piping bag (or a freezer bag) with a pair of scissors. Place a star tip (affiliate link) at the bottom.
    2. Use a tall glass: Place it in a tall glass and fold the excess liner over the rim.
    3. Fill it with the avocado filling: Spoon the creamy mixture into the bag and push it gently towards the bottom.
    4. Start piping: Collect the edges of the piping bag, get the air out as much as you can. Hold the piping bag at a 45-degree angle in the middle of an egg white and fill using a gentle swirling motion. Continue with the rest of the egg whites.
    A plate filled with healthy deviled eggs avocado

    How To Make Ahead Store:

    If you were planning to make these healthy mayo-free deviled eggs with avocado ahead, I would recommend:

    1. Doing it only a day before
    2. Assembling them right before you are ready to serve them.

    Here is why; If you have ever made guacamole you know that avocado starts browning as it sits. The same thing happens in this avocado deviled egg recipe. If you fill the egg whites too early, the filling starts to brown.

    This doesn’t affect the taste, but the beautiful green color turns brown. You can slow down the browning by drizzling a few drops of freshly squeezed lemon juice (or lime juice), but it will still brown if it sits for a long time.

    If you decide to make them ahead, this is what I would do:

    1. Egg Whites: Place the cooked egg whites on a plate in a single layer, cover with stretch film, and keep them in the fridge.
    2. The avocado yolk mixture filling: Transfer it to a bowl, place a plastic wrap directly on the surface (to minimize the browning of the avocado) making sure that it is completely covered, and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container until you are ready to assemble.
    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

    Similar Recipes You Might Also Like:

    All in all this healthy and deliciously creamy deviled eggs recipe makes the best gluten-free and dairy-free appetizer. Whether you serve it during Easter, as a part of your game day food, or your other spring/summer gatherings, it is guaranteed to impress. Below are a few more recipes that you might also like:

    If you try this Deviled Eggs No Mayo recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    deviled eggs no mayo on a plate garnished with radishes
    Print

    Deviled Eggs Without Mayo Recipe

    These Deviled Eggs Made Without Mayo are guaranteed to be the first to disappear in any of your gatherings. They are creamy, tangy and oh-so good. Plus, they are much healthier than the mayo filled deviled eggs. So why not change things up a bit and give this recipe a try?
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes
    Servings 12 egg halves
    Calories 80kcal

    Ingredients

    • 6 large eggs
    • 1 ripe avocado
    • 2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon capers
    • ¼ teaspoon Dijon mustard or grainy or yellow mustard
    • 1 tablespoon jalapeno seeded and minced
    • 1 small clove of garlic peeled and minced
    • 1 tablespoon fresh cilantro
    • pinch paprika
    • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 radish thinly sliced as garnish
    • 1 tablespoon chives chopped as garnish

    Instructions

    • Place eggs in a single layer at the bottom of a saucepan. Cover them with 2-inches of water. Bring it to a full (or rolling) boil. Remove from the heat, cover the pan with a lid, and let it sit for 10-12 minutes. As you are waiting, place a large bowl with cold water and a few cubes of ice. Remove your eggs with a slotted spoon and place them into the cold water. This will stop the cooking. Let them cool for a minute and then start peeling.
    • Slice each egg in half, lengthwise and remove the yolks. Set egg whites on a plate and set it aside.
    • Place egg yolks in the bowl of a food processor. Add in the avocado, olive oil, vinegar, capers, mustard, jalapeno, cilantro, paprika, salt and pepper. Pulse 4-5 times in 1-second intervals. Scrape the bottom and sides of the bowl with a spatula and repeat until it is perfectly pureed. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    • Place the yolk mixture in a piping bag fitted with the star tip. Alternatively, you can use a clean Ziploc bag and cut a small opening in the corner. Pipe the mixture into the hole of each egg white.
    • Garnish each egg with a slice of radish and some chives. Serve.

    Video

    Notes

    • Make-Ahead Instructions: If you were planning to make these healthy mayo-free deviled eggs with avocado ahead, I would recommend doing it only a day before and assembling them right before you are ready to serve them. Here is why; If you have ever made guacamole you know that avocado starts browning as it sits. The same thing happens in this avocado deviled egg recipe. If you fill the egg whites too early, the filling starts to brown.
      This doesn’t affect the taste, but the beautiful green color turns brown. You can slow down the browning by drizzling a few drops of freshly squeezed lemon/lime juice, but it will still brown if it sits for a long time. If you decide to make them ahead, this is what I would do:
      1. Egg Whites: Place the cooked egg whites on a plate in a single layer, cover with stretch film, and keep them in the fridge.
      2. The avocado yolk mixture filling: Transfer it to a bowl, place a plastic wrap directly on the surface (to minimize the browning of the avocado) make sure that it is completely covered, and keep it in the fridge until you are ready to assemble.
    • As you will see in the recipe above, I only used 6 large eggs to make this no mayo deviled eggs recipe. I think it is important to mention that, even after you place all the ingredients in the food processor it barely fills the bottom of the food processor. If you are like me, using a 9-cup food processor, you might have to stop the machine a few times and scrape the bowl (and the sides) to get a really smooth mixture. And if you are making it for a crowd, you can always multiply the recipe.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 80kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 82mg | Sodium: 87mg | Potassium: 115mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/avocado-deviled-eggs/feed/ 11
    5-Ingredient Turmeric Ginger Smoothie Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/turmeric-ginger-smoothie/ https://foolproofliving.com/turmeric-ginger-smoothie/#respond Tue, 25 Feb 2020 19:35:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27522 My love for the turmeric and ginger combo started a few years ago right after we moved to Vermont. The…]]>

    My love for the turmeric and ginger combo started a few years ago right after we moved to Vermont. The sudden temperature change from our life in the Caribbean to our new life in Vermont made my poor body struggle so much that I had to increase my intake of superfoods.

    Three glasses/jars of carrot based turmeric ginger smoothie is photographed from the front view.

    Since then I have taken up the habit of drinking a cup of my ginger turmeric tea during these cold winter months to make myself feel better. Today’s recipe, Ginger Turmeric Smoothie, is inspired by that drink.

    It is a dairy-free carrot-based smoothie that is flavored with oranges, fresh ginger, and ground turmeric. It is naturally sweetened with oranges and sweet carrots.

    CARROT GINGER TURMERIC SMOOTHIE INGREDIENTS

    This turmeric smoothie is made in a high powered blender using only 7 ingredients. They are:

    Ingredients for Orange Ginger Turmeric smoothie are photographed from the top view on a white marble backdrop.
    • Carrots: I used 3 medium-sized whole carrots and juiced them in my Vitamix (more on that and using other blenders and/or a juicer later) 
    • Whole Oranges: When it comes to smoothies I prefer using whole oranges instead of using orange juice only. In this carrot turmeric smoothie, I use 3 peeled Cara Cara oranges but any type of orange you can get your hands on would work.
    • Coconut Water: The “liquid” in the recipe is unsweetened coconut water. When it comes to buying coconut water, I highly recommend reading the labels and getting one that has only one ingredient (coconut water) in it. This brand (affiliate link) is my favorite one. 
    • Fresh Ginger: This recipe uses only one inch of fresh ginger.
    • Ground Turmeric Spice: Since it is widely available I opted for using half a teaspoon of ground turmeric powder. However, if you can get your hands on it, you can use fresh turmeric root as well. If you do so, I recommend using a quarter of a teaspoon of grated fresh turmeric.
    • Ground Black Pepper: Use a pinch of black pepper to activate the most beneficial compound in turmeric, aka curcumin
    • Coconut Oil: Using a half a teaspoon of coconut oil in turmeric smoothies helps our bodies absorb all the benefits of curcumin as it is a fat-soluble compound.

    Wondering why we use ground black pepper and coconut oil when we use turmeric smoothies?

    The quick answer:  One of the most well-researched compound in turmeric is called curcumin. It is known high in antioxidants and known with this antibacterial, anti-inflammatory, and anti-cariogenic properties. (Source) Unfortunately, our bodies are unable to absorb it by itself so we use a pinch of black pepper and coconut oil to reap all of its benefits.

    Longer answer: If you would like to learn more about curcumin and why we use black pepper and coconut oil in more detail, you can find more detailed information in this Golden Milk Recipe post.

    HOW TO MAKE GINGER CARROT JUICE SMOOTHIE

    If you own a high powered blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), blending carrots in smoothies and making carrot-based smoothies is a breeze. 

    Place all ingredients in the blender, turn the machine on and slowly increase the speed until it is fully blended.

    If you think that it is too thick, add in a splash of coconut water and blend until it is to your liking.

    Turmeric Carrot Ginger Smoothie recipe ingredients are placed in a blender and photographed from the top view.
    Tumeric Ginger Smoothie is photographed after all of the ingredients are blended in a blender from the top view.

    At this point you might ask:

    CAN VITAMIX MAKE CARROT JUICE?

    As I was testing this recipe I wondered if I could juice a carrot in my Vitamix. Mostly because I wanted to consume the whole vegetable instead of only drinking its juice.

    The answer is yes. As a matter of fact, making carrot juice with Vitamix is a breeze. With the help of some liquid (in this case unsweetened coconut water) and whole oranges (that are very juicy), you can easily juice carrots in a high powered blender.

    WHAT IF I DON’T HAVE A HIGH POWERED BLENDER?

    If you don’t have a juicer or a high powered blender or if you prefer a thinner (more of a juice like) carrot juice then I would recommend blending the carrots with coconut water first and straining it through a medium-mesh strainer that is lined with cheesecloth.

    Alternatively, you can also use a good quality nut milk bag (affiliate link) to strain the carrot juice.

    A jar filled with Orange ginger turmeric juice is photographed from a close up with a few other glasses in the background from the front view.

    VARIATIONS:

    • If you like to make turmeric smoothies on the regular, I highly suggest making a batch of my golden paste recipe. If you decide to do so simply use a teaspoon of it instead of ground turmeric, black pepper, and coconut oil.
    • What if I wanted to make a juice instead? Can I use the same ingredients? With a few minor adjustments, you can easily make a Carrot Ginger Turmeric juice in no time. If you want to do so, juice the same amount of carrots, oranges, and fresh ginger root. Then mix in a half a teaspoon of ground turmeric spice and a cup of coconut water.
    • What if it is not sweet enough? If you want to make it sweeter you can do a few things:
      • Use pineapples instead of oranges: I find that pineapples are one of the sweetest fruits out there. If you decide to do so, use a cup of fresh or frozen pineapples in place of oranges.
        PS: Carrot Pineapple Smoothie with turmeric is one of my favorite summer smoothies. 
      • Add in natural sweeteners: Add in a splash of maple syrup or a few pitted dates and blend until smooth.
    • If you are a lover of Turmeric Smoothies, be sure to try my Turmeric Green Smoothie Recipe as well.
    three glasses of carrot based turmeric ginger smoothie are photographed from the front view.
    Print

    Turmeric Ginger Smoothie

    This carrot-based Orange Turmeric Ginger Smoothie recipe is made with oranges, fresh ginger, and ground turmeric. It is vegan and naturally sweetened with oranges and sweet carrots.
    Course Smoothies
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 2 servings
    Calories 148kcal

    Ingredients

    • 3 medium stalks of carrot washed peeled and cut into chunks
    • 1 ½ cups of chopped oranges
    • 1 ½ cups of coconut water
    • 1- inch fresh ginger grated (about ½ teaspoon)
    • ½ teaspoon ground turmeric
    • Pinch of black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon coconut oil

    Instructions

    • Place all ingredients in a blender and blend until smooth.
    • Pour and serve immediately.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Calories: 148kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 253mg | Potassium: 987mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 15590IU | Vitamin C: 82mg | Calcium: 127mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/turmeric-ginger-smoothie/feed/ 0
    Best Vegan Chili https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-chili/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-chili/#comments Sun, 23 Feb 2020 13:10:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=21734 Why Should You Try This Recipe? If you are like me, married to a big meat eater, the idea of…]]>

    Why Should You Try This Recipe?

    If you are like me, married to a big meat eater, the idea of making homemade chili without meat may come off as a big goal to achieve. But believe me when I say, meatless chili can be just as delicious thanks to creative uses of a few simple ingredients. 

    However, that’s not all, here are a few more reasons why this vegan chili recipe is awesome:

    1. A plant-based chili recipe based on flavors and textures: When I set out to find the best vegan chili recipe ever, I had one thing in mind and that is to create a no meat chili recipe that mimics the flavors and textures of chili made with ground meat. This recipe achieves that thanks to umami-rich ingredients like tomato paste, soy sauce, diced tomatoes, and dried shiitake mushrooms. Using these ingredients helped me replicate the texture of ground beef by creating my own vegan ground meat mixture.
    2. Easily Adaptable: This easy, low-carb, and low-fat recipe is made with pantry staples, but I made sure to share substitutions (including vegan meat substitutes) so that you know how you can achieve similar results even if you are missing a few ingredients here and there.
    Vegan chili in a bowl garnished with cilantro and avocado slices
    1. Actually healthy: This meatless chili recipe is made with wholesome, plant-based, and actually healthy ingredients, so go ahead and treat yourself to a second bowl.
    2. Ready in under 1 hour: Thanks to canned beans and quick cooking time of vegetables, you can have this healthy vegan chili on the table in less than an hour making it the perfect cozy meal for meatless Monday dinner.

    Need more inspiration for more easy vegan chili recipes? If so, be sure to check out my Vegan Chocolate Chili and Vegan Quinoa Chili recipes.

    Ingredients:

    The list for this veggie chilli ingredients might seem long but I promise that it will make sense once you see the below breakdown followed by various ingredient substitutions:

    ingredients- soy sauce, shiitake mushrooms, tomato paste, diced tomatoes
    • For Umami Rich Plant-Based Meat: This simple vegan chili recipe uses a mixture of walnuts and dried shiitake mushrooms to mimic the flavors of meat. Later, mixed with umami-rich tomato paste and soy sauce, the flavors get so similar to regular chili that no one can tell that this is a no meat chili.
    Ingredients to make the recipe like cilantro, onions, celery, olive oil all laid out on a marble background
    • Chili Ingredients: For deep flavor, I used vegetables like onions, celery, garlic and jalapenos. For additional creaminess and additional earthy flavors, I used Cannellini and black beans (pinto beans or red kidney beans would also work). I used canned beans (one of each kind) as I wanted to be able to make this dish in under one hour.
    • Bulgur Wheat for the meaty texture: For added chewy texture, I used medium-coarse bulgur wheat. If you are new to cooking bulgur, be sure to check out my detailed post on Types of Bulgur Wheat and How to Cook Bulgur Wheat to learn more about it. I recommend this brand of bulgur  (affiliate link), if you can’t find it in your grocery store.
      While I know that some of you might think of Vegan Chili with Bulgur to be an unusual combo, I assure you that the added texture of bulgur brings this veggie chili recipe together.
    Varies spices and heat ingredients like jalapenos and cumin are laid out
    • Spices: In terms of spices, you will need ground cumin and chili powder. Optionally, you can also add in a pinch of spanish paprika, cayenne pepper or even red pepper flakes.
    • Toppings: In my version of vegan vegetable chili here, I opted for chopped red onion, sliced avocados, fresh corn, chopped cilantro, and thinly sliced radishes. The vibrant colors coming from the toppings turn it into what my niece calls, a rainbow chili.
    Toppings are photographed from the top view

    Substitutions and Recipe Variations

    • Use quinoa instead of bulgur: While I highly recommend using bulgur (and think that a quick trip to the store is worth it), you can use a cup of uncooked quinoa in place of bulgur, especially if you are after a vegan gluten free chili recipe. The end result will not be as chewy, but it will still be a delicious vegan chili.
    • Other vegan meat substitutes: If you prefer not to use bulgur (or quinoa), you can try store bought soy or tofu crumbles or crumbled tofu. Impossible Ground Beef, Beyond Meat, and Hodo Mexican Crumbles are a few popular supermarket plant-based meat substitutes I recommend.
    • Dried Shiitake Mushrooms: If you can’t get your hands on dried mushrooms, you can use fresh thinly sliced mushrooms instead. If you do so, you can add them into the pot while you are adding the veggies and skip the grinding step (with walnuts).
    • Other topping ideas: As it is with any chili, any of your favorite toppings would work here.  If you want them to be all vegan, consider using vegan sour cream, vegan cheese, a squeeze of lime juice, and tortilla chips as toppings. Or, if you don’t mind turning it into a vegetarian chili, you can top it off with cotija cheese or crumbled queso fresco as well.

    How to Make Vegan Chili From Scratch?

    The process of making this easy vegan chili bean recipe has 4 folds. From start to finish (including preparation of ingredients), the whole process takes between 45-60 minutes.

    mushroom and walnuts are in a food processor getting mixed
    1. Process walnuts and shiitake mushrooms in a food processor until finely ground. Set them aside. We will use them later.
    photos showing how take vegetarian chili in four steps
    1. Cook the veggies: Heat olive oil in a heavy bottom large pot (such as a large Dutch oven) over medium-high heat. Saute onion, celery, and jalapeños with a wooden spoon until they are translucent. Then add in the spices, tomato paste, and garlic and cook for a minute or so.
    2. Stir in the rest of the ingredients & cook: Add in the diced tomatoes, black beans, kidney beans, vegetable stock, soy sauce, bulgur wheat, and the processed walnut-shiitake mushroom mixture. Put the lid on, bring the mixture to a boil, and then let it simmer until it thickens to your liking, 25-30 minutes.
    3. Garnish & Serve: Ladle it into bowls and top each bowl with your toppings.

    How To Store, Freeze and Reheat?

    I think the best part of this vegetarian black bean chili is that it tastes better the next day. It also stores and freezes well.

    • Storage: Bring the leftover chili bean soup to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and keep it in the fridge upto 4 days. When ready to serve, heat it in a saucepan. If it is too thick, feel free to add ½ cup of vegetable broth or water.
    • Freezing Instructions: Place the chili in a freezer-safe container after it fully cools down. Freeze for upto two months.
    • Thawing Instructions: Let it thaw in the refrigerator overnight. Next day, transfer it into a saucepan, add in a little bit of vegetable stock or water, and heat it over medium heat until it is warmed throughly.
    A big pot of chili as a woman is serving it

    What To Serve With It?

    This vegan black bean chili is a whole meal by itself, but if you want to take it up a notch you can serve it with one of the delicious dishes below:

    Cooking Instructions for Instant Pot and Slow Cooker:

    While I made this vegetarian chili recipe on the stovetop, you can also make it in a pressure cooker and crockpot.

    To make this recipe in the Instant Pot:

    1. Saute: Turn Instant Pot to saute mode. Heat olive oil and add the onions, celery, jalapenos, and spices and cook until softened. Add in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds. Add the rest of the chili ingredients and give it a stir. 
    2. Pressure cook: Secure the lid and cook on Manual on high pressure for 12 minutes. Natural release the pressure for 10 minutes and then move the steam release valve to the venting position to release any remaining pressure. When the floating valve drops, remove the lid. 
    3. Serve: Give it a stir, taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Ladle into bowls and garnish with toppings.

    To make this recipe in the Slow Cooker:

    1. Saute veggies: This is an optional step, but I’d like to saute onion, celery, pepper, and spices (ground cumin and chili seasoning) with olive oil  in a large pot until they are softened before adding them into the slow cooker. I find that this produces a more flavorful vegetarian chili but if you are short on time you can skip this step and put them in the crock pot right away.
    2. Add the rest of the chili ingredients and cook on high for 2 to 3 hours or on low for 4 to 5 hours. 
    3. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Ladle into bowls, garnish with the toppings and serve.

    Expert Cooking Tips:

    • Dried Shiitake Mushrooms: If you look at the recipe below, you’ll see that I listed ½ ounce dried mushrooms. Here in the US, dried mushrooms are sold in 1-ounce packets so it is more accurate to list them as ounces than in cups. If you get one of those packets, simply use half of the packet.
    • For Spicy Vegan Chili: To add some heat, I used jalapeños. If you are serving your no-meat chili to kids, you might want to take the seeds off or use red bell pepper instead. But if you are a lover of spicy food and hot flavors of jalapeños, feel free to add them in with the seeds.

    FAQs

    What vegetables to add to chili?

    You can add in various hearty vegetables like sweet potatoes, cauliflower, broccoli, carrots, green onions, mushrooms, and bell peppers.

    How long can vegan chili last in the fridge?

    As long as it is kept in an airtight container, vegan chili should keep well for up to 4 days.

    How to thicken vegetarian chili?

    To thicken chili, you can let it simmer for longer without the lid or add in an additional can of beans or vegetables like sweet potatoes, broccoli, or cauliflower florets.

    How many calories are in vegan chili?

    This easy vegan chili recipe serves 6 people. It is 325 calories per serving, excluding the toppings.

    Simple Vegan Black Bean Chili recipe in a bowl with avocado garnish

    Other Similar Recipes You Might Also Like:

    Other Healthy Chili Recipes You Might Like

    Other Mexican Inspired Recipes You Might Also Like:

    Other Vegan Soups Recipes You Might Like

    Recipe Credit: Throughout my search for the best vegan chili recipe, I tried several recipes from several websites and cookbooks and finally landed on this version that is heavily adapted from the cookbook, Vegan for Everybody (affiliate link) by America’s Test Kitchen.

    I did make quite a bit of change to their original recipe, “The Ultimate Vegan Chili”, mostly to the cooking technique to make it faster, but in general, I based this recipe on the ingredients that they used.

    Vegan Chili in a bowl garnished with avocados and cilantro
    Print

    Vegan Chili Recipe

    This Easy Vegan Chili Recipe tastes incredible! It’s easy to make with basic pantry ingredients, vegetables and spices. It’s a crowd pleaser that is guaranteed to be a hit with vegan, vegetarian, and meat eaters alike.
    Course Soup
    Cuisine Mexican
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 325kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Walnut Mixture:

    • ½ cup walnuts
    • ½ ounce dried shiitake mushrooms

    For The Vegan Chili:

    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 large onions chopped (about 2 cups)
    • 3 stalks of celery chopped
    • 2 jalapeños seeded and chopped
    • 1 tablespoon ground cumin
    • ¼ cup chili powder
    • 3 tablespoons tomato paste
    • 6 cloves of garlic minced
    • 1 28- oz can diced tomatoes with juices
    • 1 can 15 oz. low sodium black beans, drained and rinsed
    • 1 can 15 oz. Cannellini beans, drained and rinsed
    • 6 cups of vegetable stock or water
    • 3 tablespoons soy sauce use tamari for gluten free option
    • ¾ cup medium coarse bulgur *
    • ½ cup cilantro roughly chopped – plus more as garnish

    Optional Garnishes:

    • 1 ripe avocado cut into small pieces
    • 1 radish sliced thinly (watermelon radish if you can find)
    • ¼ cup whole kernel corn
    • 1 lime cut into wedges

    Instructions

    • Place walnuts and dried shiitake mushrooms in the bowl of a food processor and process until finely ground, 30-45 seconds. Transfer to a bowl and set aside.
    • To make the Vegan Chili: Heat olive oil in a heavy bottom pan (like a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat. Add in onion, celery, and jalapenos. Cook, stirring frequently, until onions begin to brown, 7-9 minutes.
    • Reduce heat to medium and stir in cumin, chili powder, tomato paste, and garlic. Cook, stirring constantly, until fragrant, for about 1 minute.
    • Add in diced tomatoes, black beans, Cannellini beans, vegetable stock, soy sauce, bulgur, and the processed walnut-shiitake mushroom mixture.
    • Put the lid on, bring the mixture to a boil, and then let it simmer until it thickens to your liking, 25-30 minutes. The longer it simmer the thicker it will become.
    • Stir in the cilantro right before serving.
    • Ladle into bowls and top it off with the garnishes.

    Video

    Notes

    • If you are new to cooking with bulgur and not sure about the types of bulgur wheat, be sure to check out my post on Bulgur Wheat.
    • Use quinoa instead of bulgur: While I highly recommend using bulgur (and think that a quick trip to the store is worth it), you can use a cup of uncooked quinoa in place of bulgur, especially if you are after a vegan gluten free chili recipe. The end result will not be as chewy, but it will still be a delicious vegan chili.
    • It is better on the next day: Like in any other chili or stew recipe, this no-meat chili recipe is better on the next day. So feel free to make it a day ahead. On the next day, it might be thicker than you like. If so, it is okay to add in 1/4- 1/2 cup of water or vegetable broth as you are warming it up.
    • It freezes beautifully: The recipe below serves 6 people. If you have leftovers, you can bring the chili to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and freeze it for up to two months. Let it defrost in the fridge a day before you are planning to serve it.
    • Want to make your own chili powder for this recipe? Here is how to make it:
      • Pre-heat the oven to 300 F degrees.
      • Place 2 dried ancho chiles and 2 dried New Mexican chiles on a baking sheet and toast until fragrant, 8-10 minutes. Transfer them onto a plate, let cool for 5 minutes, then remove stems and seeds.
      • Working in batches, grind them in a spice grinder and transfer to a bowl to use in your vegan bean chili later on.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 325kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 946mg | Potassium: 988mg | Fiber: 13g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 3410IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 126mg | Iron: 5mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-chili/feed/ 79
    Apple Salad with Raisins and Walnuts https://foolproofliving.com/apple-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/apple-salad/#comments Thu, 13 Feb 2020 00:45:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22355 This post has been sponsored by Autumn Glory apples, but as always all opinions are my own. If you were…]]>

    This post has been sponsored by Autumn Glory apples, but as always all opinions are my own.

    If you were to ask me what is the number one thing I learned about creating recipes in the last 10 years of blogging about food, my answer would be that for your recipes to taste amazing, you need to balance four things: Salt, acid, fat, and sugar. This apple salad recipe is the epitome of this concept.

    Apple Salad with Yogurt Dressing photographed from the top view.

    Think about it for a second. Almost every dish starts with (sweet) onions, sautéed in (fatty) oil, and then later enhanced with some sort of an acidic ingredient like tomatoes, vinegar, citrus, or cultured dairy like yogurt or sour cream. Then finally, seasoned with salt and pepper.

    Now, obviously the proportions and ingredients change from dish to dish, but if you are familiar with how to categorize your ingredients, you are pretty much bound for a great end product.

    And the best part is that if your recipe tastes bland, you can always add a little bit of what is missing to make it taste great.

    That is why I would say that the second most important thing I learned is that the only way to create something delicious is to taste it as you go.

    If you follow these two steps and work on getting to know your ingredients, then you can start creating your own recipes in a snap that actually tastes good.

    Apple Salad with Yogurt Dressing photographed as a woman is pouring dressing

    Today’s recipe, Apple Salad, is a great example of how to built flavors on top of each other to end up with an out-of-this-world delicious yet stupid easy apple salad in less than 15 minutes.

    So let’s break it down.

    Apple Salad Ingredients

    Apple Salad Recipe Healthy - Ingredients laid out photographed from the top

    Apples & Raisins (Sweet)

    As the name suggests, the main sweet component of the recipe is sliced apples. But they are not just any apples. They are Autumn Glory apples.

    You might remember from last year, they invited me to their orchards in Yakima, WA and we watched the sunrise. Ahhh that sunrise.. I wrote all about it in this How To Make Apple Roses recipe post with some gorgeous photos.

    If you have never tried Autumn Glory apples, they taste like apples flavored with cinnamon with undertones of caramel. I know it might be hard to imagine, but believe me they are that good.

    Sliced thinly (with the skin on), you get the distinct taste of the sweet cinnamon-y flavors of Autumn Glory apples with every bite.

    I promise you guys if you want to make apple salad with fresh apples Autumn Glory apples are the way to go.

    Apples cut in half

    Second sweet component of the recipe is raisins. It is no secret that apples and raisins are a match made in heaven. But together in this recipe, they helped me round up the earthy flavors of the baby spinach and walnuts.

    In the end, I also added a handful of pomegranate arils, but that is mostly because the photos needed a little bit of color and I wanted to add in another layer of fresh fruity flavor. If they are not in season, you’d be totally fine with just using raisins.

    Yogurt dressing ingredients

    Apple Salad Dressing & Cheddar (Acid & Fat)

    Now, I know that most people are accustomed to making apple salad with mayo. While I know how delicious that version tastes, I wanted to make it somewhat healthier so I swapped some of the mayo with yogurt.

    The fat content that came from 2 tablespoons of mayonnaise mixed in with ½ cup of Greek yogurt eliminated the need to add in any oil into the recipe. And a generous squeeze of lemon seasoned with salt and pepper gave me the easiest yet the most delicious apple salad dressing.

    Prefer an apple salad without mayo?
    No problem. Simply follow the exact apple salad dressing recipe below, but swap mayo with 2 tablespoons of olive oil. Give it a taste. If it is not as flavorful as you want, you can add in a clove of minced garlic as well.

    Whatever you do, do yourself a favor and ditch the store-bought salad dressings because as you can see below you could easily create a delicious yogurt-based vinaigrette recipe in no time.

    Initially, I had no intention of adding any type of cheese into this apple salad recipe. However, even with the addition of yogurt (fat + acid), mayonnaise (fat), lemon juice (acid), and a generous amount of salt and pepper, once the sliced apples were mixed in with the rest of the ingredients (spinach, celery, red onion, apples, raisins, and walnuts), it was just not complete.

    It needed more fat to round everything up. So I did what I always do and referred to my secret weapon for creating recipes, The Flavor Bible (Affiliate link). If you are not familiar with this book, it is a guide to help you find pairings for each ingredient organized from every angle: seasons, flavors, ethnic traditions, and ingredient affinities.

    Come to find out, the combination of apples with greens (salad, spinach, etc.), nuts (pecans, walnuts, etc.) and cheese (blue, cheddar, feta, etc.) deliver good results. So I followed in the footsteps of the Flavor Bible and add in some shredded cheddar. Aaaand just like that. This otherwise bland apple raisin salad turned into something extraordinary.

    Want to up your salad game? If so, check out our extensive library of over 75 easy salad recipes.

    a bowl of apple salad recipes with fresh apples close up

    How To Make Apple Salad

    Like I mentioned earlier, even with the chopping of ingredients you can create this easy apple salad with yogurt dressing in less than 15 minutes. The process of making it has three parts:

    First, you make the apple dressing: Simply whisk yogurt, mayo, lemon juice, and salt and pepper in a bowl and set it aside.

    Second, combine baby spinach, chopped celery, thinly sliced red onions raisins, and walnuts in a large bowl. Top it off with thinly sliced apples and shredded cheddar.

    Finally, drizzle the salad with the yogurt-mayo dressing and give it a gentle toss. That is it. It is that simple.

    A Few Tips For The Best Apple Salad Recipe

    A Few Variations & Ideas To Switch It Up:

    • Greens and/or Kale Instead of Baby Spinach: I love a good Spinach Apple Salad, but you can always swap spinach with salad greens or even (thinly) chopped kale.
    • Add in Broccoli for Some Additional Crunch: Chop up some fresh broccoli to add in a super nutritious green vegetable and turn it into a truly delicious apple salad.
    • Try it with different nuts and dried fruits: If you are serving this apple salad during the holidays, you can swap raisins with cranberries and turn it into an Apple Cranberry Walnut Salad. Don’t have walnuts on hand? Use pecans and make it an Apple Pecan Salad. Seriously, friends, the sky’s the limit.
    • Want A Salad That is Dinner Worthy & Protein Packed?  If you are looking for more of a meal-worthy dinner salad, you can top it off with grilled or roasted chicken and turn it into an Apple Walnut Chicken Salad.

    Making It Ahead and What To Do with Leftovers

    As it is most salads mixed with yogurt dressing, this salad doesn’t keep well even if you store it in the fridge in an airtight container.

    However, if you don’t mind keeping the ingredients separate from the dressing and serve it on the side, you can totally make it a day ahead and store them in the fridge for one additional day.

    Ditch the Waldorf Salad and give this simple apple salad recipe a try. I promise with just a few minutes of prep you will end up with a super flavorful salad that you’ll want to put on the weekly rotation all throughout the year.

    Other Salads Recipes You Might Also Like:

    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
    Apple Salad Recipe Image
    Print

    Apple Salad Recipe

    Whether you serve it as a side dish for your holiday dinner or treat yourself for an easy lunch, this sweet and savory Apple Salad with yogurt dressing is such a treat! And it only takes 15 minutes to put together.
    Course Side Dish – Salad
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 258kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Dressing:

    • ½ cup Greek yogurt
    • 2 tablespoons mayonnaise
    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

    For The Salad:

    • 4 cups baby spinach rinsed and spin dried
    • 2 stalks celery chopped
    • ¼ cup red onion thinly sliced
    • ¼ cup raisins
    • ½ cup walnuts or pecans, roughly chopped
    • 1 apple cored and thinly sliced
    • cup cheddar shredded

    Instructions

    To make the dressing:

    • Place yogurt, mayonnaise, lemon juice, and salt and pepper in a bowl. Give it a whisk. Set aside.

    To make the salad:

    • Place spinach, celery, red onion, raisins, walnuts, and apple slices in a large salad bowl.
    • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss.
    • When ready to serve, top it off with shredded cheddar.

    Video

    Notes

    • Note: I added a handful of pomegranate seeds at the last minute mostly for a pop of color for pretty pictures. However, it is totally optional.
    • Making It Ahead and What To Do with Leftovers: As it is most salads mixed with yogurt dressing, this salad doesn’t keep well even if you store it in the fridge in an airtight container. However, if you don’t mind keeping the ingredients separate from the dressing and serve it on the side, you can totally make it a day ahead and store them in the fridge for one additional day.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 258kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 11mg | Sodium: 573mg | Potassium: 426mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 2932IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 145mg | Iron: 2mg

    Can’t Get Enough of Apples? Here are a few more:

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/apple-salad/feed/ 34
    The Best Homemade Chunky Granola Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/chunky-homemade-granola/ https://foolproofliving.com/chunky-homemade-granola/#comments Tue, 11 Feb 2020 22:42:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=483 While I know that it is convenient to purchase granola from the store, I hope that with my easy-to-follow steps,…]]>

    While I know that it is convenient to purchase granola from the store, I hope that with my easy-to-follow steps, helpful tips (especially for the most addictive granola clusters) and foolproof recipe that uses wholesome everyday ingredients you will give this chunky granola recipe a try.

    A jar filled with homemade chunky granola recipe photographed from the top view.

    And hopefully, put this easy granola recipe on the weekly rotation. If you are in, let’s break it down together.

    What’s in granola – Recipe ingredients

    This vegan granola recipe has three sets of ingredients. Wet ingredients, dry ingredients, and optional add-ins (i.e., dried fruit and superfoods.)

    Wet Ingredients:

    • SweetenersMaple Syrup and Coconut Sugar: When I first started making this baked granola recipe, I used to use a combination of maple syrup and brown sugar. However, after deciding to stop using refined sugars in my cooking (back in 2016), I now make it with coconut sugar instead of brown sugar. I think the difference in taste is not recognizable. And I believe, as long as it is consumed in moderation, it is a healthier sweetener as it doesn’t spike up your blood’s glucose and insulin level like brown sugar does due to its low glycemic index value. (Source)
      In place of maple syrup, you can use the same amount of agave nectar and honey as well. 
    • Vanilla Extract: As in most sweet baked goods, the vanilla extract helps with enhancing the flavors of all the other ingredients used in the recipe.
    • Salt: Similar to vanilla extract, salt is an essential ingredient used in baking as it brings out the sweetness of the baked goods. Over the years, I used mostly Kosher and table salt to make this recipe. I think they all work well. 
    • Vegetable Oil: Any oil that you have on hand. When I feel like making this a coconut granola recipe, I use coconut oil to continue with the flavors coming from coconut sugar and unsweetened coconut flakes (that we add in the end.)
      However, in the past, I also made this recipe using other vegetable oils like avocado and grapeseed oil and thought that they all worked well.
    Healthy Granola Recipe with Clusters photographed in a glass jar from the front view

    Dry ingredients:

    • Old Fashioned Rolled Oats: This recipe only works with old fashioned rolled oats. I wanted to mention this because if you mistakenly pick up the quick-cooking oats this recipe will not work. If you are not sure which one to use, here is everything you need to know about the difference between rolled oats and quick oats.
      I usually get my rolled oats from Trader Joe’s as they sell gluten-free certified rolled oats (affiliate link). Using their rolled oats comes handy when I want to make sure that this is a gluten-free granola recipe for my friends who suffer from celiac disease.
      However, you can also use rolled oats brands like Quaker Oats (affiliate link), or even Bob’s Red Mills’ extra-thick rolled oats (affiliate link).
    • A combination of your favorite nuts: This recipe uses 2 cups of chopped, unsweetened and unsalted nuts. The best part about it is that you can use any of your favorite nuts. I went for walnuts and almonds as I like the flavor combo, but feel free to use whatever you want or have on hand.
      Be sure to give them a good chop.

    Optional Add ins

    The following ingredients are optional to add-in to this chunky granola recipe after it is baked. The fact that you can easily change it up is what I like most about this basic granola recipe in that you can change it up with add-ins in any way you want.

    Here are a few options:

    • Dried Fruit: The recipe below suggests adding 1 ½ cups of dried fruit into the granola after it is baked and cooled. Similar to nuts, you can use any dried fruit you like. I love raisins, dried cranberries (I love the orange juice sweetened version), dates, dried figs, and goji berries. 
      With this being said, if you are after a low sugar granola recipe, you can skip adding dried fruit. I think that this recipe is sweet enough without the addition of dried fruits. Alternatively, if you want more sweetness, you can pair it with fresh fruit when you are serving it.
    • Ground Spices: When I make this during the fall and later in the holiday season, I spice it up by adding ground spices like cinnamon, cardamom, allspice, ginger, and nutmeg.
    • Superfoods: I love adding superfoods like unsweetened coconut flakes, ground flaxseeds, chia seeds, and hemp seeds into my granola. I think it is such an easy way to make it a healthier and more nutritious snack option.
    • Chocolate Chips: Now, I know chocolate chips are not considered as a healthy ingredient, but we all need to treat ourselves every once in a while. If you feel like chocolate cravings are creeping up on you, feel free to add in a cup of your favorite chocolate chips in your granola. 

    How to make your own granola?

    There are just a few steps to putting it all together, and it happens in less than 10 minutes. Follow the steps below to make your own chunky granola recipe at home:

    A woman is whisking ingredients for granola
    • Mix the wet ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together maple syrup, coconut sugar (or brown sugar), vanilla extract, vegetable oil, and salt.
    • Mix the dry ingredients: Either in that same large bowl or another one, mix together the rolled oats and nuts. 
    • Mix the wet and dried ingredients together: Using a spatula, mix them together until all the oats and nuts are covered with the wet ingredients.
    A woman is using a ramekin to distribute Crunchy Homemade Granola evenly throughout the pan
    • Transfer it to a baking sheet: Lay a baking sheet with parchment paper or reusable silicone liner such as Silpat (affiliate link). Transfer the granola into the baking sheet and spread it with the help of a spatula. 
      Using a ramekin with a flat bottom press the granola gently and distribute evenly throughout the pan make it compact (More on why we do this is below).

    3 Tips on how to make granola clusters:

    If you are after those addictive homemade granola clusters (some people also call them clumpy granola) the tips below will help you get them in no time:

    1. Use a flat bottom ramekin: Once you spread the granola on the baking sheet, gently press on the granola with the bottom of a ramekin to make it compact. This might seem like an extra step, but doing so helps with getting those lovely clumpy granola pieces with every bite.
    2. Let it cool on the counter: I know it is no fun to wait, but resist the urge to dig in. Let it cool for at least 30 minutes (until it comes to the room temperature) before breaking the chunks.
    3. Be gentle as you break it into chunks: When ready to break it apart, use a large spatula to break it into chunks. I also recommend being gentle as you transfer it into a jar or another airtight container.
    4. Incorporate the additional goodies after it is cooled: Once your granola is baked and cooled, break it into clusters and transfer to another bowl. Add in whatever else you want to add (dried fruit, superfoods, etc.) and give it a gentle toss.
    The Best Low Sugar Chunky Granola Recipe is placed in a bowl and photographed from the front view as it is being drizzled with milk

    How to serve

    While I mostly snack on this chunky granola just by itself, I also serve it as a part of my breakfast or when I need a pick-me-up in the afternoon. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve to inspire you to make this easy and healthy granola recipe at home.

    If you want to watch me prepare these, be sure to watch the video in the recipe card below.

    1. Serve it as a cereal: This is my favorite way to serve. Simply, fill a bowl with a few scoops of this homemade granola cereal and drizzle it with your favorite milk. I usually top it off with a spoon of almond (or peanut) butter and a handful of fresh fruit, especially if I am serving it for breakfast.
    2. Serve it with yogurt and make Greek Yogurt Parfaits: Layer yogurt, fresh fruit, and granola in mason jars for a grab and go snack, just like they do it in Starbucks.  Or you can also use it as a topping for Greek Yogurt Overnight Oats and Chia Yogurt Pudding.
    3. Top your oatmeal off with granola: Whether you make overnight steel cut oats, slow cooker steel cut oatmeal, or almond milk oatmeal, this basic granola recipe is the perfect topping for your oatmeal in the morning.
    Easy and Healthy Granola Recipe (Vegan and Gluten Free) placed on a bed of granola and fruit as a topping and photographed from the top view.

    FAQs

    What temperature to cook granola?

    Over the years of baking this granola, I found that a lower temperature oven does a better job, so I bake my granola in a pre-heated 325 degree oven for 20-25 minutes.

    How long to bake granola?

    It takes about 20-25 minutes for this granola to bake. The visual cue is when it turns golden brown.

    How long does homemade granola last?

    This basic granola usually lasts about 5-7 days on the kitchen counter as long as it is stored in an airtight container. I usually store it in this glass jar (affiliate link), but any of your favorite containers would work. Keeping it in an airtight jar is the key to keeping your granola crunchy. If you want to include it in your kids’ lunch bag, these Stasher bags (affiliate link) are perfect for it.

    Other creative granola recipes you might like:

    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

    If you make this granola recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

    Recipe adapted from America’s Test Kitchen.

    Chunky Granola Recipe Image - A bowl of chunky granola topped off with fruit served in a bowl
    Print

    Chunky Granola Recipe

    Recipe for a deliciously homemade chunky granola that you can make in less than an hour. Simply put everything in a bowl, give it a mix, bake in the oven and enjoy throughout the week. Once you try this recipe, you will never want to go back to store bought granola. Guaranteed.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 30 minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour
    Servings 8 cups
    Calories 470kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1/3 cup maple syrup
    • 1/3 cup packed coconut sugar or brown sugar
    • 4 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1/2 teaspoon table salt
    • 1/2 cup vegetable oil grapeseed, coconut, and avocado oil would all work
    • 5 cups old-fashioned rolled oats
    • 1 cup walnuts chopped
    • 1 cup raw almonds chopped
    • 1/2 cup raisins chopped
    • 1/2 cup cranberries chopped
    • 1/2 cup goji berries chopped
    • 1/2 cup dates chopped
    • 1/2 cup unsweetened coconut flakes

    Instructions

    • Adjust the oven rack to upper middle position. Heat oven to 325 °F.
    • Line your sheet pan with parchment paper. (it helps tremendously when it is time to clean.)
    • Whisk maple syrup, brown sugar, vanilla, salt and oil in a BIG bowl.
    • Add the oats, almonds and walnuts in to the liquid mixture and fold until thoroughly mixed.
    • Transfer the oat mixture onto baking sheet and spread it to make an even layer.
    • Using the back of a ramekin* or a spatula, compress oat mixture until it is very compact.
    • Bake for 20-25 minutes rotating pan once halfway through baking.
    • Once baked, remove it from the oven and let it cool for 15-30 minutes.
    • Break cooled granola into pieces of your desired size.
    • Mix in the chopped dried fruit and shredded coconut.

    Video

    Notes

    • This granola recipe yields about 8-9 cups of granola.
    • Use a flat bottom ramekin: Once you spread the granola on the baking sheet, gently press on the granola with the bottom of a ramekin to make it compact. This might seem like an extra step, but doing so helps with getting those lovely clumpy granola pieces with every bite.
    • Let it cool on the counter: I know it is no fun to wait, but resist the urge to dig in. Let it cool for at least 30 minutes (until it comes to the room temperature) before breaking the chunks.
    • Be gentle as you break it into chunks: When ready to break it apart, use a large spatula to break it into chunks. I also recommend being gentle as you transfer it into a jar or another airtight container.
    • Incorporate the additional goodies after it is cooled: Once your granola is baked and cooled, break it into clusters and transfer to another bowl. Add in whatever else you want to add (dried fruit, superfoods, etc.) and give it a gentle toss.
    • Storing: This basic granola usually lasts about 5-7 days on the kitchen counter as long as it is stored in an airtight container. I usually store it in this glass jar (affiliate link), but any of your favorite containers would work. Keeping it in an airtight jar is the key to keeping your granola crunchy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 470kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 174mg | Potassium: 367mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/chunky-homemade-granola/feed/ 72
    Vegan Burrito Bowl with Cashew Chipotle Cream Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-burrito-bowl/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-burrito-bowl/#comments Thu, 23 Jan 2020 19:36:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=8829 The first time I shared this recipe was back in 2016, right around the time we were in between jobs…]]>

    The first time I shared this recipe was back in 2016, right around the time we were in between jobs and moving. Life was so chaotic back then. I was juggling between keeping my blog alive and the challenges that life was throwing my way.

    Vegan Burrito Bowl recipe topped off with vegan creamy chipotle sauce and cilantro.

    During all of that drama, I needed easy to make, cost-effective and healthy meals that were filling, cheap and super simple. And this Vegan Burrito Bowl recipe was my go-to dish. I still make it often, so today I am giving it a new look with a few additional photos and a quick how-to video.

    About this Mexican Burrito Bowl with cashew chipotle cream sauce recipe

    If you look at the recipe below, you might think that it has a lot of ingredients. While I agree with you that I also know that this is a very forgiving recipe and that you are totally fine if you are missing a few ingredients or want to make substitutions. Additionally, all of those ingredients are pantry staples and/or could be easily found in any supermarket.

    I usually cook some brown rice and/or quinoa on Sunday to use in salads or bowls like this throughout the week. If you have your rice cooked, this vegan taco bowl recipe comes together in less than 30 minutes. I recommend making the Cashew Cream Sauce with Chipotle first and then the black bean mixture. Also, if you like, you can make the cashew cream sauce a day in advance and keep it in a jar in the fridge.

    Whatever you do, do not skip the sauce. The smoky kick that comes from the adobo truly takes this dish to the next level. It also goes so well with all the other ingredients.

    Chipotle burrito bowl ingredients

    The list may look long, but trust me, you probably already have the majority of them in your pantry. This vegan Mexican bowl comes together in three separate parts – the sauce, the filling, and the assembly. You will need:

    A woman is drizzling the bowl with sauce

    Vegan burrito sauce ingredients

    • Cashews – Unsalted, raw, whole cashews will produce the purest and creamiest cashew dressing.
    • Garlic – One clove of raw garlic goes a long way. If you find the taste of raw garlic too astringent, simply use half or omit it altogether.
    • Adobo Sauce – Purchase a small can of Chipotle Peppers in Adobo and spoon out one tablespoon of the sauce.***
    • Avocado – The avocado adds fat and richness. Don’t worry – there will be more avocados to come!
    • Lemon Juice – A fresh burst of acidity makes this sauce pop. If you don’t have lemons, lime juice can be substituted. Just make sure it is freshly squeezed, not the bottled variety.
    • Salt – For flavor and balance, of course. Taste and adjust to your liking.
    • Unsweetened Almond Milk (or Water) – Either liquid will work, just make sure not to use sweetened or flavored almond milk. This will completely alter the flavor of the cashew sauce.

    *** PRO TIP: Need only a small bit of chipotle, but don’t want to throw out the rest? Once you have the amount of chipotle sauce you need for the recipe, transfer the remainder of the can to your blender and blend until smooth. Transfer the now-pureed peppers to a small plastic freezer storage bag, label, date, and store in your freezer. Every time you need Chipotle peppers in adobo, break off the amount you need, seal tight and place back in the freezer. Keep in the freezer for up to 3 months.

    A woman is photographed from the front view as she is serving the recipe

    Burrito filling

    • Olive Oil – A mild, cold-pressed olive oil will do. You can substitute using grapeseed oil, too.
    • Coriander – Light and bright, grinding whole coriander seeds in a spice grinder will offer the freshest flavor.
    • Cumin – Savory and smoky, it pairs beautifully with fresh coriander. Again, grind the whole seeds at home in your spice grinder, if possible.
    • Onion – Use a mild white or yellow onion. If you want a sweeter filling, red or Vidalia onions can be substituted.
    • Red Bell Pepper – I specify red bell peppers for their sweeter flavor, but you can use any color of the rainbow – orange or yellow would be just as delicious.
    • Tomato Paste – Purchase tomato paste in a tube rather than a can. The tube variety is much easier to work with and the remainder can be stored in your fridge.
    • Garlic – Adding the garlic near the end helps to prevent it from burning and becoming bitter. As soon as you can smell the aroma of garlic in the skillet, you know it’s ready.
    • Unsweetened Canned Corn – Make sure to purchase unsweetened corn and drain and rinse thoroughly. Some canned corn varieties have added sweeteners and preservatives that are just unnecessary. If you prefer, one 15 oz bag of frozen corn can also be used – no need to thaw!
    • Canned Black Beans – Drain and rinse the beans along with the canned corn. This helps to rid of excess starch and liquid.
    • Vegetable Stock (or Water) – If you use vegetable stock, make sure it is low-sodium so you can control the amount of salt in the burrito bowl recipe. Alternatively, you can always use water.
    • Salt + Black Pepper – Adjust the seasoning during cooking and at the very end to your liking.
    The ingredients for are photographed along with homemade cashew chipotle cream sauce.

    Assembly

    • Cooked Brown Rice – I always have a big batch of cooked brown rice in the fridge, which makes this recipe so quick and easy, but any of your favorite grain will offer a well-balanced meal. Follow the steps in the recipe card below if you don’t have any brown rice already prepared.
    • Grape Tomatoes – Grape tomatoes add such a beautiful color and fresh, sweet flavor. If the grape tomatoes don’t look good at the store that day, use sweeter cherry tomatoes, which always seem to be in season!
    • Jalapeno or Bell Pepper – If you want this vegan burrito bowl a bit spicy, slice a jalapeno with the seeds and ribs intact. For a milder garnish, simply remove the seeds and ribs or substitute with a bell pepper instead.
    • Avocado – I told you we would be using more avocado! Pile it on for an extra creamy meal!
    • Cilantro – The quintessential garnish to any Mexican meal! Don’t skip it – it really rounds out all the flavors!
    • Lime Wedges – To serve, to brighten it all up at the very end!
    A large bowl of vegan burrito bowl topped off with homemade chipotle cashew sauce is photographed from the top view alongside with some of the ingredients.

    How to make this vegan chipotle sauce recipe

    I recommend making the Mexican cashew cream sauce before the actual burrito bowl. This way, the sauce, and all other ingredients are prepped and ready – all you have to do is toss it together in a bowl! To make the cashew chipotle cream sauce, simply:

    1. Soak the cashews. The secret to any creamy cashew cream sauce is softening the cashews so they easily blend to a smooth puree. To achieve this, soak the cashews in water for at least two hours or up to overnight.
      If you’re in a pinch, speed up the process by pouring boiling water directly over the cashews in a heat-proof bowl and let sit for one hour.
    2. Puree all the sauce ingredients in your food processor. Once the cashews are properly soaked, drain and rinse, then add them to the bowl of your food processor and pulse 5-6 times. Add the garlic, adobo sauce, avocado, lemon juice, and salt.
      Process for 15-20 seconds or until it forms into a paste. With the motor running, add the unsweetened almond milk (or water) through the tube and process until smooth. Adjust the seasoning and set aside.
    Prepared dishes are photographed from the top view.

    How to make chipotle veggie bowl

    This chipotle veggie bowl comes together in a few easy steps. Simply:

    1. Bloom the spices and aromatics. In a large skillet, heat the olive oil over medium heat. Add the cumin and coriander and bloom for 30-45 seconds, or until fragrant. Add the onions and peppers and cook, stirring occasionally, for 5-6 minutes, or until translucent. Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and mix until combined and fragrant, about 30 seconds.
    2. Add the vegetables. Add the rinsed and drained black beans, corn and water. Season with salt and pepper, give it a stir and simmer for 10-15 minutes.
    3. Assemble and serve. Place about 1 cup of cooked brown rice in the bottom of a serving bowl. Spoon around ¼ of the vegan burrito mixture on top of the rice (this helps the rice soak in all those wonderful juices) and garnish with tomatoes, jalapeno (if you like it spicy) or bell pepper, avocado and cilantro. Drizzle a generous amount of the burrito bowl dressing on top and serve with lime wedges. Enjoy!

    Variations

    If you’re looking to add a bit more protein to this vegan Mexican bowl recipe, try one of the below variations.

    • Vegetarian Burrito Bowl Recipe: Add 1-2 freshly fried eggs for every rice bowl for a complete and filling meal.
    • Tofu Burrito Bowl: There are two options – either crumble 4oz firm tofu over each burrito bowl prior to adding the sauce. Or, for a more flavorful meal, cut 1lb firm tofu into ½ inch cubes and simmer in the burrito mixture along with the corn and black beans. Note – you may need a few tablespoons additional stock or liquid, as the tofu will absorb some of those juices.
    • With Quinoa: To stick to a vegan burrito bowl with a boost of plant-based protein, replace the brown rice with an equal amount of quinoa similar to how I did in this Mexican Quinoa Recipe.

     

    a woman is photographed as she is drizzling cashew cream sauce with chipotle over a bad of vegan burrito bowl.
    Print

    Vegan Burrito Bowl with Cashew Chipotle Cream Sauce

    A healthy vegan burrito bowl recipe flavored with homemade cashew chipotle cream sauce. Our favorite burrito ingredients are lightly sautéed, placed on a bed of rice and drizzled with creamy and smokey cashew sauce. 
    Course Main Dish
    Cuisine Mexican
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour
    Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 706kcal

    Ingredients

    For the Cashew Chipotle Cream Sauce:

    • 1 cup cashews soaked for at least 2 hours or overnight
    • 1 clove of garlic minced
    • 1- tablespoon adobo sauce from a can of chipotle peppers in adobo
    • 1/2 ripe avocado
    • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
    • 1/2 teaspoon salt
    • 1/2 cup unsweetened almond milk or water

    For the Burrito Mixture:

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
    • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
    • 1 medium onion chopped
    • 1 medium size red bell pepper seeded and chopped
    • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
    • 2 cloves of garlic minced
    • 1 15 oz. can of unsweetened corn, drained and rinsed
    • 1 15 oz. can of black beans, drained and rinsed
    • 1/4 cup vegetable stock or water
    • 1/2 teaspoon salt
    • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

    To Assemble:

    • 4 cups of cooked brown rice
    • 1/2 cup colorful grape tomatoes sliced
    • 1 jalapeno or bell pepper seeded and slice (optional)
    • 2 stalks of scallions chopped
    • 1 ripe avocado sliced or cubed
    • handful of fresh cilantro leaves rinsed
    • lime wedges to serve it with

    Instructions

    • To make the cashew chipotle cream sauce: Drain and rinse the cashews and place them in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse 5-6 times. Add in the garlic, adobo sauce, avocado, lemon juice, and salt. Process 15-20 seconds until it turns into a paste. Pour in the almond milk (or water) over the tube and process until creamy. Taste it for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    • To make the burrito mixture: Heat oil in a large pan. Add in the coriander and cumin and cook until fragrant, 30-45 seconds. Stir in the onion and red pepper, and cook stirring occasionally, until translucent. This should take 5-6 minutes. Stir in the tomato paste and garlic. Mix until totally combined. Add in the black beans, corn, and water. Season it with salt and pepper. Give it a big stir. Allow it to simmer for 10-15 minutes.
    • To assemble the vegan burrito bowls: Place some brown rice at the bottom of a large bowl. Spoon some burrito mixture on top. Garnish it with tomatoes, peppers, scallions, avocados, and cilantro. Add a dollop (or more) of cashew chipotle cream sauce. Continue with the rest of the bowls. Serve each bowl with lime wedges.

    Video

    Notes

    • If you do not have cooked brown rice on hand, you can make it as follows:
      Heat olive oil in a medium size pot with a lid. Add in the brown rice. Stir constantly until the rice is coated with oil and somewhat toasted, 3-4 minutes. Add in the water and salt. Let it come to a boil. Put the lid on, turn down the heat to low, and let it simmer for 40-45 minutes. Turn off the heat and let it sit 10 minutes without opening the lid. Fluff it with a fork and set aside.
    • Cashew Cream Sauce with Chipotle can be made a day in advance and kept in an airtight jar in the fridge.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 706kcal | Carbohydrates: 90g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 1948mg | Potassium: 1317mg | Fiber: 19g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1296IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 153mg | Iron: 7mg

    A Few Notes On the Recipe:

    • I sometimes switch things up and add a few cups of leftover cooked chicken into the pot towards the end just to warm it up. If you have a husband like mine, who loves chicken, this is an easy way to give this dish a new life.
    • You can make the cashew cream sauce a day in advance and keep it in an airtight container in the fridge. On the next day, be sure to shake it well before use.
    • The consistency of the cashew cream and chipotle sauce depends on your preference. As you can see, in these new photos (and in the video) I made my sauce more liquid-y than the version I made back in the version I published initially (you can see the images below). The consistency of the sauce is a personal preference. Though you can’t go wrong either way.
    • If you don’t have cooked brown rice on hand, you can use slightly warmed corn tortillas and serve this as a taco dish.
    • This dish makes the best leftover lunch the next day and can even be enjoyed cold.

    Other vegan dinner recipes you might like

    A man is holding a large bowl of Vegan Burrito Bowl topped off with Cashew Chipotle Cream Sauce photographed from the front view.
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-burrito-bowl/feed/ 21
    Almond Flour Paleo Gingerbread Cookies https://foolproofliving.com/paleo-gingerbread-cookies/ https://foolproofliving.com/paleo-gingerbread-cookies/#comments Mon, 09 Dec 2019 20:04:45 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=26671 Now that all the Thanksgiving cooking is behind us I am in full-on baking mode. I spent the whole of…]]>

    Now that all the Thanksgiving cooking is behind us I am in full-on baking mode. I spent the whole of last week in the kitchen testing one cookie recipe after another as a preparation for the holiday cookie season. So here I am with this season’s first refined sugar-free, gluten-free, dairy-free, grain-free, and healthy paleo cookie recipe, Almond Flour Gingerbread Cookies.

    A plate full of paleo gingerbread cookies are served with a glass of milk on the side.

    If you are new to baking with almond flour, this paleo ginger molasses cookies recipe is a good one to start as it is just so easy. Everything comes together in a food processor with just a few ingredients that you probably already have in your pantry. I am talking about almond flour, coconut sugar, molasses, and warm winter spices to fill your home with the classic Christmas gingerbread smells.

    A few Almond flour gingerbread cookies served with a glass of milk on the side.

    These paleo ginger snaps are light, soft and chewy. Not to mention, they are perfect when served with a glass of milk. Just like we did when we were kids. But wait, who am I kidding, I still serve my cookies with a glass of milk.

    Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

    Ingredients for this healthy gingerbread cookies recipe

    This gingerbread recipe uses only 10 ingredients:

    Ingredients for almond flour gingerbread cookies
    • Almond Flour: I love my making my own blanched almond flour, but you can use store-bought almond flour as well. This brand (affiliate link) is my favorite.
    • Spices: I used ground cinnamon, ground ginger, and allspice in the recipe below, but you can also add in a pinch of ground cloves and nutmeg.
    • Blackstrap Molasses: I used this unsulphured blackstrap molasses (affiliate link).
    • Coconut Sugar: I love using coconut sugar in baking as it tastes very similar to brown sugar, but it has a low glycemic index that doesn’t spike up your blood sugar. However, if you do not have coconut sugar you can substitute it with brown sugar.
    • A Large Egg: You only need one large egg to get a great texture.
    • Coconut Oil: Most ginger snap cookies use a stick of butter, but here we are swapping it with just two tablespoons of melted and cooled coconut oil. With that being said, I have also tested this recipe with grapeseed oil and it worked perfectly.
    • Baking Soda: Only ½ teaspoon of baking soda for the perfect chewy and coarse texture.
    • Vanilla Extract: Only a tablespoon of vanilla extract to bring together and enhance all the flavors in the recipe.

    Is ginger paleo?

    If you are new to paleo baking you might be wondering whether or not ginger is a paleo-friendly ingredient. The answer is yes. With high levels of anti-inflammatory compounds called gingerols, both fresh ginger and ground ginger spice are paleo-friendly.

    How to make gluten-free gingerbread cookies

    The process of making these paleo almond flour molasses cookies has 3 folds. 

    First, place almond flour, baking soda, coconut sugar, ground cinnamon, ground ginger, allspice, and a pinch of salt in the bowl of your food processor. Pulse a few times to mix. 

    The dough for gluten free ginger cookies with almond flour photographed from the top view in the food processor.
    Paleo ginger cookies dough arranged on a baking sheet and photographed from the top view before they went into the oven for baking.

    Second, add in coconut oil, molasses, egg, and vanilla into the bowl of the food processor. Process until it forms into a ball and starts collecting on one side of the bowl. This takes about 15-20 seconds. Transfer the dough into a bowl, cover it with stretch film, and let it cool in the fridge for 30 minutes.

    At this stage, there are two important things to mention:

    1. You will end up with a very sticky dough. This is normal so don’t be tempted to add in more almond flour. 
    2. Do not skip the chilling time. The time spent in the fridge helps solidify the fat in the cookies, which helps cookies to spread less as they are baking in the oven.

    Finally, use a tablespoon measure to divide the cookie batter into equal pieces and arrange them on a parchment-lined large baking sheet leaving at least 2-inches of space in between each cookie. I used this (affiliate link) 40 mm ice cream scoop and ended up with 12 of these paleo ginger cookies

    Bake in a 350 F degree oven for 10-12 minutes. Let it cool for 5 minutes and serve them with a glass of milk.

    Can’t get enough of the gingerbread flavors? Try my refined sugar free and gluten-free gingerbread cake. Topped off with a delicious (maple sweetened) cranberry compote, it is a healthier cake recipe that you can make for the holidays.

    The Best Gluten-Free Gingerbread Cookies made with almond flour served with a few glasses of milk.

    A Few FAQs answered for the best gluten-free and paleo gingerbread cookies:

    • Can I use a flax egg in place of the egg? Every time I share a recipe with an egg I get emails from readers asking if they can substitute it with a flax egg (1 part ground flax seeds mixed in with 2 ½ parts water). This time I tested the recipe with a flax egg and it did not work so I do not recommend using flax eggs.
    • Can I dip the cookies in coconut sugar before baking? You sure can. 
    • Can I roll out the cookie dough and use a gingerbread cookie cutter to make gf gingerbread cookies? As I mentioned earlier, this cookie dough is a very sticky one. I didn’t try this, but I think it you can roll it out with a rolling pin in between two pieces of parchment paper spread with a little bit of arrowroot powder (here we use arrowroot powder to prevent it from sticking to the parchment paper). You might have to chill the dough again before cutting it with your cookie cutter. 
    • Can I freeze the cookie dough to bake it later? You sure can. To do so, form the cookie dough into mounds and place them on the baking sheet. Put it in the freezer. Once it is frozen, you can place them in a freezer bag to bake them later.

    If you are in need of more cookie recipes, you are in for a treat because I am joined by a few of my favorite food blogger friends for a virtual cookie swap to spread the joy of baking during this holiday season.

    Below are the links. Click around, get in the kitchen and bake the most delicious cookies for your friends and family.

    Other almond flour recipes you might like

    This recipe has been adapted with minor changes from Perhance to Cook.

    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
    paleo gingerbread cookies placed on a plate and photographed from the front view with a glass of milk in the background
    Print

    Paleo Gingerbread Cookies Recipe

    The Best Paleo Gingerbread Cookies recipe that happens to be gluten-free, refined sugar-free, grain-free and dairy-free. Made with almond flour and sweetened with coconut sugar, these warm spiced healthy gingerbread cookies are the perfect treat to serve during the holidays.
    Course Baked Goods
    Cuisine American
    Diet Gluten Free
    Prep Time 40 minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes
    Total Time 52 minutes
    Servings 12 cookies
    Calories 179kcal

    Equipment

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups almond flour 220 gr
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ cup coconut sugar 76 gr
    • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon ground ginger
    • ¼ teaspoon allspice
    • Pinch salt
    • 2 tablespoons coconut oil melted and cooled or avocado oil
    • 3 tablespoons molasses
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Instructions

    • Place almond flour, baking soda, coconut sugar, ground cinnamon, ground ginger, allspice and salt in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse 3-4 times to mix.
    • Add in the coconut oil, molasses, egg, and vanilla and process until a dough forms. This takes about 15-20 seconds.
    • Transfer the dough into a bowl, wrap with plastic, and let it rest in the fridge for 30 minutes.
    • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
    • Remove the dough from the fridge. Using a spoon (or a small ice cream scoop) measure 1 ½ tablespoons of dough per cookie and arrange them 2 inches apart from each other on the baking sheet. 
    • Gently press on each cookie to slightly flatten. 
    • Bake in the oven for 10-12 minutes. Allow it to cool on the sheet pan for 5 minutes and serve.

    Video

    Notes

    To important things to mention for the best results:
    1. Yields: This recipe makes 12-14 cookies cookies. The nutritional values below are per cookie.
    2. You will end up with a very sticky dough. This is normal so don’t be tempted to add in more almond flour.
    3. Do not skip the chilling time. The time spent in the fridge helps solidify the fat in the cookies, which helps cookies to spread less as they are baking in the oven.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 179kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 72mg | Potassium: 78mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 20IU | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/paleo-gingerbread-cookies/feed/ 137
    Naturally Sweetened Pecan Shortbread Cookies Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/naturally-sweetened-pecan-shortbread-cookies/ https://foolproofliving.com/naturally-sweetened-pecan-shortbread-cookies/#comments Sat, 07 Dec 2019 16:46:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11210 With the holiday baking season in full force, I am no different than most of you, in the kitchen baking…]]>

    With the holiday baking season in full force, I am no different than most of you, in the kitchen baking up a lot of cookies. It is snowing outside and I just made a batch of this pecan shortbread recipe. It is rare that I bake something and write about it at the same time, but here I am writing this on my kitchen table as I am inhaling the addictive sugar and butter smells coming out of the oven.

    Naturally Sweetened Butter Pecan Shortbread Cookies: A healthier alternative to shortbread cookies made with natural cane sugar. A woman is photographed from the top view as she is serving nut shortbread cookies.

    If you are a lover of sandies shortbread cookies that we all grew up eating, you will probably love this shortbread recipe (made with pecans instead of walnuts). This recipe might be a little different than your grandma’s recipe in that it is minimally sweetened.

    Unlike it is in most nut shortbread cookie recipes, in this version, the sweetness doesn’t take over the whole cookie. Instead, the flavors coming from butter, sugar, and pecans are equally balanced for the optimal shortbread cookie goodness.

    Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

    A woman is photographed as she is serving pecan shortbread cookies recipe

    What is the difference between granulated sugar and cane sugar?

    As the name suggests, these cookies are naturally sweetened. While there are several natural sweeteners out there, like coconut sugar, date sugar, maple syrup, raw, etc., in this recipe I used natural cane sugar (this brand in particular – affiliate link). 

    If you are like me, new to baking with unrefined sugars, allow me to explain. The main difference between natural cane sugar (also called Sucanat) and granulated white sugar is the way that they were produced. While producing granulated sugar requires heavy-duty and mechanical processing with many steps, producing natural cane sugar requires far fewer steps and no chemicals to get from plant to packaging.

    Now you may ask, is baking with natural cane sugar a healthier choice? Even though the answer is yes, I prefer to be cautious, as it is a proven fact that too much of any kind of sweetener, regardless of how natural it is, does not promote health. With that being said,  I think a small switch from granulated sugar to natural sweeteners like natural cane sugar, dates, maple syrup, honey or coconut sugar might be a healthier choice. Plus, as in every dessert, you should consume it in moderation.

    This recipe is created by the talented cooks of America’s Test Kitchen and published on their cookbook Naturally Sweet (affiliate link). If you want to read more about natural sweeteners, how they are processed, and foolproof healthier sweets recipes, it is a cookbook that I recommend. I have been baking from it for many years and have always had amazing results.

    A woman is taking a Healthy shortbread cookie from the table photographed from the top view.

    How to make pecan shortbread cookies:

    The recipe for shortbread cookies with pecans has 6 folds.

    First, start with grinding natural cane sugar (aka Sucanat) in a spice or coffee grinder. This is an important step as unlike granulated sugar, Sucanat’s granules are irregular in size due to the way they were produced. Grinding it ensures that all the granules are in equal size, and as a result, the sugar gets distributed evenly within the cookie dough. If you skip this step, your cookies might end up being less sweet.

    If you do not have a spice grinder, you can also use your food processor. It might take a few extra minutes to reach the ideal powdery “fine” texture we want, but it is totally doable. Once the cane sugar is ground set it aside.

    Second, prep your wet ingredients; egg yolks, water, vanilla extract, and melted butter (that is cooled), by mixing them in a small bowl.

    Third, reserve 30 pecans for decoration and grind the rest of them in your food processor. We want them finely ground. Add in the flour, cinnamon, salt, and nutmeg. Process until combined.

    Fourth, pour the wet ingredients through the tube as the machine is running to thoroughly mix the dough. It is a good idea to stop the machine and scrape the sides of the bowl with a spatula a few times to ensure a cohesive and smooth dough.

    Next, transfer the dough on to a clean kitchen counter. Bring it together and divide it in half. Using your hands turn each half into a log that is about 6-inches long and 2 inches thick.

    Pecan nut cookies served with coffee on the side.

    A Quick note for the home baker:

    Don’t be alarmed if the cookie dough has a powdery texture, at least in the beginning. When I first tried this nut shortbread recipe, at this stage, I thought I did something wrong.

    However, as you bring the dough together, it will start getting together easily with the help of your body heat. Since this was the one and only “tricky” part of this recipe, I thought it would be nice to show it to you in a quick video so be sure to watch it. It is located inside the recipe card below.

    Finally, wrap each log tightly with plastic wrap, place in a glass or a jar, and chill for at least two hours, or even better, overnight. When you are ready to bake, preheat your oven to 325 F degrees, slice each log into ¼  inch thick slices. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and arrange cookies on the sheet making sure that there is at least ¾ inch distance in between each cookie.

    As a finishing touch, place a pecan on each shortbread cookie for a special touch. Bake for 16-19 minutes or until the edges of the cookies starts to turn golden brown.

    If you decide to bake both logs, I recommend using two separate baking sheets.

    • Make a few batches and store in the freezer: This is a great cookie recipe to freeze and forget. I make a few batches and store them in the freezer. When ready to bake, take them out of the freezer 30 minutes before baking, slice, and bake.
    • How long do these pecan nut cookies last? As long as they are stored in an airtight container (i.e. cookie jar with a tight lid), they should still be fresh up to 3 days.

    Other naturally sweetened cookies you might like:

    Want more recipes where you can use unrefined sugar for baking cookies? Here are a few of my favorites:

    Butter Pecan Shortbread Cookies Image
    Print

    Naturally Sweetened Pecan Shortbread Cookies

    Butter Pecan Shortbread Cookies made healthier by replacing granulated sugar with natural cane sugar. The cookie dough in this recipe comes together easily in the food processor. It can be made ahead, frozen, and baked right before serving for the most delicious fresh-out-of-the-oven healthy shortbread cookies.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Cook Time 19 minutes
    Total Time 39 minutes
    Servings 28 cookies
    Calories 120kcal

    Ingredients

    • ¾ cup (4 oz.) natural cane sugar
    • 1 cup pecans divided
    • 2 large egg yolks at room temperature
    • 2 tablespoons water at room temperature
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 8 tablespoons of butter melted and cooled
    • 2 ¼ cups (11 ¼ oz) all-purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1/8 teaspoon ground nutmeg
    • 1 large egg white mixed with 2 tablespoons of water

    Instructions

    • Using a spice/coffee grinder, ground the natural cane sugar in 3 batches until it is fine and powdery. Set aside.
    • Reserve 30 of the whole pecan-halves to use as garnishing. It should be ½ cup in total.
    • Whisk together egg yolks, water, vanilla extract, and butter in a small mixing bowl until combined. Set aside.
    • Place the rest of the pecans (approximately ½ cup) in the bowl of a food processor and process until coarsely ground. Add in the flour, cinnamon, salt, and nutmeg. Process until combined.
    • While the food processor is still running, add the butter mixture through the tube. Process until thoroughly combined. You may have to stop the food processor a few times and scrape the bottom of the bowl with a spatula.
    • Transfer the dough onto a clean work surface and knead until smooth. It might be a little powdery, but it will come together as you knead with the body heat from your hands.
    • Using a knife, divide the dough into two equal pieces.
    • Roll each dough into a 6-inch log that is about 2-inches thick. Wrap each log tightly using stretch film and place upright in tall glasses. Refrigerate until firm, at least 2 hours up to 2 days.
    • When ready to bake, pre-heat the oven to 325 F degrees. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
    • Working with one log of dough at a time, slice into ¼-inch thick cookies, turning log every few slices to prevent sides from flattening. Space them ¾-inch apart from each other on prepared sheets.
    • Brush cookies with the egg white-water mixture, then gently press the reserved pecan halves into center of each cookie.
    • Bake one sheet at a time, until the edges of cookies are beginning to brown and set, 16-19 minutes, rotating the sheet halfway through baking. Let the cool before serving.

    Video

    Notes

    Notes: 1. The number of cookies you end up with might change with the size of your logs. 2. As you will see in the video, I only baked one of the rolls. I froze the second roll to see if it will still be good in a few days. Before I was ready to bake, I took the frozen dough out of the freezer, let it thaw in the fridge overnight, sliced, and baked it in the morning. It was just as good. So feel free to freeze them for fresh shortbread cookies for future.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 45mg | Potassium: 28mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 120IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 7mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/naturally-sweetened-pecan-shortbread-cookies/feed/ 18
    Paleo Pumpkin Muffins https://foolproofliving.com/paleo-pumpkin-muffins/ https://foolproofliving.com/paleo-pumpkin-muffins/#comments Sat, 05 Oct 2019 15:44:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20861 Who is in for some pumpkin goodness on this Monday morning? If so, you are in for a treat because…]]>

    Who is in for some pumpkin goodness on this Monday morning? If so, you are in for a treat because we are making Almond Flour Pumpkin Muffins that are paleo friendly.

    Today, we are celebrating the 4th annual #VirtualPumpkinParty put together by Sara of Cake Over Steak, where over 60 awesome food bloggers come together and share a recipe made with pumpkin. So if you are need of some pumpkin inspiration you are at the right place.

    Paleo Pumpkin muffins photographed from the front view

    Last year, I contributed to the party with this Pumpkin Turkey Chili recipe. This year, I am joining the crowd with this Paleo Pumpkin Muffins recipe. If you are like me, feel like you deserve a delicious baked treat with your morning coffee just because it is cold outside and doesn’t want to feel guilty of eating it, this healthy pumpkin muffin recipe is exactly what you need.

    almond flour pumpkin muffins placed in a small plate

    Made with almond flour, coconut sugar, and canned puree, it comes together in less than 10 minutes and bakes in less than an hour. It is freezer-friendly, gluten, dairy, and refined sugar-free.

    Intrigued? Read on.

    How To Make Paleo Pumpkin Muffins

    Similar to most muffin recipes, this gluten-free pumpkin recipe has 3 folds.

    First, you mix the dry ingredients: Almond flour (or almond meal would also work), baking soda, cinnamon, pumpkin spice and salt, in a large bowl.

    Second, you mix the wet ingredients: Eggs, coconut sugar, canned pumpkin puree, and vanilla extract in another bowl.

     Dry Ingredients for gluten free pumpkin muffins

    Third, you combine the wet ingredients with the dry ones and scoop them out to a 12-cup muffin tin lined with parchment muffin paper (this is my favorite brand affiliate link).

    After 45-50 minutes, you will end up with the most delicious, healthier, and moist pumpkin muffins you can imagine.

    Here I have to mention, I know it will be hard, but for the best almond flour pumpkin muffins, it is imperative to wait for them to completely cool down. Since they are super moist, if you serve them before they are cooled, your guests might think that they are not fully baked.

    Wet Ingredients for Paleo Pumpkin Muffins with Almond Flour - Paleo Breakfast Muffins

    A Word on Baking with Almond Flour

    If you have been following my blog for a while you know that I am a big fan of using this gluten-free, low-carb, and full of good fats flour in my baking.

    Another reason why I love it is because of its high-fat content. Most pumpkin muffin recipes you find online uses coconut oil, but in this recipe, since we are using almond flour there is no need for that. Similar to one of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living, Almond Flour Chocolate Cake, this Almond Flour Pumpkin Muffins recipe has no added fat in it.

    Yup, you heard it right. No additional butter, vegetable, or coconut oil. You don’t need it, because the fat content in almond flour and eggs are enough to provide you with all the fat these grain-free pumpkin muffins need.

    On another note, if you are new to baking with almond flours, don’t know the difference between almond flour, almond meal, and superfine almond flour, and learn to make your own almond flour, check out the two posts below for a good place to start:

    “Foolproof” Almond Flour Recipes for Beginners
    How To Make Almond Flour

    Mixing healthy pumpkin muffins with almond flour
    healthy pumpkin muffins with almond flour photographed in the muffin tin

    A Few Tips for the Best Flourless Pumpkin Muffins

    • No-Sugar Pumpkin Muffins: Or I should say, no refined sugar…
      I usually use maple syrup for most of my muffin recipes, but this time I opted for coconut sugar as I love that it is a natural (unrefined) sugar that has a lower glycemic index. In other words, it doesn’t spike up your blood sugar as fast as refined sugars do.
      As you will see in the recipe below, with only ¾ cup of coconut sugar these paleo pumpkin muffins are not overly sweet. If you are health conscious and want to minimize your sugar intake while still treating yourself with a delicious muffin in the morning, you might also be able to get away with using only ½ cup coconut sugar. Feel free to experiment.
    • What to do with leftovers and how to store them – If you are familiar with baking with almond flour, you know that muffins made with this gluten-free flour will deliver a very moist muffin. For that reason, it is important to keep the leftovers of this pumpkin breakfast muffins in an airtight container (or a plastic bag) in the fridge because otherwise, they will spoil easily. When you are ready to serve, you can warm them in the microwave for 15-20 seconds or in a 300-degree preheated oven 5-10 minutes.
    • Can I freeze these almond flour pumpkin muffins? – Yes, you can. Again, I recommend storing them in an airtight container after they come to room temperature. You do not need to thaw them before serving. You can simply warm them up in a 300 degree pre-heated oven 10-12 minutes.
    • Want to add some chocolate chips? Go for it! – If you are a lover of chocolate-pumpkin combination and want to turn this recipe into paleo pumpkin chocolate chip muffins, feel free to fold in a cup of your favorite chocolate chips into the mix at the very end.
    • The Best Topping for this Pumpkin Bread Muffins – I opted for pumpkin seeds as a topping, but any other nuts would work. You would also be totally fine without topping it off with anything.
    gluten free pumpkin muffins with almond flour photographed from the top view

    There you have it, friends. A simple pumpkin muffin recipe that you can make in no time and serve to everyone in your family. If you need a visual, be sure to scroll down and watch the quick how-to video that I made in the recipe card below.

    Before I let you go, below are a few of my favorite recipes from this year’s Virtual Pumpkin Party. Check out Sara’s blog to see all of them and treat yourself with all the pumpkin inspiration you need to tackle the upcoming holiday entertaining coming your way:

    Other Pumpkin Recipes You May Also Like:

     

    Paleo Pumpkin Muffins Recipe Image
    Print

    Paleo Pumpkin Muffins Recipe

    Recipe for Paleo Pumpkin Muffins. A healthy gluten free muffins recipe ready in less than an hour! Freezer friendly, grain-free and made without refined sugar.
    Course Muffins/Baked Goods
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour
    Servings 12 muffins
    Calories 205kcal

    Ingredients

    For the dry ingredients:

    • 2 cups almond flour or almond meal
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon pumpkin spice
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • Pinch of salt

    For the wet ingredients:

    • 3 large eggs at room temperature
    • ¾ cup of coconut sugar
    • 1 can 15 oz. pumpkin puree *
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Topping (optional)

    • Handful of pumpkin seeds

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees. Line a 12-cup muffin tip with parchment liners. Set aside.
    • Mix together all the dry ingredients in a large bowl.
    • In a separate bowl, whisk together all the wet ingredients.
    • Fold in the wet ingredients to dry ones and mix until they are fully combined.
    • Divide the batter into the prepared muffin tin. Garnish each muffin cup with a few pumpkin seeds.
    • Bake for 45-50 minutes making sure to rotate the pan halfway through the baking process for even baking.
    • Let it come to room temperature before serving.

    Video

    Notes

    • The only ingredient in the pumpkin puree brand you choose should be pumpkin.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 241mg | Potassium: 70mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 65IU | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 1mg

    This recipe has been updated with additional helpful information and a video in October 2020. No changes have been made to the original recipe.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/paleo-pumpkin-muffins/feed/ 48
    Spinach Feta Frittata https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-feta-frittata/ https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-feta-frittata/#comments Fri, 06 Sep 2019 16:06:05 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25545 This post has been sponsored by Horizon Organic. All thoughts and opinions are my own. I think we can all…]]>

    This post has been sponsored by Horizon Organic. All thoughts and opinions are my own.

    I think we can all agree that egg frittatas are a life-saver when it comes to feeding a crowd in a quick way. I love that they are endlessly customizable and super easy to make. While most people serve them for brunch, I usually whip one up on a weeknight and serve it with a simple green salad when I am short on time. 

    Spinach Egg Frittata recipe photographed as it is being sliced

    Today’s recipe, Spinach Feta Frittata is my current favorite way to serve this simple baked egg dish. Lightly sauteed spinach mixed with feta cheese, eggs, and one secret ingredient (more on that later!) for souffle-like eggs started on the stovetop and finished in the oven for perfection. Just so SO good.

    Intrigued? Read on.

    Spinach and Feta Frittata recipe photographed from the front view.

    Ingredients for spinach frittata with feta:

    When making simple dishes like this, I have one rule: Use the best ingredients I can get my hands on. 

    I am a big fan of buying organic ingredients as much as I can as I know doing so helps me do my part in taking care of our planet and helping hard-working farmers continue to do what they do best: provide us with the highest quality products. 

    For this spinach and feta cheese frittata recipe, I used organic baby spinach (I am a big fan of the prewashed and packaged variety for the convenience), Horizon Organic eggs, organic feta cheese, and Horizon® Organic Grassfed Whole Milk, which is the secret ingredient in taking this spinach frittata recipe to the next level.

    I love Horizon Organic Grassfed Whole Milk, not only because of its great refreshingly creamy taste but also because it comes from organic pastures and humanely raised happy cows that graze freely on lush pastures with access to shade, shelter, and clean drinking water for 150 days per year per organic standards.

    Breakfast frittata in the making

    Why use whole milk in a frittata recipe:

    My secret ingredients for the best spinach and egg frittata is organic whole milk. Because adding a splash of milk ensures eggs to stay tender by preventing them from overcooking and producing an end product that is fluffy and moist.

    My go-to ratio for eggs to milk for frittata recipe is 12 large eggs to ½ cup of whole milk.

    Did you know? Not all grassfed products are certified. Horizon Organic Grassfed Milk partners with the American Grassfed Association to provide your family with Certified Grassfed Organic Milk.

    I don’t know about you, but as an animal lover, I appreciate Horizon Organic Grassfed Milk for meeting this standard and treating their cows in a humane way. Therefore, I prefer grassfed milk coming from happy and healthy cows.

    How to make egg frittata

    The process of making this frittata recipe has three parts. 

    Egg frittata recipe made with spinach eggs and feta cheese photographed with step by step photos

    First, you prepare the eggs. Crack 12 large eggs into a large mixing bowl, add in ½ cup of Horizon Organic Grassfed Whole Milk, and season it with salt and pepper. Give it a good whisk and set it aside. Turn the oven on to 350 F degrees.

    Second, prepare the spinach and feta filling. To do so, heat a tablespoon of oil in a 12-inch non-stick and oven-safe skillet. Add in a handful of chopped scallions, minced garlic, and 5 cups of baby spinach. 

    Learn how to make spinach frittata with step by step photos

    Now, looking at the amount of raw spinach, you might think of 5 cups of baby spinach to be a lot. However, if you have ever cooked spinach, you probably know that cooked spinach loses much of its volume and reduces dramatically in size. So don’t be alarmed with the amount of spinach used in the recipe below.

    Don’t have fresh spinach on hand? Simply swap fresh spinach with six ounces of frozen spinach. Be sure to thaw it overnight in the fridge and drain (removing as much liquid as possible) before using in this frittata recipe. 

    Once the baby spinach is cooked, add crumbled feta cheese and spread it evenly throughout the pan. Then, pour in the egg-milk mixture. 

    At this point, since your skillet is very hot, eggs will start cooking immediately. To prevent fast cooking (that might produce tough eggs) scrape the bottom of the pan with a spatula and move the eggs around for even cooking until large curds forms. It takes about 30-45 seconds for this to happen. 

    How long to bake a frittata at 350 degrees F

    Finally, to finish it off, place the skillet into the preheated 350 F Degree (180 Celsius) oven for 8-9 minutes. 

    How do I know when my frittata is cooked

    You will know that your baked spinach feta frittata is cooked when the center is no longer jiggly and the edges are golden brown.

    When done, carefully transfer the feta spinach frittata onto a cutting board to cool off for a few minutes before serving.

    What to serve with frittata

    You can serve your feta spinach frittata recipe with a simple green salad, which is what I usually serve it with. However, since fresh summer tomatoes are currently in abundance, I made a quick tomato salad that I also used as a topping. 

    A woman is preparing tomato sauce for egg frittata and placing it on eggs

    To make my quick tomato salad, I sliced up some cherry tomatoes and mixed them with ¼ cup chopped red onion, freshly squeezed lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Finally, I added some fresh Italian parsley for additional flavor.

    Variations for this baked spinach and frittata recipe:

    While I think spinach and feta is a great combination, I love switching things up every so often. Below are a few variations to this recipe that I made in the past. I am sharing them with you so that you can play around with the ingredients you have on hand:

    • Sausage Spinach Feta Frittata: If I am making this frittata for dinner, I sometimes add in ½ pound of Italian sausage into this recipe. My husband, who is a big meat eater, says that this version is his favorite.
      If you decide to use sausage, heat one tablespoon of oil to cook the meat over medium-high heat—breaking it apart with a spatula until browned, about 5 minutes. Then, continue with adding the vegetables and egg mixture and the rest of the recipe.
    • Mediterranean Frittata: If you want to continue with the vegetarian theme, you can do so by adding a few Mediterranean ingredients into the mixture. I love adding a small red bell pepper into the vegetable mixture and a handful of chopped Kalamata olives into the egg mixture right before baking it in the oven.
    • Spinach Tomato and Feta Frittata: If tomatoes are in season, you can also add in a chopped tomato into the veggie mixture and cook it with the eggs. Sweet flavors of summer tomatoes baked in with eggs are just out of this world.
    • Want to try a version of this in the instant pot? Check out this Instant Pot Breakfast Casserole
    Healthy Frittata recipe photographed from the front view with a woman in the background

    A Few FAQs & Answers for the best spinach and feta frittata

    • Can I use a different cheese than feta cheese? Absolutely. A few of my favorite cheese varieties for frittatas are goat cheese, cheddar, and shredded mozzarella.
    • How to store the leftovers? I doubt that you will have any leftovers but if you do be, sure to store them in an airtight container in the fridge. They should be good for the next three days.
    • Can I freeze this frittata recipe? Yes, you can. Though I have to admit, this egg bake tastes much better when it is consumed right away. However, you can freeze it in an airtight container up to a month in the freezer.
      A day before you are ready to eat, thaw it in the fridge overnight. When ready to serve, place it in a 350 F degree preheated oven for 5-8 minutes or until thoroughly warmed. 
    • Can I make this vegetable frittata as a part of my weekly meal prep? You sure can. If you decide to do so, let the frittata cool, slice it into individual portions, and place in your meal-prep containers.

    Got some leftover spinach? Try these recipes:

    Spinach Feta Frittata recipe image
    Print

    Spinach Feta Frittata Recipe

    This easy Spinach Feta Frittata cook up perfectly in less than 20 minutes in the oven. It’s perfect for any brunch gathering or for a quick weeknight dinner with a simple green salad on the side.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine Spanish
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 9 minutes
    Total Time 19 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 230kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Eggs:

    • 12 large Horizon Organic eggs
    • ½ cup Horizon® Organic Grassfed Whole Milk
    • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    For The Frittata:

    • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil
    • 3 scallions sliced thinly
    • 3 cloves of garlic minced
    • 5 cups of baby spinach washed and spin-dried
    • ½ cup crumbled feta cheese

    As Garnish:

    • 1 to mato cut into small chunks
    • ¼ cup red onion
    • 2 tablespoons of lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
    • Pinch of ground black pepper
    • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 F degrees. 
    • Prepare the egg mixture: Crack the eggs in a large bowl. Pour in the milk and add in salt and pepper. Give it a whisk. Set aside.
    • To make the filling: Heat oil in a 12-inch nonstick skillet over medium heat. Add in the scallions and cook, stirring frequently until they are softened—2-3 minutes.
    • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds. 
    • Add in the baby spinach and cook until wilted. Sprinkle it with the feta cheese. 
    • Pour in the eggs. Using a spatula, gently stir and scrape the bottom of the skillet until large curds form but the eggs are still wet—about 30-45 seconds. 
    • Smooth the top into an even layer and let it cook for 30 seconds. 
    • Place it in the oven and bake until the center is no longer jiggly and edges are golden brown, about 8-9 minutes. 
    • Meanwhile, make the topping: Mix tomatoes, onions, lemon juice, olive oil, parsley, salt and pepper in a bowl. 
    • When the frittata is fully baked, carefully loosen the edges using a spatula and transfer it onto a cutting board. Let it cool for 5 minutes. 
    • Garnish with the tomato mixture. Slice and serve.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Calories: 230kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 341mg | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 390mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 3346IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 171mg | Iron: 3mg

    Other egg dishes you might also like:

    Other spinach recipes you might like:

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-feta-frittata/feed/ 21
    French Lentil Soup Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/french-lentil-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/french-lentil-soup/#comments Sun, 01 Sep 2019 13:59:11 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2405 Ingredients for French Lentil Soup The ingredients for this soup recipe are basic, everyday staples you likely already have in…]]>

    What Makes French Lentil Soup Different and Why You Should Make It?

    Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

    The first time I had this soup was at a small café on my first trip to Paris. It tasted very different from the lentil soup I was used to.

    It was more herb-forward, and the green lentils held their shape instead of melting into the broth.

    That is what makes French green lentil soup different. It is traditionally made with Lentilles du Puy (sold here in the US as “du Puy Lentils”, which have a similar taste to regular green lentils but hold their shape much better as they cook. The result is a soup that feels a little lighter and more textured, rather than thick and mushy.

    That said, you can absolutely make this with regular green lentils, and it will still be very good. But if you can find French lentils, which are now sold in many grocery stores, I really recommend trying them at least once. They make a noticeable difference in both texture and overall balance.

    I also love this soup because:

    • It comes together in one pot in less than an hour.
    • It is herb-forward with plenty of vegetables, balanced with a small splash of balsamic at the end.
    • It is naturally vegan and gluten-free.
    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

    Ingredients for French Lentil Soup

    The ingredients for this soup recipe are basic, everyday staples you likely already have in your pantry. I listed the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes from my recipe testing:

    Ingredients for green lentils soup recipe in cups.

    Lentils: I use French lentils, also known as du Puy lentils or Lentilles du Puy, because of their small size and nutty, peppery flavor. They also keep their shape well during the long cooking process. You should be able to find them easily at your grocery store, or you can purchase them online if necessary.

    Can’t find them? No worries! This soup can also be made with brown or regular green lentils, which have a similar mild taste. However, compared to du Puy lentils, they have a slightly more delicate texture, which may result in a thicker, more “mushy” soup after cooking.

    Pro Tip: No matter which lentils you use, be sure to rinse them well and pick through them for any debris before cooking.

    Olive oil: This is my go-to when making lentil soup. However, avocado oil or unsalted butter would also work to cook your veggies.

    Vegetables: This soup starts with a simple mix of onion, carrots, and celery. As you are preparing them for cooking, take the time to chop them into small, equal pieces so they cook evenly.

    Garlic: I prefer using fresh minced garlic for the best flavor, but you can use garlic powder in a pinch.

    Fresh or canned tomatoes: I used a 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes (with juices) for convenience, but during the summer months, I like to use fresh tomatoes, which should be about 2 large tomatoes.

    Fresh herbs and seasonings: This lentil soup is seasoned with bay leaves, fresh thyme, and parsley, then finished with salt and black pepper. 

    Optionally, you can also include a small amount of paprika, smoked paprika, or red pepper flakes.

    Vegetable stock: If you’d like to keep this soup vegetarian, use store-bought or Homemade Vegetable Stock. You can also use Chicken Stock if you prefer a richer, more savory taste. 

    If you go the store-bought route, I recommend choosing an unsalted version as it will be easier to manage the amount of salt in the soup.

    Vinegar: This is my secret anytime I make a soup recipe. A small splash of vinegar at the end brightens the soup and takes it up a notch. I like using balsamic vinegar, but any vinegar, red or white wine vinegar, and apple cider vinegar would all work. No vinegar? Use a generous squeeze of lemon juice instead!

    Optional Add-Ins

    While this soup stands well on its own, here are a few simple ideas for small additions based on what you have on hand or how you plan to serve it.

    Protein: If you would like to make the soup more filling and add some animal protein, you have a few options:

    • Shredded cooked chicken (about 2 cups) is also a great option to make it a high-protein dinner; you can add it toward the end of cooking.
    • Lentil soup with bacon (or pancetta) is a classic I know many like, and it would be great in this recipe. And for a lighter option, you can use turkey bacon. Simply sauté the chopped bacon before you start cooking the vegetables, transfer it to a plate lined with a sheet of paper towel to drain, and then add it back in after the mirepoix is cooked.
    • Ground chicken or turkey would also work well. You can saute the meat after the onion-carrot-celery mixture is cooked and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

    Pasta: If you want to add pasta, stir in 1 cup of small-shaped pasta like orzo or ditalini during the last 8-10 minutes of cooking, then let it simmer until tender. However, check the packaging instructions for the exact cooking time.

    Leafy greens: If you want to add more vegetables, a handful of baby spinach or chopped kale can be stirred in during the last few minutes of cooking.

    Toppings: Once served, you can finish each bowl with freshly chopped herbs, a drizzle of olive oil, or a small amount of grated Parmesan cheese (if you are not keeping the soup vegan).

    How to Make French Lentil Soup (Step-by-Step)

    Anyone can make a comforting pot of lentil soup with this simple, approachable method. Here’s how I make it:

    Sautéing chopped onions, carrots, and celery in olive oil to build the flavor base for French lentil soup.

    Step 1 – Soften the vegetables: Heat the olive oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add the chopped onion, carrots, and celery, and let them cook slowly until they soften, for about 10-12 minutes. 

    This is where the base of the soup is built, so do not rush it. Stir often and let them cook until they are soft and fragrant, but not browned.

    Step 2 – Add the tomato paste: Stir it in and let it cook for about a minute.

    Pro tip: In soup recipes like this, a small amount of tomato paste (in this case, only 1 tablespoon) helps deepen the tomato flavor, add a bit of umami richness, but it is important to take the time to cook it to remove its raw flavor.

    Add the garlic and cook for one more minute, just until it’s fragrant. Keep an eye on it here, as garlic can burn quickly and turn bitter if it’s overcooked.

    Next, stir in the diced tomatoes, bay leaf, and thyme, and let everything cook together for 1-2 minutes.

    Step 3 – Add the lentils and seasoning: Add the French lentils along with salt and black pepper, then give everything a good stir.

    Step 4 – Add the broth and simmer: Pour in the vegetable stock, increase the heat to medium-high, and cover the pot. Incorporate everything thoroughly so the lentils cook evenly and are well-seasoned.

    Once the soup comes to a boil, reduce the heat to medium-low and let it simmer for 25-30 minutes. 

    The lentils should be tender but still hold their shape, which is one of the reasons French lentils work so well here.

    Pro Tip: Keep an eye on it as it cooks and stir it a few times. In time, if it thickens too much, you can add a small splash of broth to thin it out.

    Stirring in a splash of balsamic vinegar and fresh chopped Italian parsley into a simmering pot of lentil soup.

    Step 5 – Add the vinegar and serve: Right before serving, remove the bay leaf and stir in the balsamic vinegar and chopped fresh parsley.

    Ladle the soup into bowls and garnish with more fresh parsley if you’d like.

    Expert Tips for the Best French Lentil Soup

    Rinse and pick over the lentils: Lentils can sometimes contain small stones or debris, so it’s worth taking the time to pick through them and then giving them a quick rinse before adding to the soup.

    Don’t overcook the lentils: French green lentils hold their shape well, but they can still become mushy if cooked too long. Simmer just until they are tender. I usually taste a spoonful to make sure they are cooked thoroughly around the 20-minute mark, and check often after that.

    Add the vinegar at the end: The balsamic vinegar is meant to brighten the soup, not take over it. It’s important to stir it in at the very end to keep the flavor fresh and balanced.

    French Lentil Soup
    Print

    French Lentil Soup Recipe

    Authentic French Lentil Soup that you can make in one pot in under an hour. I used lentils du Puy, but green lentils can be used as well. This herb-forward lentil soup is a wonderful vegan and gluten-free dinner that gets better as it sits, making it great for meal prep.
    Course Soup
    Cuisine French Cuisine
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 238kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 onion chopped (about 2 cups) – a large one
    • 3 carrots peeled and chopped (about 1 1/2 cups)
    • 3 celery stalks chopped (about 1 cup)
    • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
    • 3 garlic cloves minced
    • 1 can diced tomatoes (14 ounce can)
    • 1 bay leaf
    • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme leaves chopped
    • 1 1/2 cups French Green lentils* aka Lentils Du Puy, rinsed and picked over or regular green lentils
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
    • 6 cups vegetable broth preferably homemade
    • 2 teaspoons balsamic vinegar or apple cider vinegar or lemon juice
    • 1/4 cup fresh Italian parsley chopped – plus more as garnish

    Instructions

    • Heat olive oil in a large heavy bottom pot over medium heat. Add onions, carrots, and celery and cook until they are softened, 10-12 minutes.
    • Stir in the tomato paste and cook for a minute.
    • Add garlic and cook for 1 more minute.
    • Stir in the tomatoes, bay leaf, and thyme. Cook until fragrant, 1-2 minutes.
    • Add French lentils, salt and pepper. Give it a big stir to make sure that everything is mixed evenly.
    • Pour in the vegetable stock, turn the heat up to medium-high, put the lid on and bring it to a boil. Once boiled, turn down the heat to low and let it simmer for 25-30 minutes.
    • Right before serving, take out the bay leaf and stir in the balsamic vinegar and chopped parsley.
    • Pour the soup in individual bowls and garnish it with more parsley.

    Video

    Notes

    • Yields: This lentil soup recipe makes about 7-8 cups of soup and is ideal for serving 6 people. The nutritional values you see below are per serving.
    • Green lentils: I made this recipe with French green lentils (aka du puy lentils). Compared to other types of lentils, they do a better job of keeping their shape and can stand longer simmering times. With that being said, you can make this recipe with regular green lentils and brown lentils. The texture of the soup could be a little bit mushy but it will still be good.
    • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature, then pour them into an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 3-4 days.
    • Freezing: Bring your soup to room temperature and transfer it to an airtight container. Then, store it in the freezer for up to three months, thawing it in the fridge overnight when ready to eat.
    • Reheat: Reheat it on the stovetop or in the microwave for 30-second increments until warm. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 238kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1377mg | Potassium: 165mg | Fiber: 16g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 5872IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 4mg

    How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze and Tips on Meal Prep 

    Like many lentil soups, this one tastes even better after it has had a little time to sit, so leftovers are something to look forward to. You can easily make a batch, enjoy some right away, and save the rest for later.

    Here is how I usually store and reheat it:

    Storage: Once the soup has reached room temperature, transfer it to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 3-4 days.

    Reheat: You can reheat the soup on the stovetop over medium-low heat or in the microwave until warmed through. Keep in mind that it will thicken as it sits, so you may need to add a splash of stock or water to return it to the right consistency.

    Freezing: To freeze, let it cool completely and transfer it to a freezer-safe container. It keeps well for up to 3 months. When you’re ready to enjoy it, thaw it in the refrigerator overnight, then reheat on the stovetop or in the microwave, adding a little stock (or broth) as needed.

    Meal Prep: Needless to say, this is a great soup for meal prep as it stores well. If it is on your weekly prep menu, I recommend portioning it into small airtight containers and storing them in the fridge to make it easier to heat and enjoy right away.

    A bowl of green lentil soup from the top view.

    FAQs

    What are French lentils (Lentilles du Puy)?

    French lentils, also known as Lentilles du Puy, are small green lentils with a slightly peppery flavor. They hold their shape well as they cook, which makes them especially well-suited for soups and stews.

    Do I need to soak lentils for soup?

    No, lentils do not need to be soaked. For this soup, simply pick through for debris, rinse them in a colander under cold water, and cook them in the broth.

    Can you freeze French lentil soup?

    Yes, French lentil soup freezes well. To do so, let the soup cool completely, transfer it to airtight containers, and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator, then reheat.

    How do I know when lentils are done?

    Lentils are done when they are tender but still holding their shape. I find the best way to check doneness is to taste it around the 20-minute mark. They should not be splitting apart or turning mushy when you bite into them.

    What to Serve with French Lentil Soup

    This is a fantastic vegan/vegetarian meal to serve on its own. However, you can round it out to a meal with a few no-fuss sides that complement it. Here are a few of my favorite pairing ideas:

    Bread: A slice of crusty bread is always a good idea with lentil soup. No-Knead Artisan Bread or Olive Bread both work well for dipping and soaking up the broth. Or, for something a bit more indulgent, you can make Garlic Bread in Air Fryer in about 15 minutes.

    Salads: If you’d like something fresh on the side, a simple green salad, such as Spring Mix Salad or Butter Lettuce Salad with a light vinaigrette, pairs nicely. You don’t need anything complicated here, just something crisp to balance the warmth of the soup.

    Cheese and crackers: For a more casual (French-inspired) meal, serve the soup with a small cheese plate and Seed Crackers, which add a nice crunch and make for an easy pairing.

    More Vegetable-Forward Lentil Soups

    If you enjoyed this French lentil soup, here are a couple of other vegetable-forward lentil soups I think you might also enjoy:

    • If you’re in the mood for something creamy and comforting, my Turkish Red Lentil Soup is a simple vegan soup that comes together in about 30 minutes and is one of the most popular soups in Turkish cuisine.
    • For an easy, hands-off soup, try this Butternut Squash Lentil Soup is made in the slow cooker, making it a great option for busy days. It’s vegan, gluten-free, and a nice way to use up extra vegetables.

    This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/french-lentil-soup/feed/ 48
    Foolproof Galette Dough Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/galette-dough/ https://foolproofliving.com/galette-dough/#comments Fri, 16 Aug 2019 11:31:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25446 I’ll be the first one to admit. I am not very good at making pies. Because I find making pie…]]>

    I’ll be the first one to admit. I am not very good at making pies. Because I find making pie dough from scratch to be very hard, it stresses me out. I can never manage the ratio between flour, butter, and water to get the right texture even if I follow a recipe.

    Learn how to make homemade galette dough from scratch - a woman is rolling galette dough

    If you are good at making pie dough, my hat is off to you, my friend. But in my case, as someone who grew up in Turkey, I had never had a pie before I moved to the U.S. in my twenties. I still remember the day that I had my first apple pie. It was love at first bite. I wanted to eat the whole thing by myself.

    But then I tried making it at home and quickly learned why most people make their pies using store-bought pie dough.

    Fast forward to today, I can make it now, but the dough part is usually a hit or miss. However, with galette dough, there is hope for someone like me. Especially with the easy galette recipe I am sharing here today.

    fresh peaches and blueberries wrapped up in a homemade galette crust.

    The recipe comes from one of my favorite cookbooks, Naturally Sweet (affiliate link), by the folks behind America’s Test Kitchen. If you are familiar with their work, you probably now how they test recipes over and over again until they perfect it. This galette crust recipe is no different. It is foolproof. And I plan on telling you why in detail, but let’s first go back to basics and talk about the meaning of galette.

    What is galette? (Galette Definition)

    The term galette comes from the Norman word gale, which is a term used in French cuisine to identify a flat round cake made of pastry dough or bread. (Source) However, nowadays galette is referred to as homemade pastry dough that is more of a rustic, free-form tart made with a single crust of pastry.

    It is different than your usual pie in that galette recipes are baked on a baking sheet rather than on a plate. I think the fact that they are baked in this free-form format makes them much easier compared to a pie.

    No need to stress about fitting the dough into the pie plate or cramping the side to make it look picture perfect. Whether you make a sweet galette recipe filled with various fruits or savory galette recipe filled with vegetables, galette dough is so easy to roll out, fill, fold, and bake.

    Plus, the recipe for savory galette dough that I am sharing here can be used for sweet and savory galette recipes.

    Crostata vs galette

    You may have heard people refer to galette as crostata. Come to find out, crostata is the term that Italians use for the galette. They are basically the same thing.

    Ingredients for this easy galette crust

    This free-form tart dough is made with four ingredients.

    • All-purpose flour
    • Kosher Salt
    • Unsalted Butter
    • Ice Water
    Ingredients for the easy galette dough recipe - Salt, flour, butter, and water are photographed from the top view.

    This recipe is a little different than most recipes you find online or in cookbooks in that it does not have any sugar in it. I prefer a galette dough recipe without sugar as I try to minimize our sugar intake as much as possible. Plus, since I usually bake it with sweet fruit on top, I do not think that any additional sugar is necessary.

    However, if you want to use sugar in your galette crust, feel free to add in a tablespoon of sugar into the flour and salt mix in the beginning.

    A Word on the butter

    I think we can all agree that butter is the most crucial ingredient for a flaky nicely browned galette dough. I usually buy the European style (aka cultured butter) when it comes to baking. If you are not familiar, here is a great explanation from an article called The Difference Between American Butter and European Butter, Explained:


    European butter refers to butter produced through a style that’s popular across much of Europe. It’s a cultured butter that’s been churned for a longer period of time to achieve at least 82 percent butterfat.

    At this point, you might rightfully ask, how is American butter different? The following comes from the same article:


    The main difference between European and American-style butter is the butterfat content. In the U.S., USDA federal regulations require a churned dairy product to contain at least 80 percent butterfat to be officially considered butter.
    That 2 percent variation might seem small, but it makes a difference in taste and consistency.
    Butter produced in the U.S. usually isn’t cultured, so it has a less tangy, more neutral flavor.

    Butter cut in cubes for French Galette Recipe

    While one version is not better than the other (and it is also a personal choice), most chefs prefer cultured butter when it comes to baking due to its higher butterfat, less water content, and flavor.

    For that reason, I too prefer cultured butter for this galette dough recipe. I find that it produces a flakier and more flavorful end product compared to its version made with American butter.

    However, this is not to say that this galette crust recipe cannot be made with American style butter. Both versions would work and taste great, but I think if you are serious about upping your galette game a few extra bucks you will spend for European style butter is worth it.

    How to make galette dough in a food processor

    I find that making the dough in a food processor is the easiest and most foolproof way,  mainly because the temperature of the dough is an essential factor for a flaky crust. I like that I can easily manage the amount of mixing that I need to do without having to touch the dough by using the pulse feature.

    Step by step photos of how to make galette dough from scratch

    The process to make this easy galette dough in a food processor has four parts:

    First, place flour and salt in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade. Pulse 3-4 times to mix. Add in the cubed butter and pulse until mixture resembles coarse sand. You want the butter pieces to look like small lentils. This process takes about ten 1-second pulses.

    Next, add in the water as you continue you to pulse one tablespoon at a time until the dough starts to collect on the sides and form into a ball. I think this, the fact that the dough forms into a ball giving an idiot-proof visual cue of doneness, is the part that makes this recipe foolproof. Be sure to watch the how-to video in the recipe card to get a visual of what I mean.

    Second, dump the dough onto a lightly floured surface and form it into a 4-inch disk. Wrap it tightly with plastic wrap and let it sit in the fridge for at least 45 minutes up to 2 days.

    homemade galette dough turned into a disk wrapped in stretch film photographed from the top view.

    Third, take it out of the fridge and let it sit on the counter for 10-15 minutes before you are ready to roll it out. However, be aware that you might have to wait longer if the dough has been sitting in the fridge for more than 4 hours.

    Galette pastry being rolled by a woman

    Roll it out into a 12-inch circle that is ⅛-inch thick on a lightly floured surface and transfer onto a large sheet of parchment paper. To finish it off, fill it with your filling making sure to leave at least 3-inch border around the edge. Then fold the outer 3-inch dough over the filling, pleading it gently by every 2 or 3 inches.

    Finally, brush the dough with a beaten egg yolk to get a good golden crust.

    How to make galette dough by hand

    While my preferred method of making galette dough is in a food processor, you can make galette dough by hand.

    If you decide to do so, mix flour and salt in a large bowl. Work the butter into the flour mixture until it resembles coarse meal with some pea-sized pieces of butter. I find that the best tool to do this is a pastry cutter (affiliate link.)

    Sprinkle 4-tablespoons of ice-cold water and mix it until it holds together to form a ball. If it doesn’t, feel free to add in more water 1-teaspoon at a time.

    Shape the dough into a 4-inch disk, wrap tightly with plastic wrap, and let it sit in the fridge for at least 45 minutes before rolling it out.

    How long to bake a galette

    While the timing depends on the particular recipe you are using, most galette recipes bake in 350 to 375-degree preheated oven for 50-60 minutes.

    A peach blueberry galette photographed as soon as it came out of the oven.

    A Few tips for the best galette dough recipe

    • Temperature is everything when it comes to a flaky galette dough: As in every pastry dough, whether it is used to make a galette, tart, or pie, the temperature of the dough is very important. It should be cold. If it gets warmer (and harder to manage) during the rolling out process, feel free to place in the fridge for a few minutes to harden.
    • “If your galette dough is too thick, the crust will be gummy and chewy, rather than flaky”: According to this article from Bon Appetit, the ideal thickness for the rolled galette dough is a uniform ⅛-inch thick for ideal browning that has a nice crisp. 
    • Be sure to bake your galette in the middle oven rack in a moderate temperature oven: Since the ideal thickness of the crust is ⅛-inch and it is directly baked on a sheet pan (rather than in a pie pan), the way to ensure even baking and browning is to bake it in a moderate temperature (350-375 F degree oven is ideal) oven on the middle rack.
    • Can I freeze this galette pastry? You sure can. If you decide to do so, be sure to wrap the dough tightly (to prevent freezer burn) with stretch film. The galette dough recipe below can be frozen up to 1 month. When ready to use it, let the dough thaw completely on the kitchen counter before you roll the dough.
    • Want to put your galette dough into good use? Try my Peach Blueberry Galette recipe. It is a delicious French galette recipe that is guaranteed to impress.
    Galette Dough Recipe Image
    Print

    Galette Dough

    A delicious galette starts with a buttery galette crust. This is my go-to galette dough recipe that I use for both sweet and savory galette recipes.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine French
    Prep Time 1 hour 10 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
    Servings 1 galette dough
    Calories 1744kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups (213 gr.) of all-purpose flour, more to flour the surfaces
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • 10 tablespoons (142.5 gr.) cold unsalted butter, cut into small cubes
    • 4-5 tablespoons ice-cold water
    • 1 large egg yolk

    Instructions

    • To make the galette dough: Place flour and salt in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse for a few times to mix. Add in the cold butter cubes. Pulse 8-10 times until butter resembles small clumps.
    • Turn the machine on and add in 4 tablespoons of ice-cold water in one tablespoon increments.
    • At this point, it should start to come together and form into a ball. If not add in the rest of the water until it does. 
    • Transfer onto a lightly floured surface, form it into a 4-inch disk, and wrap with plastic. Place in the fridge for at least 1 hour or overnight.
    • Take it out of the fridge 10 minutes before you are ready to roll it out.
    • Lightly flour your working surface. Roll the dough into a large 12-inch circle. Transfer onto the parchment paper and then onto the baking sheet. 
    • Place your filling (depending on the recipe you are using) on top slightly mounting in the middle, leaving a 3-inch border around the edges.
    • Roll the sides of the dough overlapping as you go around and pleating the dough.
    • Brush the edges of the dough (the outer crust) with egg yolk.
    • Bake according to the instructions of the recipe you are using.

    Video

    Notes

    • Prep time: 10 minutes for mixing the dough and 60 minutes for letting it sit in the fridge
    • This recipe yields one galette dough

    Nutrition

    Calories: 1744kcal | Carbohydrates: 144g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 120g | Saturated Fat: 74g | Cholesterol: 496mg | Sodium: 1194mg | Potassium: 201mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 3758IU | Calcium: 85mg | Iron: 9mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/galette-dough/feed/ 34
    10 Minute Golden Milk Recipe (Turmeric Milk) https://foolproofliving.com/turmeric-golden-milk/ https://foolproofliving.com/turmeric-golden-milk/#comments Sat, 23 Feb 2019 23:50:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22502 What is Golden Milk (Haldi Doodh) & Why Does This Recipe Work? Golden milk is a traditional Indian beverage that…]]>

    What is Golden Milk (Haldi Doodh) & Why Does This Recipe Work?

    Golden milk is a traditional Indian beverage that has been used for centuries in Ayurvedic medicine as a healing drink.

    At its core, it is made with turmeric root (or ground turmeric), milk (originally made with cow’s milk but can also be made with plant-based, dairy-free milk like almond or coconut), black pepper, and oil.

    While it has recently gained popularity in the media as “Turmeric Latte” or “Golden Milk Latte,” these modern names refer to the same ancient remedy: Haldi Doodh.

    To me, this 10-minute recipe is a natural way to warm up from the inside out.  However, if you are just getting started with making golden milk, there are a few important things you need to know to “unlock” the benefits of this ancient drink.

    It’s not just about the flavor, it’s also about the chemistry.

    A hand holding a warm mug of homemade turmeric milk on a wooden cutting board.

    Understanding the Role of Curcumin:

    The star of the show in this recipe is a component called curcumin. It is one of the most well-researched and well-known active ingredients in turmeric, and it has been known to promote holistic health through its antioxidant and anti-inflammatory properties

    The challenge, though, is that our bodies cannot absorb curcumin into the bloodstream when we consume it on its own.

    The Science of Absorption: Pepper and Oil

    This is where two everyday ingredients, black pepper and oil, come to our rescue to help with what experts call bioavailability, a fancy way of saying how much of the “good stuff” (the curcumin) your body can actually absorb and use:

    • Black pepper: One of the active components in black pepper, piperine, is known to help us absorb curcumin when they interact. In other words, a pinch of freshly ground black pepper helps our bodies absorb some of the benefits of this curcumin.
    • Oil: We also need a small amount of oil (or fat) because curcumin has poor water solubility. In other words, to benefit from its full potential, turmeric needs to come into contact with oil. In ancient Ayurvedic practice, golden milk was always made with ghee (clarified butter), but in my version here, I used coconut oil (or avocado oil) as it is widely available.

    Gentle Heat Is The Key:

    The final, but just as important, step is how you heat the milk. You want to warm it gently over medium-low heat until it is hot, but just before it comes to a boil. This is especially important if you are using ground turmeric powder. 

    By heating it slowly, we ensure the spices fully dissolve into the milk rather than clumping at the bottom. This not only makes the drink more effective but also significantly improves the texture.

    Golden Milk Ingredients

    The ingredient list for turmeric milk is short, and all are basic pantry ingredients.

    You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing to help you choose the best options and make this drink according to your taste.

    Milk: You can use unsweetened, full-fat almond milk, coconut milk, oat milk, or regular dairy milk. Coconut milk creates the creamiest result, while almond milk keeps it a bit lighter. 

    Cinnamon: You can use either a cinnamon stick or ground cinnamon. A cinnamon stick has a milder taste, while ground cinnamon blends directly into the milk, providing a stronger cinnamon flavor.

    Turmeric: This recipe works with either fresh turmeric root or ground turmeric powder, but the two are not interchangeable in terms of strength.

    Fresh turmeric has a more vibrant taste and is slightly more potent. Ground turmeric (sometimes sold as “turmeric powder”) is more concentrated per teaspoon and easier to find, but it can vary a lot in intensity depending on the brand. 

    If you are using ground turmeric, I recommend buying an organic, well-known brand that is made without pesticides, additives, or preservatives to ensure higher curcumin potency and avoid the risk of lead contamination.

    I usually buy and recommend Terrasoul, but any organic turmeric powder would work in this recipe.

    Should I peel fresh turmeric? I personally do not peel the skin. Instead, I give it a good scrub with a gentle brush under running water, then chop it into small pieces or grate it.

    Ginger: Fresh ginger offers a more complex, lightly spicy flavor, while ground ginger is a bit spicier and blends smoothly into the milk. While I personally like the version made with fresh ginger, either option works in this golden milk recipe.

    Oil: A small amount of fat is essential in this recipe. You can go the traditional way and use ghee (clarified butter), or use a more common neutral-flavored oil like coconut or avocado oil.

    Over the years, I have made this recipe with all of these oils, and they all work well.

    Black pepper: Just a pinch is all you need. Black pepper helps the body better absorb curcumin, the active compound in turmeric, and you will not taste it once the drink is ready.

    Can I use cayenne pepper instead? I would not recommend using cayenne pepper, as it does not contain piperine (the compound in black pepper that helps our bodies absorb curcumin).

    Sweetener: Maple syrup or honey are my go-to choices, but any sweetener would work. The amount you use depends on how sweet you want it. 

    If you are using honey, do not cook it in the saucepan as it is not safe to boil honey. Just add it to your cup to sweeten your drink.

    How to Make Golden Milk – 3 Different Ways

    Below, I outline three ways of making turmeric milk. As you read through it, you will see that the methods are pretty much similar, but the ingredients used are variations of the same things.

    I wanted to share this with you because ingredient availability may vary depending on where you live.

    Whether you’re working with fresh turmeric, ground turmeric, or a prepared golden paste, you can still make a warm, soothing cup of golden tea following one of the methods below:

    Method #1: Using Fresh Turmeric and Ginger (Most Potent)

    The first method uses fresh turmeric root. I think it is the best option if you prefer that potent turmeric flavor with that vibrant color.

    Here in Atlanta, I usually find it at my local farmers’ market. I usually grab a bunch and store it in the fridge, as it will keep well for about a month.

    To make golden milk with fresh turmeric root, I mix unsweetened homemade almond milk with fresh turmeric root, fresh ginger root, a stick of cinnamon, a pinch of black pepper, and a bit of coconut oil in a saucepan and cook it  (while stirring constantly) on medium heat just until it starts simmering.

    While there is no strict rule for how much of each ingredient to use, it ultimately comes down to personal preference. 

    That said, I’ve tested this recipe many times and find the ratios below to be a reliable starting point:

    Ingredients for turmeric golden milk recipe, including fresh turmeric root, fresh ginger root, cinnamon sticks, a pitcher of milk, a grater, and a knife from the top view.

    I use the following ratios for 2 servings of Fresh Turmeric Golden Milk Recipe:

    A tablespoon of maple syrup or honey (optional)

    2 ½ cups unsweetened almond milk or coconut milk

    2 inches of sliced fresh turmeric root

    1 inch sliced fresh ginger root

    ½ teaspoon of coconut oil (or ghee)

    A pinch of black pepper

    To make it:

    Step 1 – Once you have your ingredients ready, place everything in a saucepan (except the sweetener) and bring the mixture to a gentle simmer over medium heat. 

    Step 2 – Remove it from the heat as soon as it comes to a boil. Place a small strainer over a mug and strain the drink.

    Step 3 – Add your favorite sweetener, then stir well before drinking.

    Method #2: Using Ground Turmeric (The Quickest Method)

    The second method is to use turmeric powder, which is the best option if you want the fastest, most accessible option.

    Ingredients for making golden milk using ground spices including turmeric powder, ground ginger, and cinnamon, with a pitcher of milk.

    I used the following ratios for 2 servings of Turmeric Golden Milk Made with Turmeric powder:

    Maple syrup to taste (optional)

    2 ½ cups unsweetened almond milk

    1 ½ teaspoons ground turmeric powder

    ½ teaspoon ground ginger

    ½ teaspoon of coconut oil (or ghee)

    A pinch of black pepper

    To Make It:

    A woman is whisking haldi milk recipe in a saucepan from the top view.

    Step 1 – Place all the ingredients (except the sweetener) into a small saucepan placed over medium heat. Stir well to combine.

    Step 2 – Bring it to a simmer, while stirring occasionally.

    Step 3 – Pour into a mug, add in your favorite sweetener, and stir well to combine.

    Method # 3: Using Turmeric Paste (Best for Meal Prep)

    Another method for making turmeric gold milk is to use turmeric paste (aka golden paste). If you are interested in making this drink a daily habit and want to make it in just a few minutes, this method is for you.

    If you are not familiar, the golden paste is made by mixing ground turmeric powder with oil (such as coconut oil), black pepper, water, and other Ayurvedic spices like ginger, cardamom, and cinnamon. 

    A top view of a mug of hot golden milk next to an open glass jar of homemade golden turmeric paste, fresh turmeric roots, and maple syrup.

    You simply make a jar of it, keep it in the fridge, and can easily stir it into warm milk whenever you want a quick cup of turmeric milk.

    Nowadays, most health food stores sell turmeric paste. However, it is quite easy to make it at home. You can find the recipe, a quick how-to video, and all the details of making turmeric milk from golden paste at home in this turmeric paste recipe blog post.

    To make golden milk using turmeric paste: 

    Step 1 – Place a teaspoon of turmeric paste into a mug, pour hot milk over it

    Step 2 – Sweeten it with your favorite sweetener. Give it a good whisk, and your golden tea is ready to enjoy.

    Expert Tips for the Best Golden Milk

    Like most simple recipes, golden turmeric milk comes down to a few small details that make a noticeable difference in both taste and texture. 

    Below are a few tips I picked up during testing to help you get the smoothest, most balanced cup of turmeric milk on your first try.

    Use full-fat milk for the creamiest golden milk: If you are trying to bring down the calories, by all means use a low-fat milk, but if you are after a rather thick and creamy (latte-like) drink, I highly recommend using a full-fat milk. When mixed with a small amount of oil, the spices blend more smoothly, allowing the turmeric to work as intended. 

    No need to peel fresh turmeric or fresh ginger: While it is completely a personal preference, a good wash under cold water is usually enough. I simply scrub them clean and chop them into small pieces, skin and all.

    Watch the heat: Keep the milk at a gentle simmer and avoid boiling. High heat can alter the flavor of spices and may diminish some of turmeric’s beneficial compounds.

    Whisk as it warms: Turmeric and ginger, especially when ground, can settle to the bottom if the milk isn’t stirred consistently. Whisking as the milk warms helps the spices dissolve evenly and prevents a grainy texture.

    Fresh turmeric stains badly:  I like to place a sheet of parchment paper on my cutting board and wear gloves when handling it to keep my hands and counters from turning yellow. And trust me on this one, skip the light-colored clothes that day.

    Close-up view of a mug filled with golden turmeric milk, garnished with  ground cinnamon and containing a silver spoon.

    Troubleshooting Common Golden Milk Issues

    Why Is My Golden Milk Grainy? This usually happens when using turmeric powder and ground ginger. The texture can feel a little grainy if the spices do not fully dissolve into the warm milk.

    Here’s what you can do:

    • Whisk it well: Use a small whisk (or a frother) to fully blend the spices into the warm milk so they are better incorporated.
    • Strain it: Pour the drink through a fine mesh sieve to remove any bits that did not dissolve.

    Why Does It Taste Bitter? Bitterness is usually caused by using too much turmeric or heating the milk too much. The drink should also be warmed gently, not boiled, as high heat can make it more bitter. 

    If your drink tastes too strong, use a bit more milk to mellow out the bitterness.

    FAQs

    When is the best time to drink golden milk?

    It can be enjoyed at any time of day, but many people prefer it in the evening as warm milk is naturally soothing and can promote relaxation.

    Can I make golden milk ahead of time?

    Yes, this golden milk recipe can be prepared in advance and stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-5 days. When ready to enjoy, reheat it gently on the stovetop over low heat, stirring well.

    How To Make Haldi Milk Video

    Other Turmeric Recipes You Might Like:

    • A Simple Daily Sipper: If you enjoy turmeric in a tea-style drink, this Turmeric Ginger Tea has been my go-to all throughout the cold winter days. It is made with only five ingredients and is ready in less than 10 minutes.
    • A Quick Morning Blend: For a faster, blend-and-go option, this Green Turmeric Smoothie is a plant-based and naturally sweet way to start the day. Made with just a few ingredients and ready in about five minutes, this vegan, dairy-free.

    This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

    Turmeric Golden Milk recipe image
    Print

    Turmeric Golden Milk Recipe

    Learn how to make Turmeric Golden Milk: Made with turmeric, cinnamon, ginger, black pepper, coconut oil, and almond milk, this is an easy Ayurvedic drink recipe that offers a lieu of healing properties. Whether you are trying to reduce inflammation, get some relief from a terrible cough, or get some glow on your skin, this soothing drink is guaranteed to offer you the comfort you need.
    Course Drink
    Cuisine Indian
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes
    Servings 2 cups
    Calories 147kcal

    Ingredients

    • 2 ½ cups unsweetened full fat almond or coconut milk
    • 1 stick cinnamon or 1/4 teaspoon ground cinnamon more as garnish at the end
    • 2 inches fresh turmeric sliced or 1 ½ teaspoon ground turmeric spice
    • 1 inch fresh ginger sliced or ½ teaspoon ground ginger
    • 1/2 teaspoon coconut oil or any other neutral tasting vegetable oil like avocado oil, olive oil (a mildly flavored), etc.
    • Pinch black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon maple syrup or honey (more to taste)

    Instructions

    • Place milk, cinnamon stick, turmeric, ginger, coconut oil, and black pepper in a small saucepan.
    • Cook, stirring frequently, until warm but not boiling.
    • Give it a taste and add in your sweetener.
    • If you used fresh turmeric and ginger, strain it to your cups. If not, divide it in two mugs.
    • If preferred, sprinkle with ground cinnamon. Serve.

    Video

    Notes

    • The calorie information listed in the below nutrition label is for Turmeric Golden milk made with unsweetened almond milk. If you decide to use unsweetened full-fat coconut milk, the calorie count goes up to 549 calories.
    • Storage and reheating: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. When ready to reheat, simply place it in a saucepan and warm it on the stove until it is warmed through (I do not recommend boiling it for a long time)
    • Golden paste: If you are short on time or want to make this Ayurvedic drink a part of your daily routine, alternatively, you can make it in just a few minutes by using my golden paste recipe.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 147kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 409mg | Potassium: 87mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 403mg | Iron: 1mg
    A hand pouring creamy, homemade golden turmeric milk from a glass pitcher into a mug.
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/turmeric-golden-milk/feed/ 104
    How To Make Turmeric Paste https://foolproofliving.com/turmeric-paste/ https://foolproofliving.com/turmeric-paste/#comments Sat, 23 Feb 2019 23:46:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22475 It is no secret that my husband and I have been on a turmeric kick lately. Prior to moving to…]]>

    It is no secret that my husband and I have been on a turmeric kick lately. Prior to moving to Vermont, my warm beverage of choice was always coffee. However, since last winter, we have been hooked on turmeric-based drinks.

    It actually started with this Turmeric Ginger Tea. It was the perfect drink to sip on all day long in front of the fireplace. We still enjoy that quite often, but lately, we are also making Turmeric Golden Milk. It is especially great when you get a cold or have a cough that is hard to get rid of.

    Turmeric Paste along with fresh turmeric root

    I recently wrote a recipe for my favorite Turmeric milk recipe and talked about different ways of making it. One of those ways was with using turmeric paste.

    Nowadays, you can find jarred turmeric paste in health food stores, but I make my own so I thought I can share that recipe here with you.

    If you are like us, find comfort in a cup of hot turmeric milk latte in these cold winter days and want to be able to make it quickly, this post is for you.

    almond milk being poured into a mug

    What is Turmeric Paste

    Turmeric paste (also known as turmeric powder paste) is a combination of ground turmeric, oil (this could be coconut oil, ghee, or other neutral oils), water, ground black pepper, and other spices (like ground cinnamon, cardamom, and ginger) heated until melted and turned into a paste for the purpose of using it in turmeric milk, smoothies, curries, etc.

    Although turmeric can be effective on its own, by mixing it with other good-for-you ingredients like cinnamon and ginger we get to enhance its healing properties. With that being said, you can make this paste just by using turmeric powder, coconut oil, black pepper, and water.

    This turmeric paste can be kept in a jar in the fridge to use in various recipes. More on that below.

    How To Make Turmeric Paste (aka Golden Paste)

    I make my turmeric paste by mixing ground turmeric spice with grated (or zested) fresh ginger, ground cinnamon, coconut oil, black pepper, and water in a small saucepan in medium heat. I whisk it constantly until the oil fully melts.

    I use fresh ginger because it is widely available, but you can also use a teaspoon ground ginger instead of its fresh version.

    It is important that you do not overheat it as the primary compound in turmeric, curcumin, loses its benefits when it is cooked for longer periods.

    ingredients: Ginger, black pepper, water, spices

    Here you might ask, what is the best ratio of turmeric to black pepper and turmeric to coconut oil? Below is the formula that I follow:

    • ½ cup ground turmeric spice
    • 1 tablespoon ground cinnamon
    • 1 teaspoon fresh ginger, grated
    • 1 teaspoon black pepper
    • ¼ cup coconut oil
    • 1 cup water

    Once the oil fully melts and everything is fully mixed, I transfer it to a medium-sized airtight jar and keep in the fridge to use whenever I want.

    This turmeric paste recipe makes just a little more than a cup of turmeric paste.

    Wondering why we are adding black pepper and oil into the mixture?You can read all about it in this Turmeric Golden Milk post.

    How To Make Turmeric Milk Using Golden Paste

    The best thing about turmeric golden paste is that you can make turmeric golden milk in just a few minutes without having to get any other ingredients out. All you have to do is to mix a small amount of it with some hot milk.

    I think how much of it you use is a personal choice, but I usually like it best when I mix 1 teaspoon of turmeric golden paste with 1 ¼ cups of milk.  In terms of milk, I prefer either unsweetened almond milk, coconut milk or a combination of both.

    My favorite sweetener is maple syrup, but you can use honey as well.

    Here is a quick how-to video showing you how I make this turmeric paste and use it to make a cup of golden milk for myself:

    Turmeric Paste Benefits

    I don’t know about you, but I do my best to avoid taking pills if I can find a natural way to treat my health issues.

    For centuries turmeric has been a staple and a go-to spice in Indian and Chinese cuisines and used for a variety of health problems. Nowadays, it is very popular in Western cultures due to its antioxidant, antibacterial, anti-carcinogenic, anti-inflammatory properties.

    And turmeric is one of those great natural remedies. Studies show that the primary compound in turmeric, curcumin, is known to help reduce inflammation, prevent skin-related issues and allergies, reduce joint pain, and help our bodies build stronger immune systems. (SOURCE)

    I personally consume turmeric golden milk when I have a terrible cough that I just can’t get rid of. Drinking a cup of turmeric golden milk right before bed magically soothes my chest and gives me a relief from coughing, which later helps me get a good night sleep.

    You can read more about the benefits of turmeric in detail in this Turmeric Golden Milk recipe post.

    How Long Does Turmeric Paste Last

    As long as it is kept in an airtight jar (or container) in the fridge, it will last up to 2 weeks.

    A woman is placing some of the paste in a cup

    What Are Some Other Ways to Use

    I usually use golden paste to make golden milk, here are some other ideas to put it to good use:

    • Mix ½ teaspoon of turmeric paste into yogurt, top it off with your favorite granola for breakfast
    • Add a teaspoon (or less) in your favorite smoothies for an additional boost of nutrition
    • Mix it with plain yogurt and drizzle it over roasted vegetables
    • Blend it in your salad dressings
    • Mix a small amount of it with your favorite nut butter (i.e. almond or peanut butter) and spread it on toast.
    Turmeric milk made with turmeric golden paste recipe in a mug

    How Much Turmeric Per Day

    While its benefits are a mile long, you might want to stay away from consuming excessive amounts of turmeric. Because, overuse of turmeric may result in an allergic reaction on skin, nausea, risk of kidney stones, diarrhea, and upset stomach.

    Additionally, you should stay away from turmeric if you have kidney stones, gall bladder diseases, iron deficiencies, and diabetes. (SOURCE)

    But how much turmeric should you take in a day? According to this article, you should limit your ground turmeric intake to 1 teaspoon a day and fresh turmeric root intake to 1.5 to 3 grams a day.

    Can’t get enough of turmeric recipes? Try my delicious Turmeric Smoothies.

    TURMERIC PASTE RECIPE IMAGE
    Print

    Turmeric Paste Recipe

    If you are looking for an anti-inflammatory paleo friendly Turmeric Paste, than look no further! This easy to make turmeric paste is made with ground turmeric, fresh ginger, cinnamon, black pepper and coconut oil. It is ready in 10 minutes and can be stored in the fridge up to 2 weeks.
    Course Condiment, Non Alcoholic Drink
    Cuisine Indian
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 76kcal

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup ground turmeric spice
    • 1 tablespoon ground cinnamon
    • 1 teaspoon fresh ginger grated or minced
    • 1 teaspoon black pepper
    • ¼ cup coconut oil or any other neutral-tasting vegetable oil like avocado, olive (a mildly flavored), etc.
    • 1 cup water
    • optional maple syrup or honey to taste

    Instructions

    • Place ground turmeric, ground cinnamon, fresh ginger, black pepper, coconut oil, and water in a small saucepan and place over medium low heat.
    • Whisk to combine and cook until it forms a paste and coconut oil is fully melted.
    • Transfer to a jar with a lid. Let it cool to room temperature and store in the fridge up to 2 weeks.
    • When ready to make turmeric golden milk, place a teaspoon of turmeric paste in a mug and add in hot milk of your choice. Taste for sweetness and add in maple syrup or honey. Give it a stir and enjoy.

    Video

    Notes

    • The calorie information does not include any calories coming from optional sweeteners.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 76kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 5mg | Potassium: 249mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 4mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/turmeric-paste/feed/ 118
    5-Minute Vegan Banana Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-banana-smoothie/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-banana-smoothie/#comments Mon, 04 Feb 2019 18:47:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=21946 This post has been sponsored by Good Plants TM. All thoughts and opinions are my own. Last November my husband…]]>

    This post has been sponsored by Good Plants TM. All thoughts and opinions are my own.

    Last November my husband and I made an impromptu decision and signed up for an online workout program. We both have gained a few extra pounds since we moved to Vermont and have been feeling the weight of it. Plus, with the holidays ahead of us, we wanted to keep things under control and hopefully not gain any more weight.

    Vegan Banana Smoothie recipe photographed in jars

    Thankfully, we were able to stick to it and have been working out 6-days a week, first thing in the morning ever since. With our new workout routine, I have been thinking a lot about smoothies. They say, what you put in your body in the first 30 minutes after your workout is very important. To me, there is nothing better than a mason jar filled with a delicious smoothie.

    When I found Good Plants™ Almondmilk Probiotic Yogurt Alternative, I found myself in the mood for a good old smoothie.

    Now, you might say, who wants an icy cold smoothie in the middle of winter?! I would not blame you for that as I probably wouldn’t want to start my day with anything cold. However, ever since I found out about Good Plants™ almond milk probiotic yogurt alternative, I have been making smoothies without any ice or frozen elements (i.e. frozen fruit, ice, or frozen greens, acai, etc.). It has been a nice alternative to our usual oatmeal breakfast.

    Today’s recipe, Vegan Banana Smoothie and the variations I will talk about below has been a favorite in our house so I thought I would share it here with you.

    Clean eating banana smoothie ingredients
    healthy smoothie ingredients - Vegan banana smoothie ingredients

    As the name suggests, in addition to being vegan, this easy banana smoothie recipe is gluten-free and dairy-free. It comes together in 5 minutes and a great breakfast that you can take with you to work.

    How To Make A Vegan Smoothie – Healthy Smoothie Ingredients

    I know most of you are used to making your banana smoothie with milk and yogurt. While there is nothing wrong with that I sometimes like to switch things up good-for-you vegan ingredients.

    Regardless of the fruit you are using, you can make any vegan fruit smoothie by using the ingredients below:

    • Fresh fruit: While banana is a favorite fruit for most of us, if it is not your jam you can easily swap it whatever is in season. Berries, apples,  or any of your stone fruits would all work.
    • Liquid – Water or Plant-based milk: In terms of liquid, I usually go for unsweetened almond milk, but water would also work.
    • Yogurt – Plant-Based Yogurt Alternative: I find that adding yogurt alternatives to smoothies gives it a smooth and creamy texture. Like I mentioned earlier, I am currently loving the Good Plants™ Almondmilk Probiotic Yogurt Alternative. In addition to being an excellent source of fiber, it is dairy-free and vegan certified. I also like that it comes in 4 different flavors: vanilla, chocolate coconut, lemon meringue, and strawberry. While they are all very good, my favorite one is the strawberry flavor. Come summertime, I plan on adding a few fresh strawberries and turn this into a vegan strawberry banana smoothie.
    • Additional Fiber & Nutrition Sources: I always add in additional fiber sources like rolled oats (I buy gluten-free certified oats), flax seeds, and chia seeds. Adding those is an easy way to give it a nutritional boost.
    Simple Banana Smoothie with Milk - a woman pouring milk
    Simple Banana Smoothie being poured into a glass
    • Optional Plant-based Protein: My husband always asks me to put in a tablespoon of peanut butter to give it a nice protein boost. If you have peanut lovers in your family, peanut butter banana smoothie is a great variation of this vegan banana smoothie recipe.
    • Optional Green Leafy Vegetables: If I have it on hand, I sometimes add in a cup of green leafy vegetables like kale, spinach, or swiss chard. If you are like us, focused on clean eating in the new year and looking for ways to up your consumption of greens, adding some in your banana breakfast smoothie is a great way to sneak them in your diet.
    Vegan Smoothie Ideas - Clean Eating Banana Smoothie with straws

    How To Make A Creamy Smoothie

    If you are like me, like your vegan breakfast smoothie on the creamy side, you are not alone. When it comes to making your favorite smoothie creamy, you can try a few tricks:

    • Freeze your bananas: If you are making this smoothie during the warmer months, you can slice your ripe bananas, place them on a sheet pan, cover tightly with stretch film, and freeze until you are ready to use them.
    • Adding frozen bananas into the smoothie mixture eliminates the need to add in ice and make it watery. Instead, they make it super creamy texture almost like ice cream. Think about it, who would say no to a frozen banana smoothie in the middle of summer when it is a million degrees outside?
    • Add in Plant-Based Yogurt Alternative: If you are new to using plant-based yogurt alternative, you should definitely give Good Plants™ Almondmilk Probiotic Yogurt a try. Here in our local Shaw’s store, I find them in the yogurt aisle right next to the regular yogurt. Additionally, you can also find Good Plants Almondmilk Probiotic Yogurt Alternative at Hannaford, Shoprite, Giant, Harris Teeter stores.
    • Add in a ripe avocado into your smoothie: Similar to bananas, avocados are a great way to add some creaminess into your banana smoothie. Plus, they offer healthy fats, potassium, and fiber! And I have to tell you, adding a ripe avocado along with almond milk yogurt alternative makes a really creamy and thick banana smoothie.

    How To Make Vegan Banana Smoothie:

    The recipe is pretty straight forward. I kept the ingredients in the recipe below pretty simple, but feel free to add in other ingredients to change it up.

    Here is a quick video showing how to make healthy banana smoothie:

    If You Liked This Healthy Banana Breakfast Smoothie Recipe, You Might Also Like…

    vegan banana smoothies in jars
    Print

    Vegan Banana Smoothie

    Banana Split Smoothie recipe is a naturally sweetened vegan smoothie that is packed with healthy ingredients to help you satiate your sweet cravings for a quick breakfast or an afternoon pick me up. If you like banana split as a dessert, this 5-minute recipe is going to be your next favorite smoothie recipe.
    Course Smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 2 servings
    Calories 118kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 ripe banana or frozen
    • ¼ cup ground rolled oats
    • 1 teaspoon chia seeds optional
    • 1 cup unsweetened almond milk
    • 1 Plant based yogurt such as almond or coconut yogurt
    • ½ cup of crushed ice optional

    Instructions

    • Place banana, rolled oats, chia seeds (if using), almondmilk, almond yogurt, and ice into the blender.
    • Blend until smooth. Pour into a glass and enjoy.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Calories: 118kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 164mg | Potassium: 248mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 168mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-banana-smoothie/feed/ 18